tae
ee
avt
2ygh
see 4
5 iy
noe {.
a
+
seat
ra
eter
it
1%
Payee i j
Te lastrigte shee 5
;
+ its
amt et esta
Sehaten
Perel ti
FS EEN ees oy
Be se tgeert
iy
Ut atity
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2009 with funding from
Ontario Council of University Libraries
http://www.archive.org/details/proceedingsofaca35acaduoft
PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES
OF
PHILADELPHIA,
1 Seca2
COMMITTEE OF PUBLICATION:
JosEPH Lerpy, M. D., Gro. H. Horn, M. D.,
EDWARD J. Nouan, M. D., THOMAS MEEHAN,
JOHN H. REDFIELD,
Epitor: EDWARD J. NOLAN, M. D.
4
ah
PHILADELPHIA:
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES,
S. W. Corner Nineteenth and Race Streets,
1884.
4
.
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA,
, February 28, 1884. ©
I hereby*certify that printed copies of the Proceedings for 1883 have been
presented at the meetings of the Academy, as follows :—
Pages 9to 24 February 20, 1883.
= 25 to 40 March 13, 1883.
ye 4ito 56. : ; . March 27, 1883.
n¢ Di tor 12) | 3 4 . April 10, 1883.
a 73to 88 . ; : . May 22, 1883.
i 89 to 104. 4 ; . June 5, 1883.
“1105 to1i20 . : : . June 26, 1883."
“121i tols6) . ; 3 . July 24, 1883. .
<<, 187 to 152 August 7, 1883.
** 153 to 168 August 14, 1883.
** 169 to 184 September 18, 1883.
*¢ 185 to 200 November 13, 1885.
sc 201 to 232 December 11, 1883.
233 to 264 January 8, 1884.
¢ 265 to 280 January 15, 1884.
<< 281 to 296 January 22, 1884.
«¢ 297 to 312 January 29, 1884.
*¢ 3138 to 328 February 12, 1884.
EDWARD J. NOLAN,
. Recording Secretary.
PHILADELPHIA >
W. P. KILDARE, PRINTER.
LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.
With reference several articles contributed by each.
For Verbal Communications see Genera] Index.
Cope, ©. D. Notes on the Geographical Distribution of Batrachia and
Bepulia in Western North America... ..22...0--0-5--s.-2-.60%
On a new Extinct Genus of Sirenia from South Carolina.........
On the Mutual Relations of the Bunotherian Mammalia..........
On the Characters of the Skull in the Hadrosauride.............
On some Vertebrata from the Permian of [llinois.............-..
On the Fishes of the Recent and Pliocene Lakes of the Western
Part of the Great Basin, and of the Idaho Pliocene Lake......
Reeser 0 nO, WETISEC. Soc oss ooo koe aes Senna whic vce aaee:
Evermann, B. W., and Seth E. Meek. A Review of the Species of
Gerres (ONG In AMELIGAHANWALCIS = —.2%.-- s=ctsoc5 35. oa
Heilprin, Angelo. Note on a Collection of Fossils from the Hamilton
Sicyonmn Group of Pike ©0., Paes. 6 ain = sca secs ae a
On the Value of the ‘‘ Nearctic”’ as one of the Primary Zoological
Regions. Replies to Criticisms by Mr. Alfred Russel Wallace
HHA Eroe § heodore Galle. .occ sje oreinnus = cio ala nie ae anata wisia sxe ores
Hoopes, Josiah. Pinus KoraiensisSieb. and Zucc................---
Jordan, David S. Notes on American Fishes preserved in the
Museums at Berlin, London, Paris and Copenhagen............
eee. MANA YIKES SPCCIOSA. 2 s.~ <5 ss's\elnie teens =e + mae
Lewis, Graceanna. On the Genus Hyliota................-.0-22000-
McCook, Rev. Henry C. The Occident Ant in Dakota..............
Martindale, Isaac C. Obituary Notice of Charles F. Parker........
Mitchell, Chas. L. Staining with Hematoxylon ...............-...
Mohr, Charles. On Quercus Durandii Buckley..............-.....--
Osborn, Henry F. Preliminary Observations upon the Brain of
PPUAEAB NEUE EITER Draycote ota einhe oie a's =o = eile ie akahalafed> opaice win are lejajeraiaise'e)=i='
Parker, Andrew J. Reproduction in Amphileptus fasciola..........
Rand, Theo. D. Note on the Geology of Chester Valley and Vicinity.
Randolph, N. A. A Study of the Distribution of Gluten within the
WINE hii Get sic = onsite tae = ore nayriaye non itanevaelomeya spaleieis = a mnie inte
Sharp, Benj. On the Anatomy of Ancylus fluviatilis O. F. Miller and
PRMGMANIN PACTISELIS COORG «095 = ; OLS
The specimens from Ashland agree with those from the Mc-
Cloud, except that they are nearly black above and do not exhibit
the dorsal spots.
I compare this species with the Rana temporaria aurora from
the Russian River near the coast of California. That species has
but one palmar tubercle, the internal, which is of similar propor-
tions to that of the R. pachyderma. The skin is not thickened,
and is much less glandular everywhere. The membranum tympani
is entirely distinct. The posterior face of the femur is not ver-
miculated with yellow, but is covered with large black masses.
The whole of the under surfaces are brown-spotted. There are
four brown crossbars on the tibia: traces of the fourth sometimes
appear in the #. pachyderma. From Rana pretiosa it differs in
all these characters; besides those that belong to the latter, 7. e.,
the posteriorly-placed vomerine teeth and the short hind-legs.
Eumeces skiltonianus B. and G.
Gerrhonotus multicarinatus Bly.
The movements of this species are not nearly so active as are
those of the Jguanide and especially of the Lacertide.
Sceloporus undulatus thayeri B. and G.
Diadophis punctatus pulchellus B. and G.
Different from the typical form of the subspecies in having no
spots on the inferior surfaces. I did not admit this form as dis-
tinct in my check list, but it had best be retained. It differs
from the subspecies amabilis in having the inferior two rows of
scales unicolor with the abdomen. In life this is a_ brilliant
orange.!
1 At this locality I found, under bark of logs, numerous specimens of
Brachycybe lecontet Wood. This beautiful myriapod was originally described
28 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
13. Mourts oF Russtan RIvER, CALIFORNIA.
This locality is one hundred miles north of San Francisco.
The collection was made by myself, in and on the border of the
great redwood forest which there covers the hills and mountains
of the coast range.
Batrachoseps attenuatus Esch. Abundant.
Plethodon oregonensis Gird.
Abundant, and especially pleasing from its liquid, prominent
eyes. Always under the redwoods.
Cynops torosus Esch.
Abundant. This species is entirely aquatic.
Rana temporaria aurora B.andG. Rana draytoni B.andG. Rana longipes Hallow.
Not distinguishable as a species, in my opinion, from the Rana
temporaria of the palearctic realm.
Gerrhonotus multicarinatus Bly.
Eutenia sirtalis elegans B. and G.
14. Los ANGELES, CALIFORNIA.
Two collections from this locality are before me. One of these
was made by Mr. DeCorse, Hospital Steward, at Drum Barracks,
and was sent to the Smithsonian Institution. Prof. Baird sub-
mitted it to me for determination. The second collection was
given me by Mr. Horatio N. Rust, the archeologist, who made
it at Passadena, a short distance from the city. .
Cynops torosus Esch. Rust.
Batrachoseps attenuatus Esch. Rust.
Phrynosoma blainvillii Gray. DeCorse.
Sceloporus undulatus thayeri B.andG. Rust.
Uta stansburiana B. andG.
as from California, where it was supposed to have been collected by Dr. J. L.
Leconte. I, however, subsequently obtained it from East Tennessee, and
as Dr. Leconte had collected it in Georgia, it was supposed by Dr. Wood
that the locality California was an error. Its rediscovery on the McCloud
River shows that this species is found on the Pacific coast, as originally
stated by Wood, and that it ranges over the width of the continent. In
like manner a myriapod which I sent Mr. Ryder from the Russian River,
is stated by him to be much like Andrognathus Cope, a genus heretofore
known from the Alleghenies of Virginia.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 29
Specimens remarkably large, and with the postinguinal black
spot unusually large and distinct. DeCorse.
Gerrhonotus multicarioatus Bly. Rast.
Eumeces skiltonianus Bd. Rust, DeCorse.
Ophibolus getulus boylii B. and G. Rust.
Pityophis catenifer Bly. Rust, DeCorse.
Bascanium testaceum Say. Rust, DeCorse.
Eutenia hammondi Kenn. DeCorse.
Note on a Species of Xantusia.
The species described below was found by Dr. J. G. Cooper,
Zodlogist of the State Geological Survey of California, and was
placed in the collections of the University of California, where I
saw it. It was kindly lent me for examination by the authorities
of the University. The locality from which the specimen was
derived is unknown, beyond that it is Californian.
Xantusia riversiana Cope. American Naturalist, 1879, p. 801.
The position of this genus in the system has been discussed
by M. Bocourt! and myself.? Lassociated it with the genera Lepi-
dophyma Dum., and Cricosaura Peters, and stated that I was not
able to distinguish them from the family Zacertide. M, Bocourt
places these genera in the family ‘‘ Trachydermi,” which also
includes Heloderma Wiegm. This family is divided by M. Bocourt
into two subfamilies, the Glyphodonti for Heloderma, and the Agly-
phodonti for the three genera named, together with Xenosaurus
Pet. Previously to this* I had examined and compared the
osteology. of Heloderma and Xenosaurus. On account of the
differences in the form of the mesosternum, and in some other
points, I regarded Xenosaurus as the type of a peculiar family to
be placed with the Helodermide in the tribe Diploglossa. Xantusia,
Lepidophyma and Cricosaura are, on the other hand, not Diplo-
glossa, but are Leptoglossa. They are allied to the Lacertidz, and
especially to the Asiatic Ophiops, which is, like them, without eye-
lids. The character of the tongue is like that of the EHcpleopide,
uniformly squamous, and has no resemblance to that of the
Diploglossa. The characters of the scapular arch are those of the
Leptoglossa. The clavicle is loop-shaped proximally, and the
1 Mision Scientifique de Mexique, Herpetology, p. 303, 1878.
2 Proceedings of the Academy of Philadelphia, 1864, p. 229.
3 Loc. cit. 1866, p. 322.
30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
mesosternum is cruciform in Lepidophyma and Xantusia. I have
not been able to examine Cricosaura as to these points. In my
paper first mentioned, I stated that these genera have distinct
parietal bones. I think that they should, on this account, be
distinguished from the Lacertide, where they are codssified.
Whether they are distinct or united in the Ecpleopide, I do not
know, but the absence of eyelids will separate the group from
that family. I use for it the name first given by Baird,! Xantu-
sid, and characterize the three genera as follows :—
I. A large interfrontonasal plate; frontoparietals
meeting on the middle line.
Superciliary scales none; pupil round ; Lepidophyma.-
Superciliary scales present ; pupil vertical ; Xantusia.
II. Two interfrontonasals; frontoparietals separated
by interparietal.
Superciliary scales; Cricosaura.
All of these genera have femoral pores, and an exposed mem-
branum tympani.
The species which has given occasion for the above discussion
is the second one of the genus. It is several times as large as
the type X. vigilis Baird, and has a different coloration. The
digits are shorter.
The scales of the dorsal and lateral regions are rather coarsely
and uniformly granular. The abdominal scales are quadrate, and
are in sixteen longitudinal and thirty-two transverse rows. The
preanal scales are in three transverse rows, the anterior two of
four scales, with the median pair in both much enlarged, and the
posterior row of six scales. Scales of the gular region flat and
hexagonal, one row on the gular fold a little larger, and equal to
the anterior gulars. Scales of the anterior aspects of the fore-leg
and femur larger than the others; those of the tibia small, and
those of the posterior face of the femur still smaller. Scales
of the tail in whorls of equal width. The scales of equal size,
and all convex in cross-section but not keeled. None of the
scales of the body or limbs. keeled.
The nostril is situated in a small scute at the junction of the
sutures which separate the internasal, rostral, first labial, and first
t
1 Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1858, December.
1883. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 31
loreal scuta. Three loreals, increasing in size posteriorly. A
circle of scales surrounds the eye, of which the superior or super-
ciliary are the largest. The latter are separated by one row of
scales from the parietal, supraorbital and frontal on each side. The
interfrontonasal is nearly square. The frontonasals are consider-
ably in contact. The frontal is hexagonal, and is broader than
long. The interparietal is as large as each parietal. It is longer
than wide, and notches the contact of the frontoparietals. The
occipitals are large and quadrate. A single large temporal bounds
the parietals and occipital, and it is followed by two small scuta
which are in contact with the occipital. There are eight scales on
the upper lip. Of these the fifth is the largest, and is part of an
‘annulus which begins with two small scales at the posterior
loreal, and terminates at the seventh scale, opposite the middle
of the pupil posteriorly. The posterior labials are small,and are
separated by nine rows of still smaller scales from the large
temporal. No large auricular scales. The eye is rather large
and its diameter is contained in the length of muzzle in front of it
1-75 times.’ The vertical diameter of the auricular meatus is a
little less.
The first digits of both extremities are very short. The second
of the pes is very little longer than the fifth. All the ungues are
acute and are moderately curved. The hind-legs are remarkably
short, not exceeding the fore-legs. Extended forwards the ex-
tremity of the fourth digit reaches the elbow of the appressed
fore-leg. Femoral pores twelve oneach side; no anal pores. The
tail is not long, and its form is compressed with a flat inferior
surface. The section is a triangle, higher than wide, with the
apex narrowly truncate.
The color is light brown, with dark umber-brown spots on the
superior surface. These spots form, in general, one median and
two lateral rows, but as their forms are very irregular this order
is obscure. The median dorsal are the largest, and they send
branches laterally and anteroposteriorly, so that the result is rather
confused. Dark brown bands cross the muzzle on the frontonasal
plates and on the frontal, and form a wide U from the fronto-
parietals passing around the posterior edge of the occipitals.
Sides of head with rather large brown spots. Inferior surfaces
with minute brown spots which are least numerous on the middle
line. Tail with irregular pale spots.
32 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1885.
Measurements. M.
Total length, é 3 aes
Length to posterior edge of Gécipital ieee -» PSOE
Length to axilla, . : : ; ; ; 829
Length to groin, . . : : “ : Pb
Length to vent, . : f 5 : “One
Width between orbits aioe é : : ~ MOOT
Width at temples, ‘ 3 : : : + ORs
Length of forelimb, . , ; : 4 2 SOR
Length of manus, : : : : : sé GS
Length of hind-limb, . 3 : : : OS
Length of pes, . : : , : ; >: SO
Length of tibia, . 5 ; : ; q 2+ A POH
15. San DrieGo, CALIFORNIA.
My friend, James 8S. Lippincott, made a collection of repile
and ee at this locality, which throws considerable light
on some points of geographical distribution. A catalogue of the
species is here given :-—
Bufo columbiensis Bd. and Gird.
A single specimen with smoother skin than the more northern
forms. Gland on the surface of the tibia very distinct.
Spea hammondi B. and G.
See antea, page 14. Four specimens.
Eumeces skiltonianus Baird.
A specimen with the scales of the dark bands pale centered,
and with a very thick tail.
Verticaria hyperythra Cope.
Cnoewidophorus tessellatus tigris B. and G
Aniella pulchra Gray.
Gerrhonotus multicarinatus Blv.
Uta stansburiana Bb. and G.
Crotaphytus wislizeni Bd. and Gird.
Phrynosoma blainvillei Gray.
Rhinochilus lecontei B. and G.
Hypsiglena ochrorhynchus Cope.
Bascanium testaceum Say.
GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
The results to zodlogical geography obtained by the preceding
identifications are as follows :—Collection No 1. The extension
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA 33
northwards of the ranges of Crotalus molossus and Stenostoma
dulce. No.2. The extension northwards of the ranges of Diado-
phis regalis, Crotalus lepidus and Holbrookia texana. No. 4. The
extension to the Rocky Mountains of the range of Spea hammondi,
No. 6. The discovery of a new Scaphiopus in the Great Basin
district ; and of the southern extension of Rana pretiosa into the
same. No. 7. The discovery that the Northern Pacific fauna
extends east to the Rocky Mountains. This fauna is especially
represented by Bascanium vetustum, Rana pretiosa and Bufo
columbiensis. No. 8. The fact that the Great Basin district of the
Sonoran fauna extends north to the southern slope of the Rocky
Mountains in Idaho, where are found several of its species. These
are Phrynosoma platyrhinum, Crotaphytus wislizeni, and Uta
stansburiana. No.9. The discovery that the same fauna extends
north along the eastern slope of the Sierra Nevada to the begin-
ning of Surprise Valley, California. No. 10. The determination
that the Northern Pacific fauna extends from Surprise Valley,
eastern California, northwards as far as my explorations have
extended, viz., to Silver Lake and Klamath Lakes. No. 15. The
determination of a wide southern range for Spea hammondi and
Bufo columbiensis, and northern range for Verticaria hyperythra.
These results indicate that the Pacific region has a much greater
extension eastward than it has been supposed to have, but which
was foreshadowed in my paper on the Zodlogy of Montana,
published in 1879.1. They also indicate that it must be divided
into three districts. These I call the Idaho, the Willamet, and
the South Californian districts. The first is characterized by the
absence of Gerrhonotus and Cynops and of certain species of
Amblystoma. The South Californian is characterized by the
presence of Hypsiglena and Rhinochilus, and absence of Amblys-
toma. »It is allied to the Sonoran region, to which it is adjacent.
As regards the relation which the Sonoran region as a whole
bears to the Nearctic and Neotropical realms, some remarks may
be in place here. It is a question with some naturalists to which
of the two it should be referred, and some would exclude it from ~
the Nearctic without fully determining its relations to the Neo-
tropical realm.
There can, however, be no doubt that it lacks all the peculiar
1 American Naturalist, p. 435.
34 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
features of the Neotropical realm, and if it lacks some of those
of the Nearctic also, its types are mostly representative of the
latter rather of the former. I content myself here with confirming
this general principle by reference to the principal families and
genera of cold-blooded vertebrata.
R. Nearctica. R. Sonoriana. R. Neotropicalia.
PISCES.
Salmonide. Salmonide.
Cyprinide. Cyprinide. Characinide.
Catostomide. Catostomide.
BATRACHIA.
Ranide. Ranide.
Scaphiopide. Seaphiopidee.
Cystignathide.
Amblystomide. Amblystomide.
REPTILIA.
Lacertilia.
Sceloporus. Sceloporus. Liocephalus.
Eumeces. Eumeces. Mabuia.
Ophidia.
Bothrops.
Bascanium. Bascanium, Drymobius.
Tropidonotus. Tropidonotus. Helicops.
Eutenia. Eutenia.
Pityophis. Pityophis.
Diadophis. Diadophis. Rhadinza.
Coniophanes,
Ophibolus. Ophibolus. Erythrolamprus.
Pliocercus,
Oxyrrhopus. —
Sibon.
Leptognathus.
Boa.
Xiphosoma.
Stenostoma. Stenostoma.
There are a good many genera which are found in the Sonoran
district, which do not occur in other parts of the Nearctic realm.
These genera are frequently confined to it, but when they are not,
1883. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 35
they are to be looked for in the Mexican region of the Neotropical
realm. I give a list of these genera, with a corresponding one
of the Mexican region, to illustrate the extent of the similarity
between the two regions.
R. Sonoriana. R. Mexicana,
PIscEs.
Plagopterine.
REPTILIA.
Lacertilia.
Heloderma. Heloderma.
Crotaphytus.
Uta.
Uma.
Callisaurus.
" Ophidia,
Gyalopium. Ficimia.
Phimothyra. : Phimothyra.
Trimorphodon. Trimorphodon.
Hypsiglena. Hypsiglena.
It seems then that the Neotropical relationships of the Sonoran
region are not great. In this consideration I have omitted the
genera which are common to the Mexican region and the Nearctic
realm in general. Such are Ranidx, Cnemidophorus, Sceloporus,
Bascanium, Tropidonotus, Eutzenia, Pityophis, Spilotes, Ophibolus
and Elaps. These forms serve to indicate the affinity between
the Nearctic realm and the Mexican region. The line between
the two is, however, not yet exactly drawn. The former extends
on the west coast at least as far south as Guaymas, and on the
plateau as far as Guanajuato. On the east coast the Neotropical
fauna reaches near to the Rio Grande. See On the Zodlogical
Position of Texas, by the writer,in Bulletin U.S. National Museum,
No. 20, August, 1880; and Eleventh Contribution to the Her-
petology of Tropical America, by E..D. Cope, Proceedings Amer.
Philosoph. Society, 1879, p. 267.
36 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
JANUARY 23.
The President, Dr. Lerpy, in the chair,
Twenty-six persons present.
Ovipositing of Argynnis cybele—Mr. H. SktnNER remarked
that he had noticed a female of Argynnis cybele acting as though
it were ovipositing, and seeing that it behaved in a peculiar
manner, he was led to watch its proceedings carefully. Instead of
attaching or cementing its eggs to the plant on which the young
or larvee are destined to feed, which is the usual habit of butterflies
and moths, it hovered about a foot in height over a bed of violets,
and at intervals would remain stationary and drop an egg from
this distance to the food plant below. This seemed a remarkable
procedure, inasmuch as it differed from the metlfod which has
been found to be so constant in this order. It remains to be seen
whether this species always drops it eggs from a height, or only
behaves in the peculiar manner occasionally while ovipositing.
Also whether the other species of the genus Argynnis lay their
eggsina like manner. He thought it quite likely that A. myrina
and A: bellona do so occasionally, as they differ from the other
butterflies in the readiness with which they lay their eggs. He
had known them to oviposit in chip boxes or other receptacles in
which they were confined. He knew of no other species which
behave thus. It had been stated that the species of the genus
feed only on violets, which was probably not the case.
The following, received through the Botanical Section, was
ordered to be printed :—
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 37
ON QUERCUS DURANDII Buckley.
BY CHARLES MOHR.
The rediscovery of this fine tree in Alabama adds now definitely
another one to the number of oaks known to inhabit the forests
east of the Mississippi River. First discovered by Prof. Buckley
in 1841 in Wilcox County, Alabama, it was described from spec-
imens collected near Austin, Texas, twenty years afterwards. I
had occasion to study the tree in several localities in its western
home during my investigations of the forest growth of south-
western Texas, in December, 1880; subsequently I directed my
attention to its rediscovery in the eastern Gulf region, and par-
ticularly in Alabama. After a fruitless search through three
seasons, I was finally rewarded at the close of the one just passed,
in finding this oak in the woods covering the limestone ridges
bordering the Little Cahabe River in Bibb County, Alabama.
The largest of the trees observed measured 2 feet in diameter
by an estimated height of about 70 feet. The trunk divides at a
height from 30 to 35 feet above the ground; the heavy primary
limbs are erect, tall, and the head of the tree is of an oblong
shape; if resembles in the habit of growth greatly the white oak ;
the bark is close, more so than in the Texan tree, where it is found
inclined to be somewhat flaky, of a bright, almost pure white
color, by which it is at once distinguished from the latter. There
is scarcely a tree which shows greater variation in the size and
shape of its leaves, which were at the date of its rediscovery, 11th
November, for the greatest part shed. Only on some late, vig-
orous shoots, was the foliage yet fresh and green found to persist.
The leaves are short petioled, from 2 to 34 inches in length, and
from 5 to 24 inches at their greatest width, always attenuated at
the base. They are either roundish, ovate or obovate towards
the apex, largely dilated, irregularly and obtusely, more or less
deeply three-lobed, or narrowed to lanceolate with shallow, distant
lobes, a mere wavy or entiremargin. Of a firm texture, the leaves
are pubescent along the veins beneath when older, with a fine,
close, pale tomentum.
The fruit is of annual maturation and (at least during this
season) produced in abundance, short peduncled to sessile, single,
in pairs or in clusters of three and four; small, from three-eighths
38 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
to five-eighths of an inch long. The nut is perfectly smooth,
shining, of a light tan-color, ovate, somewhat narrowed towards
the base, with the apex slightly compressed and umbonate to
about one-third of its length, immersed in a shallow cup with
closely appressed, slight, knobby and smoothish scales. The nut
is sweet and regarded as the best of mast. The acorns seem to
germinate in situations more or less exposed to light; the large
trees are in more open situations found surrounded by their
numerous offspring in all stages of growth.
From the limited knowledge we possess, but little can be said
of the distribution of this oak. So far as known, it is confined to
a calcareous soil, be it on the rocky uplands or in the bottom lands,
the soil of which in western Texas consists of a fine calcareous silt.
It seems not to occur west of the basin of the Colorado River; it
was not found near New Braunfels or around San Antonio; on
the dry, rocky hills near Austin, it scarcely reaches the dimensions
of a middle-sized tree; in the rich bottom of the lower Guadeloupe
it attains the proportion of the larger trees of the forest; there a
number of trees were measured and found from 2 to fully 3 feet
in diameter. One felled to the ground measured 37 inches through
and 86 feet in length, being perfectly sound. In such localities
most favorable to its development, it is esteemed as the most
valuable of the timber trees; in its quality equal to the best of
white oak timber, it enters into all the manifold uses to which the
latter is applied, and which render the white oak of such great
importance.
As far as known, the tree has not been found in eastern Texas,
Louisiana, Mississippi, and the northern part of Alabama. In the
latter State it seems in its northern extension confined to the
southern edge of the silurian limestone formation at the 33° of
latitude, at an elevation not exceeding 250 or 300 feet above the
Gulfof Mexico. In reply to several inquiries made since, in regard
to its occurrence in the central and lower part of the State, where
the tree is called “ Bastard Oak,” it has become evident that it is not
rare southward throughout the cretaceous belt on the rocky banks
lining the water courses, to the tertiary limestone hills below. Its
absence in the extensive territory: between the latter and the calca-
reous hills on the Colorado River, nearly 700 miles to the westward,
can be accounted for by the prevailing sandy or argillaceous soils
quite destitute of lime, whose presence seems to be a necessary
requirement for its growth.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 39
JANUARY 30.
The President, Dr. Levy, in the chair.
Twenty-eight persons present.
The following papers were presented for publication :—
“ Urnatella gracilis,” by Joseph Leidy, M. D.
“On the Extinct Peccaries of North America,’ by Joseph
Leidy, M. D. .
“The Terrestrial Mollusca inhabiting the Society Islands,” by
Andrew Garrett.
The death of John Wister, a member, was announced.
Hybrid Birds.—Cuas. TownsEnD referred to the rare occurrence
of hybridity among N. Am. Passeres, and stated that two species
of native warblers had recently been found to be hybrids, between
species of the genus Helminthophaga. Heexhibited a bird taken
by Mr. W. L. Baily in Dec., 1882, near Haverford College, Pa.,
which proved to be a hybrid between the- Snowbird and the
White-throated Sparrow, birds of different genera, which was
more remarkable.
After referring to the marks of hybrid origin borne by some
doubtful species, handed down by the earlier ornithologists, he
remarked that hybridity would doubtless be found a sufficient
explanation for many obscure species that are standing puzzles
to the ornithologists of to-day.
Mr. Chas. Morris was elected a member of the Council, to fill the
vacancy caused by the election of Dr. Ruschenberger as Curator.
The following were elected members :—
F. A. Genth, Jr., Clarence R. Claghorn, G. Howard Parker,
John B. Deaver, M. D., Wm. L. Springs, H. T. Cresson, Jacob L.
- Wortman and Emily G. Hunt.
———e
FEBRUARY 6.
The President, Dr. Levy, in the chair.
Twenty-three persons present.
A paper entitled “A new Extinct Genus of Sirenia,” by Edw.
D. Cope, was presented for publication.
40) PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
On a supposed Human Implement from the Gravel at Phila-
delphia.—Professor H. Carvitt Lewis stated that through the
kindness of Mr. John Sartain, the well-known engraver of this —
city, a supposed stone implement had come into his hands, which,
from the circumstances in which it was found, becomes of great
interest. In digging a pit below the cellar of the house No. 728
Sansom Street, Philadelphia, after passing through regularly
stratified layers of gravel and sand, a loose, clean “ water gravel”
was reached at a depth of 24 feet from the surface of the street.
The grade of the street is here about 35 feet above the mean level
of the Delaware River, and the depth of the drift deposits, as
shown by an artesian-well boring at the Continental Hotel, a few
hundred feet distant, is 45 feet, gneiss rock being reached at that
depth. The drift deposits consist of the usual alternations of
sand and gravel with occasional streaks of clay, the whole being
horizontally stratified.
The specimen was found at a depth of 24 feet in a loose gravel,
where water flowed freely, and lay beneath a series of horizontally
stratified layers of gravel and clay, which were entirely undis-
turbed, and were as originally deposited. Mr. Sartain saw the
specimen taken out and testifies as to the accuracy of the above
statement.
The supposed implement is an oblong rectangle in shape, 164
as in length, nearly 4 inches in width, and in thickness varying
from 1 inch at the edge to 14 inches at the centre. It is ground
to a smooth cutting-edge at the two extremities. Itis rectangular
in section, the sides forming right-angles with the faces. The
sides are ‘parallel with each other, but the faces are undulating
surfaces, on one of which is a prominent longitudinal ridge, an
inch and a half in width.
Each end of the implement appears to have been smoothly
ground to form a square, even cutting-edge, an equal amount
of grinding having been done on either side. Both extremities
are similar. The implement is as unusual in shape as it is in size.
It is double the length of ordinary celts, and was possibly a
lapstone of some kind.
The late Professor Haldeman, who examined the specimen,
expressed great interest in it, and pronounced it undoubtedly of
human workmanship.'
1Mr. E. A. Barber, a well-known archeologist, reports, after a close
examination of the implement, as follows :—‘‘The peculiar marking
or pecking shows it to be undoubtedly artificial. This pecking is charac-
teristic of many pestles and other heavy stone implements found in
this part of the country. There are certain small surfaces (the sides and
part of the face) which have not beei worked, but the greater part of the
implement has been artificially pecked, and the ends have been ground
down by abrasion, as may distinctly be seen. The character and use of the
implement are not indicated by its shape, but there is no doubt at all as to
its artificial workmanship.’’
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 4]
Professor Lewis was not prepared to express such a positive
opinion as to its artificial origin. The straight, parallel sides of
the specimen, resemble the form of natural cleavage fragments of
some sandstones and flagstones. Such cleavage fragments are
frequently harder in the centre than along the edges, this being
the result of a concretionary force, and if ‘the specimen has been
shaped by subsequent water action, the harder central portion
would resist action and form the ridge already described. The
regular bevelling at each extremity would, however, be a very
unusual form to be produced by natural erosive forces.
The implement, if such it be, would be the first that has been
discovered in the Philadelphia gravel, and would become of great
interest in its bearing upon the antiquity of man on the Delaware.
The implements found by Dr. Abbott in the grayel at Trenton are
‘ of a much more rude type, being closely allied in shape with the
palzolithic implements of the river drift of several European
localities. They are never ground down to an edge like the speci-
men now described, but are rudely chipped. The Trenton imple-
ments, moreover, are made from Triassic argillite, while this one
is made from a compact yellowish-brown sandstone.
As the speaker had endeavored to show in a former communi-
cation,! the Trenton gravel is a post-glacial deposit made at the time
of the final disappearance of glaciers from the headwaters of the
Delaware, while the Philadelphia red gravel is somewhat older,
having been formed during the glacial epoch at a time when this
region was depressed 150-180 feet lower than its present level.
Both gravels are true river gravels.
From the geographical position of the locality where the imple-
ment was found, it is probable that it belongs to the older of the
two gravels. As, however, Professor Lewis had not seen the gravel
at this place, judgment was reserved upon this point.
It would, indeed, be a curious fact if it were proved that an
implement of neolithic type belonged to a gravel older than that
which contained only palzeolithic implements.
Should the specimen under consideration really belong to the
gravel, and be proved to be artificial, it will carry back the antiquity
of man to glacial times—an antiquity already assigned by numerous
discoveries elsewhere. Unlike as this is to the paleolithic imple-
ments of Trenton, it is by no means the first neolithic implement
reported from a river gravel.
Mr. John Ford? has discovered a polished stone axe in the
gravel forming the outer bluff of the Mississippi River, near
Alton, Ill., which is of great interest. This axe, now in the
archeological collection of the Academy, was taken by Mr. Ford
from a perpendicular face of gravel freshly cut and exposed by a
road cutting; and, accompanied by a number of fossil land and
1 Proc. Acad. Nat. Se. (Min. and Geol. Section), Nov. 24, 1879.
2 Proc. Acad. Nat. Se. Phila., 1877, p. 305.
4
49 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AUADEMY OF [ 1883.
fresh-water shells of Quaternary age, a bone of Canis, and a
specimen of lignite, lay at a depth of twenty feet in the gravel,
and at an elevation of 50 feet above the river. Mr. Ford states
that ‘the wall referred to presented in every part a solid front,
without fissure or crevice, everywhere hard and impenetrable
except by pick or crowbar, and yet twenty feet under the surface,
within this strong matrix deposited by water thousands of years
ago, laid the evidence of the presence of the man of the period, a
stone axe artistically made, and doubtless used for the purposes
of battle.”’? The implement thus found by Mr. Ford is more finely
finished than that from the Philadelphia gravel. It is made of
hard syenite.
The implements said to occur in the auriferous gravels of Cali-
fornia, described by Professor Whitney and others, and those
from the loess of the Missouri Valley in Nebraska, discovered by
Professor Aughey, are also of neolithic type, the California
implements being as perfect as anything now made.
It may be, therefore, that in America rudeness of workman-
ship is not necessarily associated with great antiquity.
Opportunity is here taken to refer to a recent paper by Professor
H W. Haynes,! entitled “Some indications of an early race of
men in New England,” in which the author describes some rough
fragments of granite and quartzite found in various localities in
Massachusetts, Vermont, and New Hampshire, which he considers
to be rude forms of implements, more primitive than those of the
Delaware gravels, and which are therefore to be regarded as relies
of primeval man.
These objects are of various shapes, sometimes pointed, some-
times with sharp edges all around, and frequently sharp on one
side and irregular on the other. These latter were regarded as
implements adapted for being held in the hand for use in chop-
ping or cutting. All these forms are of ruder type and coarser
fabric than the implements of the Trenton gravel. They were
found at localities where none of the ordinary traces of Indian
occupation-could be discovered, and the author infers from them
the former existence in New England of a race of men different
from and less advaneed than the Indians.
With characteristic courtesy, Professor Haynes invited the
speaker to make a personal examination of his full collection of
these interesting objects.
A careful study of each specimen convinced Professor Lewis
that the angularity of these rock fragments, while often resembling
that of artificial forms, is in reality due to natural causes rather
than to any human workmanship. Cleavage and frost-fracture
and weathering planes appear to have been the sole agents in the
* production of the greater part of these forms. Upon most of the
specimens examined, Professor Lewis was able to detect traces of
1 Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., xxi, p. 382, Feb. 1, 1882.
s
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 43
the original cleavage or weathering planes parallel to certain sides
of the fragment, which clearly indicated their mode of formation.
Similar fragments occur in almost every portion of the country,
their shape varying with the material of which they are formed.
Professor Haynes himself states in the paper referred to,
‘““ Wherever it has been in my power to make the long and labor-
ious search that is required, I have succeeded in finding them,”
ete. It is readily understood how a skilled archeologist, accus-
tomed to find a use for every rude implement, would naturally
find design also in the close imitations made by Nature.
Among these objects of natural origin there were also a very
few which bore traces of human handiwork, some of these being
apparently “ skin-scrapers.’’ These latter often occur with the most
highly finished Indian arrow-heads, and offer, therefore, no evi-
dence of high antiquity. The cases where the same Indian tribe
has manufactured implements of the finest workmanship at the
same time with those of rudest make, each being intended for
different uses, are so numeyous as to need only to be mentioned.!
Returning finally to the supposed implement from the Phila-
delphia gravel, now brought before the attention of the Academy,
Professor Lewis stated that he did not desire to urge any one
interpretation of it, but merely to offer some particulars which
might not otherwise see the light, and to show their meaning if
verified hereafter. Whatever value might be attached to the cir-
cumstances of the discovery of this specimen or to its apparent
artificial origin, it would at least serve to stimulate a further
search for evidences of man in the gravels underlying the city.
‘An implement found in a thickly populated district, more
especially as it occurred in a shifting water gravel, would always
be open to suspicion, and at all events a single specimen is not
sufficient upon which to base the broad conclusions which would
otherwise be warranted.
Note on a Drilled Mall in the Haldeman Collection of
Antiquities.—Mr. H. T. Cresson called attention toa large drilled
mall or hammer-head of stone. from the Haldeman collection of
antiquities. It was found at Peach Bottom, Lancaster County,
Pennsylvania, in 1866, and weiglis eight and three-quarter pounds.
Most pre-historic hammer-heads or stone malls, consist of oval
pebbles, small boulders of quartzite, granite, or other hard mate-
rials, which show modification by the hand of man, and have
generally undergone more or less of pecking and polishing to bring
them into a required shape. The mall exhibited did not possess
any groove, but had a drilled hole for the insertion of a haft, which
1 At a meeting of the Academy held a week ago, Mr. Aubrey H. Smith
presented two Indian implements picked up by himself on the shores of
the Loyalsock Cieek, Lycoming Co., Pa., where they lay side by side. One
was a rudely chipped implement like those of the Trenton gravel, while
the other was a delicately formed arrow-point.
44 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
is of rare occurrence in any form of axes or* hammers belonging
to our American Indians, except in the case of ceremonial weapons.
The length of the haft-hole in this mall is four and a half inches;
but its width of one inch, which in the drilling from either end
toward the centre, narrows to half an inch, does not seem to be
sufficient in comparison with its size to warrant the insertion of
a handle; for this reason the speaker was inclined to believe that
it was in an unfinished condition. Malls have been found in the
ancient copper mines at Keeweenaw Point and Isle Royal in Lake
Superior without grooves for hafting, and occasionally with double
grooves. There are malls in use at present among the Sioux
Indians for breaking bones and pounding pemmican, but these are
firmly encased in raw hide, except that portion of the head used
in striking. The occurrence of this kind of haft-hole, excepting
as before stated in the ceremonial weapons, is not often seen,
resembling in this respect some of the neolithic malls and hammers
of the eastern continent.
FEBRUARY 13.
The President, Dr. Lerpy, in the chair.
Thirty-three persons present.
The following papers were presented for publication :—
“A new Unio from Florida,” by Berlin H. Wright.
““ Notes on the Birds of Westmoreland Co., Penna.,” by Chas.
H. Townsend.
The Publication Committee reported in favor of publishing the
following papers in the Journal of the Academy :—
“ Urnatella gracilis,” by Jos. Leidy, M. D.
“On the Extinct Peccaries of North America,” by Jos. Leidy,
Mh:
“The Terrestrial Mollusca inhabiting the Society Islands,” by
Andrew Garrett.
Change of Color in a Katydid.—Professor Lewis recorded a
curious instance of modification in color in the case of a katydid,
where the normal light green tint had been replaced by a bright
scarlet, the complementary color. The insect, which was found at
Point Pleasant, N. J., differs in no way from the common katydid,
Cyrtophyllum concavum Say, except in the unusual color.
On the Reproduction and Parasites of Anodonta fluviatilis.—
Prof. Lripy directed attention to a basketful of living fresh-water
mussels, Anodonta fluviatilis, which were obtained for him through
the kindness of Rey. Jesse Y. Burke, and are now placed at the
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 45
disposal of members who wish to have them. They are fine robust
specimens, the larger ones measuring 6 inches in length by 3 inches
in height and almost 24 inches in thickness. They were obtained
from a little pond occupying an old marl pit, near Clarksboro,
Gloucester Co., N. J.
These mussels appear to be exceedingly prolific. The pregnant
females have the branchial uteri, as they have been appropriately
named by Dr. Isaac Lea, enormously distended with perfected
embryos. These appear with a cinnamon-brown shell, having a
conspicuous spinous tooth or hook to each valve, and are furnished
with long byssal threads. Wishing to ascertain the proportionate
amount of embryos, the following plan was adopted :—In an indi-
vidual 6 inches long the soft parts were weighed and found to be
135°44 grammes. The branchial uteri weighed 64 grammes and
the inner gills 7°34 grammes. Supposing the latter to be of the
same weight as the outer gills, free from embryos, this weight
subtracted would leave 56°66 grammes as that of the embryos, and
78°78 grammes as the weight of the rest of the animal. In another
specimen in which the weight of the soft parts was 113°T5 grammes,
the branchial uteri weighed 45°5 grammes, and the inner gills 5:2
grammes. Subtracting the weight of these would leave 40°5
grammes as the weight of the embryos, and 73:45 grammes for the
rest of the animal. In another specimen by weight, and counting,
the embryos in a milligramme were estimated to be 1,280,000.
The mussels are infested with many water mites creeping about
among the gills. The young of the same, in various stages, were
observed imbedded in the mantle. The mite appears to be iden-
tical with the species Atax ypstlophorus, which is a parasite of the
common mussel, Anodonta cygnea, of Europe. It was discovered
and described just 100 years ago, under the name Acarus ypsilo-
phorus, by Dr. Christophori Gottlieb Bonz (Nova Acta Phys. Med.
Acad. C. L. C. Nat. Cur., Nuremberg, 1783, 52, Tab. I, figs. 1-4).
It is described and figured by Pfeiffer, with the name of Limno-
chares Anodonte (Naturg. deutscher land und suss-wasser Mol-
lusken, 1821, Taf. I, fig. 12); by Dr. Karl Ernst v. Baer, under
the name of Hydrachne concharum (Nova Acta, Bonn, 1826, 590,
Taf. X XIX, fig. 19); by P. J. van Beneden (Mem. de l’Acad. R.
des Sciences de Belgique, XXIV, 1850), and by Ed. Claparede
(Zeits. f. wiss. Zoologie, 1868, 445).
Dr. Bonz’s description, referring chiefly to the form, color and
marking of the mite, applies to ours; and further he thought the
description of the details, of Claparede, applies sufficiently well
to the same.
The characters of our mite are briefly as follows :—
Body ovoid, black, with a sulphur-yellow median line, often
more or less interrupted, forked in front,and ending in an angular
spot behind. The yellow marking divides the black into a pair
of lateral reniform spots and an anterior irregular lozenge spot.
Sides brown, from the eggs shining through. Head gray, with
46 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
dumb-bell eye-spots. Limbs gray, translucent, with the chitinous
investment bluish black, hirsute, ending i in pairs of double falcate
ungues. Terminal joint of the palps’ ending in three minute
uncinate denticles. Anal plates of the females usually with about
18 to 22 acetabula to each. Length of body 1°375 to 1°75 mm.,
breadth 1:125 to 15 mm. Inhabits the branchiz and mantle of
Anodonta fluviatilis.
The colors depend mainly on the contents shining through the
transparent chitinous investment, which under reflected light
exhibits a bluish-black tint. Commonly the black color is intense ;
and in alcoholic specimens the whole body is black. In several
individuals the black passed into a chocolate hue. Dr. Bonz
describes the European mite as black, with the median dorsal
mark pale yellow; Pfeiffer as red-brown with a citron-yellow
mark, and Beneden says it shows a Y in white, from which it was
named.
The number of acetabula to the anal plates is variable; in one
mite he found 23 to each plate, in a second 22 to each, in a third
22 to one and 17 to the other, and in a fourth 18 to one and 17 to
the other. Claparede gives from 15 to 20 as the number to each
plate in the European mite.
The variations of our mite, from the characters given of the
European mite, are suchas occur among individuals of either, and
he therefore saw nothing distinguishing ours as a different species.
Claparede describes another mite which infests the European
Unios, which he distinguishes under the name of Aftax Bonzi. The
speaker had also observed a different mite, infesting the common
mussel, Unio complanatus, of the Delaware River; of this mite he
. exhibited a drawing made in November, 1854. "He suspected it
to be the Atax Bonzi; but the question can only be more positively
answered after the examination of certain details, which he hoped
soon to have the opportunity of making.
If our two parasitic mites are identical with those of European
mussels, it not only makes it appear probable that they are of
common origin, but renders it the more probable that this is like-
wise the case with their hosts, even if these are not regarded of
the same species.
Professor Lertpy also exhibited a collection of body-lice,
Pediculus vestimenti, from Jews of Odessa, Russia, presented by
Dr. A. G. Stratton. They range in size from 1°25 to 3°875 mm. in
length, and appear in no respect to differ from those found on
natives of our own country
The Ice of the Glacial Period.—Professor HEILPRIN, referring
to the subject of glaciation, stated that in his opinion the vast
sheet of ice which is generally supposed to have covered during
the great ice age a considerable portion of the northern regions of
the European and North American continents, could not have had
its origin, as is maintained by most geologists, in a polar “ ice-cap,”
1883. | | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 47
since it may reasonably be doubted whether there could ever have
been formed in the extreme North an accumulation of snow and
ice of a magnitude suflicient to propel southward a glacier, with
an estimated thickness of several thousands of feet, to a distance
of hundreds of miles, and up mountain slopes to heights equaling
five or six thousand feet. The magnitude (as to height) to which
such a snow accumulation may attain, will be dependent upon two
conditions—(1), the quantity of aqueous (snow) precipitation, and
(2), the upper limit in the atmosphere reached by clouds. It is
well known that clouds, as a rule, rise highest in the regions of
highest temperature—the equatorial—where the vapor absorption
by the atmosphere is greatest, and where the planes of aqueous
condensation are most distantly removed from the earth’s surface;
and, likewise, they rise higher in summer than in winter. The
minimum rise will necessarily be in the extreme North (or South),
and during the period of greatest cold, or winter. High (dischar ge)
clouds are a rarity in the polar regions, and consequently precipi-
tation will be mainly restricted to a comparatively low atmospheric’
zone. Above this zone, which will mark the upper limit of the
“ ice-cap,” there can be but little snow accumulation. As a matter
of fact, the officers of various Arctic expeditions have repeatedly
noted that the high mountain-crests and elevations in the far North
were frequently devoid of a snow covering, and that there was but
very little precipitation, even over the low lands, during the winter,
heavy precipitations setting in only with the spring months. The
highest snow-clad elevation in the region of greatest cold (the West),
in Greenland, appears to be Washington Land, with an estimated
height of six thousand feet, which gives rise to the great Humboldt
Glacier. Although this peak is completely buried under a mantle
of snow (of undetermined thickness, however), it may yet safely
be doubted whether snow of any oreat thickness (unless under a
much warmer climate), could accumulate on a summit of much
greater elevation. If not, this elevation, in the opinion of the
speaker, was entirely inadequate to account for the southward
propulsion of a glacier to the extent required by geologists.
Professor Lewis remarked that notwithstanding the difficulties
in a theoretical explanation, the fact of a great continuous glacier
at the time of maximum glaciation seemed clearly indicated, at
least in America, by the numerous observations recently made.
He described the extent of the glacier in America, as indicated
by its terminal moraine, and stated that the close similarity of its
phenomena at distant portions of its southern edge indicated a
continuous ice-sheet. The continuous motion of its upper portion
is shown by the uniform direction of glacial striae upon elevated
points. Thus the S. W. direction of the striz upon the mountain
tops of N. E. Penna., was identical with that upon the Overlook
Mountain of the Catskills, and of that upon the summits of the
Laurentians of Canada. The striz at lower elevations conformed
more or less to the valleys, and did not indicate the general move-
48 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
ment of the ice. The thickness of the glacier increased northward,
the rate of increase diminishing as its source is approached. This
latter point has not heretofore been appreciated, although observed
some time ago by Dr. Hayes in the case of the Greenland glacier.
Recent observations by the speaker in Pennsylvania had shown
the glacier to be 800 feet thick at a point five miles north of its
extreme southern edge, and 2000 feet thick at a point eight miles.
from its edge, while it was only about 3100 feet thick one hundred
miles farther northeast, and about 5000 feet thick three hundred
miles back from its edge. The amount of erosion caused by it upon
rock surfaces was in some degree a measure of its thickness, being
far greater in Canada, even upon the hard Laurentian granites of
that region, than in Pennsylvania, where even soft and friable
rocks were but slightly eroded.
The present thickness of the glacier in central Greenland was
considered, and the magnitude of certain iceber gs detached from
it was given. A friend of the speaker had, within a few months,
seen a “floating iceberg near the coast of Newfoundland, which
stood 800 feet above the water by measurement, and may have
been therefore nearly a mile indepth. Dr. Hayes saw an iceberg |
aground in water nearly half a mile deep.
That the great glacier flowed up steep inclines was abundantly
proven by recent observations of the speaker in Pennsylvania. He
instanced the striz covering the north flank of the Kittatinny
Mountain, and a boulder of limestone perched on the summit
which, within a distance of three miles, had been carried up 800
feet vertically.
Referring to a paper recently published by Mr. W. J. McGee,
who found difficulties similar to those of Professor Heilprin in
the assumption of a polar ice-cap of great thickness, and who
imagined the glacier to increase by additions to its outer rim, the
speaker held that the single fact of the tr ansportation by the olacier
of far-traveled boulders to its terminal moraine, was a fatal objec-
tion to any such hypothesis.
Nor did he believe that the hypothesis adopted by Professor
Dana and others, of a great elevation of land in the North, was a
probable one The facts now in the possession of geologists do
not indicate such a great and local upheaval as | required by that
hypothesis.
An explanation, therefore, must still be aan for the southward
flow of a continuous ice-sheet — a flow in some regions up-hill. The
action of gravity was certainly not sufficient. Even in the case
of the downward flow of the steeply inclined Swiss glaciers, it had
been shown that gravity was more than counterbalanced by friction
of the sides and bottom, and that these glaciers moved by reason
of an inherent moving power of the molecules of the ice. - It was
probable that similar action occurred in the great continental
glacier.
He suggested, therefore, a hypothesis which, while preserving
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 49
the unity of the glacier, as indicated by observed facts, neither
assumed an unreasonable land elevation in polar regions, nor
required a thickness of ice so great as to be open to the objections
of the last speaker.
He suggested that the ice-cap flowed south simply because it
flowed toward a source of heat. Such flow does not depend upon
gravity, but would occur in a nearly flat field of ice, and he thought
that the ice need not to have been more than a few times its
present thickness in Greenland to account for all existing phe-
nomena upon the hypothesis now suggested.
Professor HEILPRIN maintained that we were unacquainted with
any laws of glacial action which would account for the indis-
criminate progression of an ice-sheet toward a source of heat.
The molecular-expansion theory as applied to the glacial phe-
nomena of the Alps, took no cognizance of the position of the heat
power, but merely of that of least resistance (the direction of
slope). As to the magnitude of icebergs, the height above water
gave no positive indication as to the development (in depth)
beneath the surface, since this would largely depend upon the
form assumed by the berg. As a matter of fact. however, the
highest bergs observed by Hayes and Nares in the northern
regions, rose only about 300 ft. out of the water, a height some-
what exceeding the highest Antarctic bergs encountered by the
“Challenger.” We had, therefore, no indications of any extra-
ordinary development of ice in Greenland.
Chalcedony containing Liquid.—Professor H. CArviLtt Lewis
called attention to a geode of chalcedony from the Salto River,
Uraguay, presented by Mr. S. R Colbroun, of the United States
Navy. The specimen contained an unusual quantity of liquid—
from two to three drachms; it was derived from an extensive
basaltic formation of amygdaloid and black melaphyr, and was
coated with a substance resembling asbestos. He described the
method of formation of such hollow masses of mammillary chalce-
dony as being endogenous and referred to an interesting paper
recently published by I. Anson and Parkhurst upon the artificial
manufacture of chalcedony.
On the Flowering of the Stapelia.—At the meeting of the
Botanical Section, February 12th, Mr. Taomas MEEHAN exhibited
specimens of Stapelia bufonia in various stages of growth, intlor-
escence and fruit, and pointed out that though there were axillary
buds of more or less prominence at the base of what we had to
call leaves, yet the flowers rarely proceeded from these, but from
lateral accessory buds. When the axillary buds developed, they
produced branches and not flowers. The lateral accessory buds
usually developed into minute abortive flowers, with a membranous
seale or bract in the place of the primary leaf. These observations
were made on plants which had been planted in the open ground
50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
during the summer and were repotted in the fall and replaced in
a warm greenhouse. The branches commented on had grown
since that time, and might be termed the*second growth of the
same season. When the plants were being potted, having more
than were needed, one was thrown carelessly under the greenhouse
stage, where it shriveled considerably, but retained some vital
power, enough in fact to send down a few fibrous roots into the
earth. It had shriveled so as to be reduced to about half its
normal weight. Its behavior under these conditions had not
been observed till a few days since this date, when an examination
showed that the greater portion of the axillary buds had developed
into minute flowers, as in the case of the accessory buds under
the normal condition. Some of these, judging by their dry remains,
had grown to nearly one-fourth the usual size of the normal flowers,
though most of them were much smaller. In these cases no
lateral accessory buds had been produced. , A perfect flower from
a healthy pot-plant was exhibited, but not more than two-thirds
the size of those produced in the growth of the first part of the
season when the plant was in the open air. Numbers had been
produced during the winter from the accessory buds at the base
of the secondary growths. One of these had borne a fine seed-
vessel, which was also exhibited. No seed-vessels had followed
the numerous stronger flowers produced by the plants in the open
air during the summer.
In commenting on these facts, Mr. Meehan pointed out their
harmony with others bearing on the relation between nutrition
and the various phases of the vegetative and reproductive con-
ditions of vegetation. Morphologically every development from
the bud to the fruit is primarily the same. We imagine all these
developments to be founded ona primary leaf or leaves. Just
when and how the various stages of development are brought
about it is for physiology to determine. The student of fruit and
forest trees knows that a rapid-growing young tree does not flower,
and often when it commenced to flower, no fruit followed. Its
vegetative vigor had to be somewhat checked before the repro-
ductive forces induced flowers. The gardener brings about this
condition by root-pruning or ringing, that is, taking off a portion
of the bark of the vigorous tree. Transplanting often makes a
barren tree fruitful. What would have been leaves, become petals
and parts of fructification in the transplanted tree. He had him-
self placed on record many illustrations of this. The Wistaria
and other climbing plants might flower, but rarely produce fruit
when growing vigorously over trees or trellises, but as soon as
branches were thrown off which could not attach themselves to
supports, these lost their vigor, and the flowers produced seeds.
But even when seeds resulted from the flowers of the Wistaria,
they were rarely from the most vigorous at the commencement
of the raceme, but only after the weaker flowers had been reached
By a careful count, in many hundred cases he had found that in
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 51
racemes of the Wistaria which had produced seed-vessels, some
forty or fifty flowers, on the average, faded before one produced
seed.
These observations on Stapelia were of a similar character.
The axillary buds, in the normal condition of the plant, resulted
in branches only, the flowers proceeding only from the weaker
lateral accessory ones. But when the vegetative powers of the
plant are weakened, the axillary buds become flowering ones.
The rarity with which seed-vessels are produced by the Stapelia
under cultivation, he thought, might possibly be traced to some
cause relating to nutrition, rather than to matters connected with
pollination.
The observations were made solely on these winter-growing
plants, as illustrated by the specimens exhibited ; how far they
might be paralleled by open air growth during the summer, the
speaker could not say.
The following paper was ordered to be printed :—
52 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
ON A NEW EXTINCT GENUS OF SIRENIA, FROM SOUTH CAROLINA.
BY E. D. COPE.
Mr. Gabriel Manigault, the accomplished director of the Museum
of the University of South Carolina, at Charleston, has placed in
my hands for determination an interesting fossil of that region.
It is the greater part of the right premaxillary bone of a large
sirenian mammal, containing the large incisor tooth or tusk char-
acteristic of the genus Halitherium. It, however, exhibits the
peculiarity of possessing, exterior to this tusk, a second large
tooth, which is probably also an incisor. This character distin-
guishes the form generically from other members of the order.
In Prorastomus Owen, there are an inferior incisor and a canine
not of sirenian type, but probably no superior incisors, or if
present, they are minute and conic. I propose that the genus be
named Dioplotherium. The only form with which it is necessary
to compare it is Hemicaulodon Cope,' the number of whose incisor
teeth is unknown. The one from which the genus is known, has
a dense external sheath of cementum, which is wanting from the
present genus.
The color of the specimen indicates that it belongs to the blue-
gray marl of the Carolinian (Heilprin) miocene of our Atlantic
region. It has, however, been exposed to the action of the water
of a later sea, as it carries the bases of several Balani.
The premaxillary bone differs from that of the Halitherium
minor Cuv. (H. serresi Gerv.) and H. capgrandi Lart., in the
much shorter symphysis. The nareal border is also shorter,
judging from the position of the maxillary suture, which is
further anterior than in the species named. ‘The nareal border is
rounded and thickened, so as to overhang its lateral face at the
maxillary suture. The alveolus of the second incisor is large, and
is in close proximity to that of the first. Its posterior wall is
lost. Its fundus reaches to the maxillopremaxillary suture, but
as its anterior wall is entirely premaxillary, the tooth is probably
an incisor, and not a canine.
The anterior incisor is a tusk of flattened form, with a slight
taper from base to apex, and a narrow diamond-shaped section.
1 Proceedings Amer. Philos. Soc., 1869, p. 190.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 53
Two end-sides of the diamond which present anteriorly, are shorter
and more divergent than the posterior two. The latter encloses
a wedge-shaped space, with an obtuse apex. Thus the posterior
edge of the tooth is narrow and rounded. Of the anterior lateral
angles the external is the more prominent. The tusk is gently
curved outwards, and the posterior lateral face is also concave in
anteroposterior section. ‘The pulp cavity enters the crown for
two-fifths of its length. The iatter is composed of uniform dentine,
and there are no traces of cementum or enamel. There are trans-
verse bands of several delicate rugz each, separated by considerable
spaces. I count eleven from apex to base. The tooth is also
obsoletely longitudinally striate, but cannot be called sulcate on
the external face. On the internal face the longitudinal concave
face is divided into a narrower and wider portion by a longitudinal
ridge which marks the iniddle of the shaft. The triturating surface
is narrow. and presents obliquely backwards. The projection of
the crown beyond the alveolar border is not more than one-fourth
the total length of the tooth.
The second incisor tooth is lost. Its alveolus shows that its
form was less compressed than that of the first. While its size is
considerable, it is evidently less developed than the first. Its
anterior border slightly overlaps the posterior narrow edge of the
anterior tooth.
Measurements. M.
Vertical Saar of premaxillary at septum between
[ee ori IN Be : - : : « pak2e
onneaan of ditto at middle of baie - - Bet eal Gils
Length of symphysis, . ; : : : » 1 L2G
Length of first incisor, . : : : : cot aclene
; ( anteroposterior, ; : . 050
Diameters do. at base - (anteriorly, . 027
( transy erse - :
(posteriorly, . ‘011
3 - anter steri ; F 5 Se
ee eedossat 02 (anteroposterior, - 037
: anteriorly, - 020
m. from apex, ( transverse ete
: posteriorly, . ‘007
Projection of do. beyond alveolus (about), . . °053
Transverse diameter of alveolus of I. 2, anteriorly, -025
This species may be called Dioplotherium manigaulti, in honor
of Mr. Manigault, to whom tlfe University of South Carolina
owes the present admirable condition of its Museum. The typical
54 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
specimen was found in or on the Wando River, northeast of the
city of Charleston.
This genus furnishes a first step in tracing backwards the phy-
logeny of the S¢renia. These animals doubtless present the same
phenomenon as that witnessed in the series of the Rhinoceroses,
Ruminants, and somé others, viz., a gradual reduction in number,
and final extinction of the superior incisor teeth. In Rhytina
the extinction is complete; in Halicore one remains. Dvzoplo-
therium with two, forms the passage to the primitive types, not
yet known, which possessed three. They are considerably
specialized in the present genus, and a reduction of size is to be
looked for in the first ancestral genera of the S7zrenia.
From the proportions of the parts preserved, the Dioplotherium
manigaultt was rather larger than a dugong.
A portion of a Sirenian pelvis said to have been procured from
the same locality, Wando River, was given me by Mr. Jacob
Geismar. It resembles considerably that of Halitherium. A
portion of the ischium and pelvis is broken away, so that it is
not easy to determine positively whether there is an obturator
foramen or not. Their bases are, however, united for a considerable
distance beyond the acetabulum, and form a wide plate. The
ilium is a stout rod, expanding a little towards the crest, which is
broken away. ‘The sacral articular surface is in two planes, one
the inner side, the other the posterior edge of the bone, and are
strongly impressed. The section of the shaft is subtriangular.
The acetabulum is small, has raised edges, and an irregular fossa
ligamenti teris notching its superior border.
Measurements.
Length from acetabulum to sacral face,exclusive, . “052
Width acetabulum, . : : 4 : ; . 027
anteroposterior, —. OLS
Diameter shaft ilium
: : s ? (transverse, . ; . 01S
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 59
FEBRUARY 20.
The President, Dr. Lerpy, in the chair.
Forty-nine persons present.
The death of B. Howard Rand, M. D.,a member, was announced.
Notes on Prehistoric Copper Implements.—Mr. H. T. Cresson
made some remarks upon a hammer of native copper found in the
Bohemian Mine, at Greenland, Michigan, in 1866, by Mr. S. F.
Peck, and now in the Academy’s collection. It exhibits a distinct
laminar surface, caused by hammering pieces of native copper
together while in a cold state, a process in which our aborigines
living in districts north of Mexico, seemed to have acquired great
proficiency. This is shown by the numerous wedges, chisels,
hammers, and other articles found in the ancient mining-pits at
Keewenaw Point, Lake Superior, and at Isle Royal, together with
axes, spear- and arrow-points, ornaments, ete., in Ohio, and.
throughout those sections of our country which at one time were
inhabited by the mound-builders, a race of people whose remains
indicate a state of advancement in the arts and manufactures
superior to the savage nations who succeeded them. It is a very
interesting fact, that recent discoveries have shown upon various
forms of copper implements, deposited in their burial places by the
mound-builders—markings similar to those left by moulds in the
process of casting. It may, therefore, be supposed that these
people were acquainted with the art of smelting, besides that of
hammering copper. Professor Foster in his ‘“* Prehistoric Races
of the United States,’’ mentions the fact, that in a collection made
by Mr. Perkins, he saw copper implements of mound origin, that
bear well-defined traces of the mould. . . . “It is impossible,”
he adds, “ to infer after a careful examination of these specimens,
that the ridges have been left in the process of hammering or
oxidation.” - . . ‘*The more I examine their arts and manu-
factures the stronger becomes my conviction that they were
something more than a race of barbarian people.”” From these
observations of Professor Foster, a skilful and cautious observer,
it would appear that two processes were used, not only of ham-
mering, but that of smelting, which latter process was in all
probability suggested by their supposed method of extracting the
masses of copper from their pits—remains of which may still be
seen in the Lake Superior copper regions before mentioned. Some
of these pits have been explored by Colonel Whittlesey, an account
of which was published in the “ Smithsonian Contributions to
Knowledge for 1863.” They were found to contain, in all cases,
among the debris, fragments of charcoal and ashes, with traces of
fires against the sides thereof, indicating the use of heat in the
process of extracting their ores, thereby aiding the wedges and
copper chisels which were driven in by means of stone mauls until
56 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
the desired pieces were detached. It may, therefore, be probable
from the fact, that the melting point of copper is about 1000° C. to
1398°, there was sufficient heat generated by fires, used in above-
mentioned method, to smelt the small points of copper attached
to the larger masses, and that these people possessing ¢he intelli-
gence and quick perception of the Indian races, were led to notice
and utilize it in smelting copper and casting their work. The
artistic forms and finish of their copper implements, whether cast
or hammered, cannot fail to impress the observer that a race of
men existed in the early history of our continent, whose origin is
enveloped in mystery,and whose skill rivals man of historic times,
assisted by all the inventions of this mighty age of Iron.
The Tritubercular Type of Superior Molar Tooth.—Prof. Cope
made some observations on the trituberculate type of superior
molar tooth among the mammalia. He remarked that it is now
apparent that the type of superior molar tooth which predominated
during the Puerco epoch was triangular; that is, with two external,
and one internal tubercles. Thus of forty-one species of Mammalia
of which the superior molars are known, all but four have three
tubercles of the crown, though of these thirty-seven triangular
ones, those of three species of Periptychus have a small supple-
mentary lobe on each side of the median principal inner tubercle.
This fact is important as indicating the mode of development
of the various types of superior molar teeth, on which we have
not heretofore had clear light. In the first place, this type of
molar exists to-day only in the insectivorous and carnivorous
Marsupialia; in the Insectivora, and the tubercular molars of such
Carnivora as possess them (excepting the plantigrades). In the
Ungulates the only later forms of it in the Eocene are to be
found in the molars of the Coryphodontide of the Wasatch, and
Dinocerata of the Bridger Eocenes. In later epochs it is chiefly
seen only in the last superior molar.
It is also evident that the quadritubercular molar is derived
from the tritubercular by the addition of a lobe of the inner part
of a cingulum of the posterior base of the crown. ‘Transitional
states are seen in some of the Periptychidx (Anisonchus) and in
the sectorials of the Procyonide.
The Spinal Chord of Batrachia and Reptilia.—Dr. Harrison
ALLEN called attention to the characters furnished by the spinal
chord in the systematic study of batrachians and reptiles. In
making a resumé of the researches of Stieda Luderitz, 8S. H. Gage
and J. ag Mason he had formulated the following erucrtieal features
which may be added to those characters already employed by
systematists. In batrachians, as illustrated in Rana, Meno-
poma and Siren the connective is seen about the central canal
to be of unusual development, and in Siren to embrace the entire
chord in a conspicuous cortical layer. In addition to these
features, connective-tissue corpuscles are sparsely distributed
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 57
through the chord when studied in transverse sections. The poste-
rior columns are projected above the plane of the lateral columns
and exhibit distinct differences in the arrangement of nerve-fibres.
In lacertilians and crocodilians the commissures are perforated
longitudinally by a pair of columns of nerve-fibres. In ophidians
the posterior nerve-roots are seen to be rudimentary or absent and
when present to tend to arise from the cervir cornu of the poste-
rior horn of gray matter. In chelonians the motor-cells are few
in number ; the anterior median fissure is of great width, the com-
missure of relatively great size,and the reticular fibres lying to the
lateral aspect of the gray columns are unusually well developed.
FEBRUARY 27.
The President, Dr. Lery, in the chair.
Thirty-seven persons present.
Walter Rogers Furness was elected a member.
On Dinodipsas and Causus.—Prof. Corr drew attention to a
recent important discovery made by Prof. Peters. of Berlin, of
the new genus of venomous snakes, Dinodipsas. He stated that
he regarded the genus as pertaining to the Caustdx, a family he
had proposed as a subfamily in his first paper read before the
Academy in 1859. As the only genus heretofore known, Causus,
is African, the statement of Peters that Dinodipsas is South
American,adds an important fact to geographical zodlogy. Prof.
Cope then corrected a statement made by Peters in his Herpetology
of the Reise nach Mozambique (1882), that be (Prof. Cope) had
referred Causus to the Vipers. In 1859 he had divided the
venomous snakes with vertical and hinged maxillary bone, into
the subdivisions of the rattlesnakes, the vipers, the Atractos-
pidines and the Causines. He then designated the entire group
Viperide after Bonaparte, and had not until later used Duméril
and Bibron’s term Solenoglypha for that division. But this did
not justify Peters in stating that he had referred the genus Causus
to the Vipers, and that he, Peters, was the author of the separate
family to receive that genus and Dinodipsas, the “ Vipernattern.”
He also corrected some other references to himself by Prof.
Peters in the Reise nach Mozambique. In one of these, Peters
had supposed him to refer to a combination of the genera Brevi-
ceps and Chelydobatrachus by Peters, when he had really separated
them. Prof. Cope said that his language referred to their union
in the same family by Peters, which he did not approve.
Prof. Peters also states that the peculiarities of the tongue in
the genus Hemisus, described by Steindachner and Prof. Cope,
are due to mutilation. Prof. Cope could not coincide with this
view, and regards the structures described as normal.
The following were ordered to be printed :—
5
58 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1888.
A NEW UNIO FROM FLORIDA.
BY BERLIN H. WRIGHT.
Uni» Cunninghawi. Plate I, figs. 1-4.
Shell ovate, ventricose and very inequilateral, smooth, inter-
rupted by numerous irregular, undulating lines of growth, causing
a scaly appearance near the margins, and very highly polished
above; substance of shell very thick, constricted posteriorly,
angular behind and truncated before ; ligament margin moderately
arcuate and angular at the terminus (tip); posterior margin
wedge-shaped and slightly acuminate ; ligamental area elongately
cordiform and wide, nearly forming a plane in old individuals;
umbonal slope subangular from beak to margin; anterior margin
angular above and somewhat abruptly rounded beneath; basal
margin emarginate posteriorly in the males and uniformly curved
in the females ; epidermis usually dark chestnut or reddish brown,
interspersed with marginai bands of light horn-color; occasionally
the entire shell is of uniform light horn-color, wrinkled and entirely
destitute of rays; greatest diameter near the middle of the umbos ;
beaks eroded and obtuse ; umbo broad and flattened ; nacre usually
a delicate pink : occasionally white ; cardinal and lateral teeth both
single in the right and double in the left valve, lateral teeth short,
slightly and uniformly curved and separated from the cardinal
teeth by a space equal to one-half of their own length; cavity of
the shell and beak both shallow ; dorsal cicatrices five and situated
above the centre of the cavity of the beak; distinct anterior and
confluent posterior cicatrices ; ventral cicatrix usually present and
placed anterior to the centre of the cavity of the shell.
Habitat.—Lakes of Sumter County, Florida.
This beautiful shell belongs near U. Buckleyi Lea, from which
it differs in being strictly rayless in all stages of its growth, greater
diameter,more angular anteriorly above and more abruptly rounded
beneath, broader and flatter umbos and more abrupt posterior slope.
The cardinal teeth are much heavier and not as oblique as in
U. Buckleyi. A large suite of the shells was sent to me by Mr.
T. L. Cunningham, of Yalaha, Sumter County, Florida, in whose
honor we name it.
Plate I, fig. 1, Unio Cunninghumi, old male; 2, full-grown female ;
5, old male; 4, young male.
r
Sinclair & Son, lith. Pita.
UNIO CUNNINGHAMI Wright
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 59
NOTES ON THE BIRDS OF WESTMORELAND COUNTY, PENNA.
BY CHAS. H. TOWNSEND.
Local lists have added so much to our knowledge of the range
and distribution of birds, that the following notes are submitted
as a contribution to the general fund of information. The species
enumerated represent perhaps not more than two-thirds of the
actual bird fauna of Westmoreland County. Many more might
probably be added, but I wish to restrict this list to those birds
identified with certainty, and have given only such as have come
under my personal notice, not having enjoyed the advantage of
comparing notes with a fellow-naturalist.
No special effort was made to find new birds, and this catalogue,
merely the result of observations jotted down from time to time
in my note-book, is very incomplete. It is hoped that its present
publication will call forth additional information, so that a supple-
mental paper may appear in the future.
Not having been a constant resident of the county since com-
mencing to note the birds, I could not always collect at the most
fruitful seasons, consequently a large number of migratory birds
have escaped notice. The district being wooded and hilly, there
are no very extensive marshes to harbor rail, snipe and other-
swamp-loving birds. I feel confident that the number of water-
birds in general will hereafter be largely increased.
My rambles were mainly in the central portions of the county,
along the Loyalhanna Creek, and in the vicinity of Latrobe, on
the line of the Penna. R. R. The Chestnut Ridge, a range of the
Alleghenies, extending through the S. E. part of Westmoreland,
is covered with heavy forests, and furrowed by deep wild ravines.
Many rare wood-birds doubtless lurk in these secluded spots, and
remain to be discovered by any one diligent enough to make the
search.
I may add that I have seldom taken a tramp through the forests
of Chestnut Ridge without seeing or shooting one or more birds
new to the region.
The species are arranged according to the second edition of
Dr. Coues’ Check List.
60 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
TURDIDZ.
1. Turdus migratorius. Robin.
A common and familiar bird. Stragglers are occasionally seen
in winter. Breeds abundantly.
2. Turdus mustelinus. Wood Thrusb.
Common in dense woods. An excellent songster, but not equal
to the Brown Thrush.
3. Turdus fuscescens. Wilson’s Thrush.
Not very common.
4. Turdus unalasce nanus. Hermit Thrush.
An inhabitant of retired woods.
5. Mimus carolinensis. Cat-bird.
An abundant summer resident; breeds.
6. Harporhynchus rufus. Brown Thrush.
Common; nests in thickets and brush-heaps.
SAXICOLID.
~T
. Sialia sialis. Blue-bird.
Common summer resident; nests freely in artificial bird-boxes
near houses.
SYLVIIDZ.
8. Regulus calendula. Ruby-crowned Kinglet.
This and the next species are frequent in spring and fall.
9. Regulus satrapa. Golden-crested Kinglet.
10. Polioptila cerulea. Blue-gray Gnateatcher.
Have taken but one specimen.
PARIDZ.
11. Lophophanes bicolor. Tuf ed Titmouse.
Common ; noticed oftener in winter than in summer.
12. Parus atricapillus. Black-capped Chickadee.
Associates with the last.
SITTIDA.
13. Sitta carolinensis. White-bellizd Nut-hatch.
Resident, quite common. The Nut-hatches and smaller Wood-
peckers are indifferently known as ‘‘ sap-suckers’”’ in this region.
14. Sitta canadensis. Red-bellied Nut-hatch.
Seen occasionally in spring.
CERTHIDZ. .
15. Certhia familiaris. Brown Creeper.
A shy inhabitant of the woods.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 61
TROGLODYTID&.
16. Troglodytes domesticus. House Wren.
Apparently not common.
100. Cathar‘es aura. Turkey Buzzard.
Very rare; formerly common, according to the statements of
old residents. Have seen several in an adjoining county.
COLUMBID#.
101. Ectopistes migratorius. Wild Pigeon.
Migratory ; appears in immense flocks in some seasons.
102. Zenaidura carolinensis. Carolina Dove; “Turtle Dove.”
Breeds regularly ; abundant.
MELEAGRID&.
103. Meleagris gallipavo americana. Wild Turkey.
Resident ; no longer common; a few are killed in the mountains
every year.
TETRAONIDA.
104. Bonasa umbella. Ruffled Grouse; ‘“ Pheasant.”
A well-known game-bird ; resident, common.
105. Ortyx virginianus. Quail; “ Bob-white.”
Resident, common ; neither this nor the last species as abundant
as in former years.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 67
CHARADRIIDZ.
106. Hgialites vociferus. Killdeer Plover.
Summer resident ; abundant.
SCOLOPACIDA.
107. Philohela minor. Woodcock.
Common; have seen it as early as Mareh 13.
108. Gallinago wilsoni. Snipe.
Summer resident.
109. Tringoides macularius, Spotted Sandpiper.
Common in summer; breeds.
ARDEIDZ.
110. Ardea herodias. Gt. Blue Heron.
Migratory, occasional; have two specimens in my collection,
shot on the Loyalhanna Creek.
111. Herodias egretta. Gt. White Egret.
Migratory ; irregular.
112. Butorides virescens. (treen Heron.
Quite common in summer; breeds.
115. Botaurus mugitans. Bittern. r
Not common; have one specimen shot by Mr. J. C. Head, of
Latrobe.
RALLIDA.
114. Rallus virginianus. Virginia Rail.
Summer visitant.
115. Porzana carolina. Carolina Rail: Sora.
Mr. G. N. Beckwith, of Latrobe, reports it common. Mr. G.
H. Adams, agent of the P. R. R., gave me the only specimen I
have seen in Westmoreland. It was found in a freight-car at
Beatty Station.
116. Fulica americana. . Coot; “Mud Hen.”
Rather common.
ANATIDEA.
117. Cygnus columbianus, Am. Swan.
Occasionally shot on.the Loyalhanna Creek.
118. Berni¢la canadensis. Wild Goose.
Migratory ; rather common.
119. Anas boscas Mallard Duck.
Mr. G. N. Beckwith assures me of the occurrence of this and
the next two species.
120. Anas obscura. Black Duck; Dusky Duck.
68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
121. Dafila acuta. Pintail.
122. Querquedula carolinensis. Green-winged Teal.
Migratory.
123. Querqueduladiscors. Blue-winged Teal,
More frequent than the last.
124, Aix sponsa. Wood or Summer Duck.
Summer resident ; breeds.
125. Fuligula marila. Scaup Duck; Black-head.
Migratory ; usually abundant.
126. Fuligula ferina americana. Red-head; Pochard,
Probably migratory.
127. Clangula albeola. Buffle-head Duck; Butter-ball.
Migratory ; common.
128. Harelda glacialis. Long-tailed Duck.
On February 5, 1881, Mr. Harry Chambers shot a male of this
species, on the creek at Latrobe. It is the only instance of the
occurrence of this maritime duck so far inland, so far as I am
aware.
129. Erismatura rubida. Ruddy Duck.
Migratory ; abundant in spring,
130. Mergus merganser. (oosander; Fish Duck,
Regularly migratory.
131. Mergus serrator. Red-breasted Merganser.
Migratory, occasional,
132. Mergus cucullatus. Hooded Merganser,
Irregularly migratory.
LARIDZ.
33. Larus delawarensis. Ring-billed Gull.
I have a specimen, shot on the Loyalhanna Creek, May 7, 1881.
Other species of gulls doubtless visit our streams during migration.
COLYMBID#.
134. Colymbus torquatus. Loon; Gt. Northern Diver.
Migratory ; a few are shot every season by the gunners.
PODICIPID.
135. Podicipes cornutus. Horned Grebe. .
Rare; Mr. Harry Chambers gave me a specimen which he shot
on the Loyalhanna Creek. This is the only instance of its occur-
rence that I can cite.
136. Podilymbus podicipes. Pied-billed Grebe; ‘“ Dipper.”
Resident ; well known to gunners everywhere.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 69
Marcu 6.
Mr. Geo. W. Tryon, JR., in the chair.
Twenty-six persons present.
Permian Fishes and Reptiles.—Prof. Corr exhibited some
specimens of fishes and reptiles from the Permian formation of
Texas. One of these was a new species of Crossopterygian fish
which he named Fctosteorhachis ciceronius, which exhibited some
important characters of the posterior cranial region. He stated
that the base of the skull consists of ossified parachordals, and
these embrace the chordadorsalis posteriorly, and are continued
for a short distance posteriorly as a tube. Anteriorly the chordal
groove is open. Trabecule not ossified. He considered the
cranial structure to be an excellent illustration of a permanent
embryonic type.
The most interesting reptile was a new genus which occupies a
place between the Pelycosauria with molar teeth, and those with
raptorial teeth, but with more resemblance to the former, or Dza-
dectidz. The teeth are placed transversely in the jaws, but the
crowns terminate in an incurved apex, without ledge. He named
the genus Chilonyx, and referred it provisionally to the Bolo-
sauride. The typical species is the Bolosaurus rapidens (Cope,
1878), an animal with a skull as large as that of a hog, and with
robust limbs. The surface of the skull is divided by grooves
into numerous swollen areas, and some of these are, on the lateral
occipital region, developed into tuberosities like the rudimental
horns of the Phrynosoma douglass.
Phenomena of Glaciation.—Professor HEILPRIN, referring to
his former communication on the phenomena of glaciation, stated
that if the principles laid down by him as to the limitation (in
height) of a polar ice-cap be correct, then the same principles must
likewise hold good for all portions of the earth’s surface. In other
words, given an elevation of sufficient magnitude, then the upper
portion of the same, by virtue of its rising above the cloud-line,
must be either bare of snow or covered only with a comparatively
feeble thickness of the same. This view, which the speaker
believed was first enunciated by Humboldt, receives confirmation
from observations made on the Alps and on other high mountain
peaks. Thus, according to Tschudi, only a comparatively very
feeble thickness of snow falls on the Alpine summits above an
altitude of about 10,800 feet, the heavy precipitation being princi-
pally confined to a zone comprised between 7000 and 9000 feet.
The brothers Schlagintweit determined the cumulus line in the
70 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
same region to lie at a general elevation of 8-9800 feet, above
which storms were of only exceptional occurrence, and the atmos-
phere usually clear and serene. These observations as to feeble
precipitation were further confirmed by Dollfuss, who found that
on the Théodule Pass (10,800 feet) the total precipitation for the
six winter months amounted to only 74 feet of snow. On the St.
Gothard, on the other hand, at an elevation almost exactly 4000
feet lower, nearly the same quantity fell in a single day. Again,
on the Grimsel (6150 feet) Agassiz found the winter snow-fall to
amount to 574 feet. While, therefore, the highest Alpine summits
generally appear to be buried in an almost unfathomable thickness
of snow, there can be but little doubt that in actual fact this thick-
ness is but very moderate. This is proved by the circumstance
that under exceptional conditions the snow covering may almost
completely disappear as a result of a single season’s melting, Thus
in September, 1842,the Ewigschneehorn was completely dismantled
of its cap, and in 1860-1862 a whole series of the usually snow-
clad peaks showed only patches of snow. During the same period
the Stralech (11,000) feet could be crossed without the traveler
encountering a single patch of either hard or soft snow (Reelus).
With these facts before us, we have good grounds for doubting
whether any extraordinary accumulation of snow, unless with a
much warmer climate, could take place in the region of the far
north (with a descending cloud line) on elevations of very great
magnitude. Granting, however, the possibility of a huge polar
glacier tending southward, some singular facts are brought out by
a calculation ‘of its rate of progression. Allowing an average
rate of one foot per day. which is about that of the average Alpine
glacier, it would necessitate for a glacier starting from about the
sixty-fifth parallel of latitude a period of no less than 25,000 years
for it to have reached the line of its terminal extension, the terminal
moraine. But with such an infinitesimal slope as such a glacier
must necessarily have had, it may be questioned whether its rate
of progression would have been more than one-fifth or even one-
tenth of that which has been here given it. At the average rate
of two and one-half inches daily, 125,000 years would have been
required for its southerly progression, a period that would nearly
tide over the interval between the periods of greatest eccentricity
indicated by astronomers.
Professor Lewis remarked that arguments drawn from meteoro-
logical conditions as they now exist ‘will not in all cases apply in
considering the glacial epoch. The distribution of land and water
was so different in glacial times that meteorological conditions
must also have been different. He instanced facts which he had
observed in the valley of the Delaware and elsewhere, indicating
a depression south of the glaciated area, which produced a greater
water surface in the glacial epoch, and therefore different meteoro-
logical conditions. He remarked also that it was unsafe to found
ar ‘uments upon any close analogy between the conditions of local
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. (fil
glaciers or isolated peaks and the great ice sheet of the glacial
epoch. While analogies might be drawn from the glacier of
interior Greenland or from the Antarctic ice-cap, he thought that
errors often arose from a too close comparison with more local
centres of glaciation.
Referring to the subject of glacial motion, Professor LEwts said
that while there were not yet sufficient facts at hand to determine
its rate, its general direction and continuity were clearly shown
in the striz on elevated summits. He spoke of the importance of
distinguishing these high-level striz from those occurring in valleys,
remarking that erroneous conclusions had frequently been drawn
from an examination of maps of striz, where the relative elevation
of the individual striz was not noted. While the striz upon
mountain summits indicate the general direction of the top of the
ice, and are uniform over large areas, those in valleys show merely
the local movement of the lower strata, and, conforming more or
less to the direction of the valley in which they occur, vary in
each locality and are therefore of minor importance. Asan instance
he described some striz near White Haven, Luzerne Co., Pa.
Those in the valley of the Lehigh near the town bore 8. 35° E. or
approximately down the valley, while on the other hand, upon the
summit of Penobscot Knob, 1100 feet higher than the valley
(2250 feet above the sea), the striz bore 8S. 10° W., this being the
general direction of ice-flow across northeastern Pennsylvania.
In all cases the striz are at right-angles to the terminal moraine,
and they therefore point 8. EK. in western Pennsylvania. He
gave other facts which he had observed in Pennsylvania and else-
where, all pointing to the continuity of action and consequent great
size of the glacier. He spoke of the probable analogy between
the Antarctic ice-cap, some 2500 miles in diameter, and the Polar
ice-cap of glacial times, and mentioned Croll’s estimate that the
former is twelve miles thick at its centre. In speaking of a Polar
ice-cap, he did not mean to imply, however, that the ice was
necessarily thickest on the Pole. As in Europe the mountains of
Scandinavia and Scotland were probable centres of glaciation, the
glaciers from which joined to form the great mer-de-glace, so in
America either Greenland, Labrador, the Hudson Bay region, or
elsewhere, may have been EEE from which glaciers grew finally
to coalesce into one mass of ice, the top strata of which flowed
southward to the great terminal moraine.
Marcu 13.
The President, Dr. Lery, in the chair.
Thirty-nine members present.
The death of Henry Seybert, a member, was announced.
72 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
A paper entitled “On the mutual relations of the Bunotherian
Mammalia,” by Edw. D. Cope, was presented for publication.
Crystallized Serpentine from Delaware.—Professor H. CARVILL
Lewis remarked that a short time ago, his venerable friend, Dr.
Isaac Lea, had handed him for examination a specimen of Deweylite
from Way’s feldspar quarry, near Wilmington, Delaware, upon
which were some crystals of an unknown micaceous substance.
The white, waxy deweylite, weathering to a pale yellow color on
the surface, contains numerous angular fragments of transparent
quartz, which vary in size from microscopic dimensions to frag-
ments two inches long by one-half inch wide. In all cases these
fragments are perfectly sharp and are generally rhomboidal in
shape. These rhombic cleavage fragments are just such as would
be produced by throwing a heated crystal of quartz into cold
water. Under the microscope, the quartz is shown to contain
hair-like microlites and minute oval cavities, the major axes of
which are usually placed in one direction.! -
The deweylite also contains irregular masses of feldspar (albite),
which are more or less altered into deweylite. Unlike the frag-
ments of quartz, these feldspar nodules are almost invariably
rounded in outline, as though partially dissolved away. The
feldspar has lost both its lustre and its hardness. It has a waxy
appearance, and its hardness is reduced to 45. In some speci-
mens one end is more altered than the other, and it is evident that
the deweylite is the result of the alteration of albite.
The third mineral in the deweylite is in the form of plates or
crystals of a micaceous substance of a pale smoky pearl color with
a faint greenish tinge. The plates may be several inches in diam-
eter, and are traversed by numerous joints or cracks filled with
deweylite, which are generally inclined to one another at angles
of 60° and 120°. The crystals appear to be sections of an ortho-
rhombic crystal, bounded by six prismatic planes, whose angle of
intersection is 120°. In the polariscope, the mineral is seen to be
doubly refracting, and is biaxial with a small optic-axial divergence
(probably between 10° and 20°), the hyperboles being indistinct.
It has a strong pearly lustre, an eminent basal cleavage, almost
micaceous, and is brittle. It has a hardness of 2-5, and specific
gravity of 2°41. It is translucent, and by transmitted light is
grayish or greenish yellow.
In the closed tube it gives off water and decrepitates slightly,
becoming blackish gray or dark steel-colored. In the blow-pipe
flame it blackens, then turns white, exfoliates slightly and fuses
with boiling at 4:5 to a white bead. In the salt of phosphorus
bead it dissolves completely to a clear glass which becomes milk-
white ina cold saturated bead. With cobaltic nitrate on charcoal
1», Further notes on inclusionsingems Isaac Lea, Proc. Acad. Nat. Se.
Phila., May, 1876.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 73
it turns pink. It is decomposed by hydrochloric or sulphuric
acid without gelatinization.
At the request of Professor Lewis, Mr. Reuben Haines had
made an analysis of the mineral with the following results :—
SiO, , : = : ; 43°63
MgO . ; : : 2 39°71
BeQiiy.< : E : . 0-78
7.1 0 Fr ‘ i : é 2°23
F H,0O : : z : : 13°20
99255
Mr. Haines determined the specific gravity in a specific gravity
bottle containing a thermometer, the weighing being done at 60° F.
From the composition as well as from its physical characters
the mineral appears to be a true serpentine. Its optical characters
show that it is crystallized, and not a mere pseudomorph. If so,
the crystallization of serpentine is micaceous, as already surmised
by Professor Dana.!
As the deweylite is the result of the alteration of feldspar, so
the serpentine has been altered from mica (muscovite). The rela-
tive amount of muscovite in the adjoining graphic granite is about
the same as that of the micaceous serpentine in the deweylite.
Moreover in certain specimens of feldspathic dewey lite, where the
feldspar is not completely altered, there occur crystals of hydro-
muscovite (margarodite) in place of the micaceous serpentine.
Thus it is evident that the serpentine is changed from mica.
Were it not for the ready cleavage and the special optical charac-
ters of the serpentine, it should be regarded merely as a pseudo-
morph. The occasional markings at angles of 120°, though scarce
and imperfect, are in harmony with the same character belonging
to several other micaceous species among the magnesian hydrous
silicates, and indicate a close relationship between the serpentine
group and the Vermiculite group of minerals.
It is intere-ting to find in the quartz, deweylite and serpentine,
just described, such complete evidence that they have been derived
from the direct alteration of graphic granite (pegmatite). While
the albite and muscovite havechanged intodeweylite and serpentine
respectively, the quartz has been broken up into cleavage frag-
ments, and scattered through the deweylite. This fracturing of
the quartz may, perhaps, give a clue to the method of alteration.
As Hunt? has suggested, in an early period of geological history,
when the earth’s crust was hotter than now, and when a high tem-
perature existed even at slight depths, thermal waters would abound
and chemical changes would be rapid. Should such waters, highly
charged with magnesian salts, come in contact with the heated
1 System of Mineralogy, p. 465.
°> Chem. and Geol. Essays, p. 506.
74 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
feldspathic rocks, there might result such a change as is here shown
to have occurred. Certain facts which the speaker had observed in
the serpentine deposits of Chester County, Penna., notably in
Brinton’s quarry, indicate that a change from a granitic dyke into
serpentine is not an uncommon occurrence.
The two points of interest offered by the specimens here deseribed
are, 1. The crystallization of serpentine, as shown by its optical
character; 2. The direct alteration of the feldspar and mica of
eraphie granite into the magnesian minerals, deweylite arid ser-
pentine, while the quartz has been fractured.
Contraction of Vegetable Tissues Under Frost.—At the last
meeting of the Botanical Section, Mr. MrEHAn referred to a
prevalent opinion that the liquid in vegetable tissues congealed as
ordinary liquid does, and, expanding, often caused trees to burst
with an explosive sound. Mr. Meehan made experiments with
young and vigorous trees, varying from one foot to three feet in
circumference. They were carefully measured in early winter when
the thermometer was about 40°, and again after they had been
exposed for many days to a temperature below freezing point, and,
at the time of measurement, to 10° above zero.
In no case was there the slightest evidence of expansion, while
in the ease of a large maple (Acer dasycarpum), of 3 feet 114
inches round, there appeared to be a contraction of } inch. This
was the largest tree experimented with. In dead-wood soaked
with water, there was an evident expansion; and the cleavage with
explosion, noted in the case of forest trees in high northern
regions, may result from the freezing of liquid in the centre or
less vital parts of the trunks of trees.
In some hardy succulents, however, instead of expansion under
frost, there was a marked contraction. The joints or sections of
stem in Opuntia Rafinesqui and O. Missouriensis, shrink remark-
ably with the lowering of the temperature. As soon as the ther-
mometer passes the freezing point, the shrinkage is so great that
the whole surface has the wrinkled appearance presented by the
face of some very aged person. A piece of Opuntia Rafinesqui,
which in November measured 4 inches in length, is but 3} now,
and is not half the thickness it was in the autumn. In the winter
when the thermometer was down to 10° above zero, the pen-knife
penetrated the tissue just as easily as in summer, and no trace
could be discovered of congelation in the juices of the plant.
Other succulents exhibited more or less signs of shrinkage under
extreme cold. Mamillaria Nuttallii, and M. vivipara, with
Echinocactus Simpsoni, a mamillose form, drew the mamme
upwards, and had them appressed as closely as the spines would
allow—and some species of Sempervivum did the same. This
could only be accomplished by the contraction of the main axis
from the apex downwards. Sedum Hispanicum, which has not a
succulent axis, contracts its leaves into longitudinal wrinkles, pre-
1883: | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. T5
senting the appearance of being withered or dead. They expand
again in a few days of temperature above the freezing point.
Specimens of this Sedum, and of Opuntia Missouriensis, preserved
just above freezing point under glass, did not shrivel—and a plant
of Hchinocactus Simpsoni. taken under cover, after the mammez
had been appressed by frost, expanded them to its summer con-
dition in a short time afterwards.
Assuming from these facts that the liquids in plants which are
known to endure frost without injury, did not congeal, it might be
a question as to what power they owed this successful resistance.
It was probably a vital power, for the sap of plants, after it was
drawn from the tree, congealed easily. In the large maple tree
already referred to, the juice not solidified in the tree, exudes
from the wounded portions of branches and then freezes, hanging
as icicles often six inches long from the trees.
Marcu 20.
The President, Dr. Lrrpy, in the chair.
Twenty-eight persons present.
Note on a New Gold-purple.—Dr. GrorcE A. Konia stated that
while experimenting with a solution containing
Ca,H,As,0, = 5249
CaSO, = 2:983
CaCl, — 4-890
MgCl, — 9736
AuCl, — 0-112
H,As0, — 10-290
26°163 grains per liter,
he observed that upon adding to it very slowly a solution of
one part of crystallized ferrous sulphate in ten parts of water,
stirring vigorously after each drop, at first a white turbidity
formed which gradually assumed a very rich purple color. The
flocculent precipitate settles completély in twenty-four hours, but
may be collected on a filter at once. Sometimes the purple color
develops gradually, requiring several hours, the precipitate being
white for some time. This result obtains, when less ferrous salt
is added than required. One cub. cent., containing +3, milligr. of
gold, of the above solution with 4, cub. cent. of ferrous solution,
developed a very fine precipitate. Sometimes the purple does
not develop at all; the precipitate turns bluish gray and
remains so.
This purple substance can be dried at 100°C. without change of
color. Heated to red heat the pieces assume a glazed appearance
and turn black; but the fine powder again shows a blue-purple
76 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
color. The purple obtained from 250 cub. cent. of the solution
contained
ABO: ; : = 0°0583 gram.
Fe,0O, . ; = 0°0340 *
Gold (Au) . : =—00188 “
CaSO, , ; = 000602
The only gold-purple heretofore known was the Purple of Cassius,
obtained by adding a mixture of stannic and stannous chlorides
to a dilute gold solution. Authors are divided in their opinions
as to whether the gold is contained therein in the metallic state
and only mechanically admixed as a red allotropic modification,
or chemically combined as gold dioxide. The speaker. has
inclined hitherto to the first view, and finds in this ferric arseniate
gold-purple, physically so very analagous to the stannic gold-
purple, a strong support to the mechanical hypothesis. Dilute
hydrochloric acid decomposes this purple at once into brown
gold, and arsenico-ferric solution.
A Flint Nodule from the Greensand of New Jersey.—Prof.
Leipy directed attention to a flint nodule, presented this evening,
obtained from the greensand of Pemberton, N. J. It is discoid,
about the size of a dollar, pitted and smooth, homogeneous and
bluish black, and exhibits no trace of organic remains. He
remarked that as flint nodules, regarded to be of organic origin,
were so exceedingly abundant in the chalk formations of Europe,
he had wondered that similar nodules were not of more frequent
occurrence in the greensand deposits, of contemporary age, in
our country. The nodule presented was the only one of the kind
he had ever seen from the New Jersey marl.
MarcH 27.
Mr. Gro. W. Tryon, JR., in the chair.
Forty-five persons present.
APRIL 3.
Rey. Dr. Henry C. McCook, Vice-President, in the chair.
Thirty-eight persons present.
A paper entitled “ Aztec Music,’ by H. T. Cresson, was
presented for publication.
The following was ordered to be printed :—
1883. ] _ NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. T7
ON THE MUTUAL RELATIONS OF THE BUNOTHERIAN MAMMALIA.
BY E. D. COPE.
The name Bunotheria was proposed by me for a series of
Mammalia which resemble in most technical characters the Eden-
tata and the Rodentia. That is, they agree with these orders in
having small, nearly smooth cerebral hemispheres, which leave
the olfactory lobes and cerebellum. entirely exposed, and in some
instances the hemispheres do not cover the mesencephalum also.
From the two orders in question, however, they are easily distin-
guished. Their enamel-covered teeth separate them from the
Edentata, while the articulation of the lower jaw is different from
that found in the Rodentia. It is a transverse ginglymus, with
a postglenoid process in the Bunotheria, as distinguished from
the longitudinal groove, permitting anteroposterior motion, of the
Rodentia.
Such a group as is thus characterized will include two existing
groups recognized as orders—the Prosimie and the Insectivora.
The latter group has always been a crux to systematists, and
when we consider the skeleton alone, as from the standpoint of the
paleontologist, the difficulty is not diminished. Various extinct
types discovered in latter years, chiefly in the Eocene formations,
have been additions to this intermediate series of forms, giving
even closer relations with the orders already adjacent; 7. e., the
Edentata, the Rodentia, the Prosimiz, and the Carnivora. As is
known, the groups corresponding to these orders have been
named respectively the Tzniodonta, Tillodonta, Mesodonta, and
Creodonta. With great apparent diversity, these suborders show
unmistakable gradations into each other and the two recent orders
already mentioned. As such, I may mention Psittacotherium,
which relates the Teeniodonta and Tillodonta; Hsthonyx, which
relates the Tillodonta with nearly all the other suborders ;
Achenodon, which connects Creodonta and Mesodonta, and
Cynodontomys, which may be Mesodont or Prosimian. ‘Then
the existing Chiromys most certainly connects Tillodonta and
Prosimiz. ;
My original definitions of the suborders of the Mesodonta, given
in vol. ii of the U. S. Geological Survey under Capt. G. M.
Wheeler, p. 85, omitted the Prosimiz, and embraced a number
78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
of characters whose significance must be reéxamined. Thus it is
impossible to characterize the Creodonta as lacking a trochlear
groove of the astragalus, in view of the form of that element in
Mesonyx and Mioclenus, where the groove is more or less dis-
tinct. It is impossible to distinguish the Insectivora from the
Creodonta by the deficiency of canine and large development of
incisor teeth. In Rhynchocyon the canines are large, and the
superior incisors wanting, while in Centetes the arrangement of
these teeth is precisely as in the Creodonta. As to the large
Achzxnodon and other Arctocyonide, I find no characters;whatever
to distinguish them from the generally small Mesodonta.
In view of these inconsistencies, I have reéxamined the subject,
and find the following definitions to be more nearly coincident
with the natural boundaries of the divisions of this large order.
The importance of the character of the tritubercular superior
molar has recently impressed me (see Proceedings of the
Academy, 1883, p. 56), as it had previously done Prof. Gill.
This zoologist has already distinguished two divisions of the
Insectivora (without the Galeopithecidxe), by the forms of the
superior molar teeth. The first possesses quadritubercular molars
above, the second tritubercular. That these types represent
important stages in the development of the molar dentition I have
no doubt. These characters far outweigh in importance those
expressing the forms of the skull, matters of proportion only,
with which a few systematists unnecessarily overload their diag-
noses. Such characters are of little more than specific value, and
serve to obscure the mind of the inquirer for a true analysis.
They may be used empirically, it is true, to determine relation-
ships when the diagnostic parts are wanting.
I propose to transfer the Insectivora with tritubercular superior
molars to the Creodonta, in spite of the fact that some of them
(Mythomys, Solenodon, Chrysochloris) have but weakly developed
canine teeth, and Chrysochloris has large incisors. Asan extreme
form, Hsthonyx will follow, standing next the Tillodonta. It will
then be necessary to transfer the Arctocyonide and all the
Mesodonta to the Insectivora, where they will find affinity with the
Tupexidex. 'These have well-developed canines and small incisors,
as in the extinct groups named. The Chiromyidz must be dis-
tinguished from all of the other suborders, on account of its
rodent-like incisors, combined with its lemur-like feet.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. _ 19
The characters of the six suborders will then be as follows:
I. Incisor teeth growing from persistent pulps:
Canines also growing from less persistent pulps, agreeing with
external incisors in having molariform crowns; I. Teniodonta.
Canines rudimental or wanting; hallux not opposable ;
ur. Tillodonta.
Canines none; hallux opposable ; 111. Daubentonioidea.
II. Incisor teeth not growing from persistent pulps:
Superior true molars quadrituberculate ; hallux opposable ;
1v. Prosimie.
Superior true molars quadrituberculate ; hallux not opposable ;
v. Insectivora.
Superior true molars trituberculate or bituberculate ;! hallux not
opposable : vi. Creodonta.
While the above scheme defines the groups exactly, and, so far
as can now be ascertained, naturally, I do not doubt but that
future research among the extinct forms will add much necessary
information which we do not now possess. It is possible that the
group I called Mesodonta may yet be distinguished from the
Insectivora by characters yet unknown. But I cannot admit any
affinity between this group and any form of “ Pachyderms,” as
suggested by Filhol, or of Suillines, as believed by Lyddeker.?
Such suppositions are in direct opposition to what we know of
the phylogeny of the Mammalia. These views are apparently
suggested by the Bunodont type of teeth found in various
Mesodonta, but that character gives little ground for systematic
determination among Eocene Mammalia, and has deceived pale-
ontologists from the days of Cuvier to the present time. The
only connecting point where there may be doubt as to the ungulate
or unguiculate type of a mammal is the family Periptychide, of
the suborder Condylarthra. The suborder Hyracoidea may- fur-
nish another index of convergence.
' The internal tubercle is wanting in the last two superior molars in
Hyenodon. This genus, of which the osteology remains largely unknown,
has been stated by Gervais to possess a brain of higher type than the
Creodonta. Prof. Scott, of Princeton, is, however, of the opinion that this
determination is erroneous, and that Hyenodon is a true Creodont in this
and other respects. If so, the genus will perhaps enter the Amblyctonide.
* Memoirs Geological Survey India, Ser. x, 1883, p. 145.
80 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
The families included in these suborders will be the following :
Ta&NIopontTA. Calamodontide ; Hctoganide.
Titntoponta. Tillotheriide.
DAUBENTONIOIDEA. Chiromyide.
Prosimi®. Tarsiidxe; (2?) Anaptomorphide; (?) Mixodectide;
Lemuride.
INsEcTIVORA. Soricide; Erinaceide ; Macroscelide ; Tupxide ;
Adapidez ;' Arctocyonide.
Creoponta. Talpide; Chrysochloridide; Esthonychide; Cen-
tetidee (— Leptictide olim); Oxyenide ; Miacide ; Amblyc-
tonidx ; Mesonychide.
I at one time called this order by the name Insectivora,a course
which some zoologists may prefer. But a name should as nearly
as possible adhere to a group to which it was first applied, and
whose definition has become currently associated, with it. Such
an application is correct in fact, and is a material aid to the
memory. There are various precedents for the adoption of a new
general term for a group composed of subordinate divisions which
have themselves already received names.
In order to determine the number of internal tubercles in some
of the Inseclivora, so as to ascertain the affinities of some ques-
tionable genera, it is first necessary to examine the homologies
of the cusps of the molar teeth. The opossums are characterized
by the presence of three longitudinal series of tubercles on the
superior molar. The homologies of these cusps are rendered
clear by the character presented by the fourth superior premolar,
where the anterior intermediate is wanting. The external cusps
are really such, and are not developed from a cingulum external
to the true external cusps, as appears at first sight to be the case
with such animals as the Talpide. The intermediate cusps are
really such, although the posterior looks like the apex of a V-
shaped external cusp. In Peratherium the external cusps are
smaller than in Didelphys, and the intermediate V’s so much
' Two species of Pelycodus must be removed from this genus and family,
and be placed in the Creodonta with Mioclenus. They are the P. pelvidens
and P. angulatus, which have the posterior inner tubercle of the superior
molars, a mere projection of the cingulum. I place them in a new genus
which differs from Mioclenus in the possession of an internal cusp of the
fourth inferior premolar, under the name of Chriacus ; type C. pelvidens.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 81
better developed, that the type is much like that of the Talpide,
in whose neighborhood I originally referred it.
This leads to a consideration of the question of the homologies
of the cusps in the genera of the old order of Insectivora proper,
and of the Creodonta. Mr. St. George Mivart has briefly discussed
the question, so far as relates to the former group.’ He com-
mences with the primitive quadrituberculate type presented by
Gymnura and Erinaceus, and believes that the external cusps
occupy a successively more and more internal position till they
come to be represented by the apices of well developed V’s, as in
the ungulate types. The V’s are well developed in several
families, and in Chrysochloris the two V’s are supposed to be
united and to constitute almost the entire apex of the crown,
while in Centetes the same kind of a V forms a still larger part
of the crown.
I believe that these conclusions must be modified, in the light
of the characters of various extinct genera, and of the genus
Didelphys. In the first place there is an inherent improbability
in the supposition that the external V’s of the superior molars of
the Insectivora have had the same origin as those of the Ungulata.
The movements of the jaws in the two groups are different, the
one being vertical, the other partially lateral. In the one, acute
apices are demanded ; in the other, grinding faces and edges. We
have corresponding V’s in the inferior dental series, and we
regard those as produced by the connection of alternating cusps
by oblique ridges. In homologizing the superior cusps, we have
as elements, two external, two intermediate, and two internal
cusps. The first are opposite the external roots, and the anterior
internal is opposite the internal root.
First, as regards Centetes and Chrysochloris. Besides the
strained character of the hy pothesis that supposes the V-shaped
summit of the crown to represent two V’s fused together, there is
good evidence obtainable in support of the belief that the triangle
in question is the usual one presented by the Creodonta.
This clearly consists of the two external and the anterior
internal cusps united by angular ridges. The form is quite the
same as in Leptictis and Ictops, and nearly that of Deliatherium,
where the external cusps are present. Centetes and Chrysochloris
only differ trom these in that the external cusps are wanting. In
' Journal of ‘Anatomy and Physiology, ii, 138, figures.
82 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AUADEMY OF [1883.
addition, the latter genus presents a rudiment of the posterior
inner tubercle, as is seen in Deltatherium. An explanation similar
to this is admitted by Mr. Mivart to apply to the cusps of the
inferior molar of Centetes. It remains to ascertain whether the
cusp in this genus, Chrysochloris, etc., represents an intermediate
or not.
Secondly, as regards the TYalpide and Soricide, where the
external V’s are well marked. If we examine the external cusps
in the genus Didelphys, we find that the posterior one becomes
gradually more anterior in its position, until on the second true
molar it stands largely above the interspace between the roots, in-
stead of over the posterior root. It will also be seen that the
anterior intermediate tubercle is distinct, and of insignificant
proportions, while the posterior intermediate is large and is
related to the posterior external, as is the apex of a V to its
anterior base, In this arrangement I conceive that we have an
explanation of the V’s of the Talpidx and Soricide. The first
true molar of Scalops is a good deal like that of Didelphys, but
the anterior cusp is larger and there is no anterior intermediate
cusp, while the posterior external is of reduced size. The poste-
rior V is better developed than in Didelphys, but is composed in
the same way, of a posterior intermediate cusp, aud a posterior
external with a posterior heel. These are united by stronger
ridges in Scalops, Condylura and Blarina, than in Didelphys.
On the second true molar in Scalops,a V represents the anterior
external cusp of the first true molar. Whether this V has a con-
stitution like the posterior one, 7. e., is composed of external and
intermediate cusps joined, is difficult to determine ; but it is prob-
ably so constituted. It seems to be pretty clearly the case in
Blarina, where the fourth premolar and first true molar may be
compared, with a resulting demonstration of the correctness of
this view. In Condylura, the V’s have become more developed
and the external cusps reduced, so that the analysis is more
difficult.
This interpretation applied to Urotrichus and Galeopithecus
gives them quadrituberculate molars, not trituberculate, as deter-
mined by Mivart. Mystomys is tritubercular. The intermediate
tubercles are present, but are imperfectly connected with the ex-
ternal, so that V’s are not developed (vide figures of Mivart and
Allman). This genus offers as much confirmation of the homology
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 83
here proposed as do the opossums, but it differs from the latter
in having the anterior intermediate tubercle the larger, instead of
the posterior. Mystomys and Solenodon also confirm my deter-
mination of the homologies in Centetes.!
In conclusion I give the following synoptic view of the consti-
tution of the superior molar teeth in various genera of the
Bunotheria.
Cusps PRESENT.
1
External. External. |No external. No external.
External. No interme- | External. | No interme-| Nointerme- | No interme-
Intermediate. diate. ‘Intermediate diate. diate. diate.
Two internal. | Two internal. |One internal. One internal. Two internal. One internal,
|
Adapide. Gymuura. Mystomyidz |Mesonyx. Chrysochloris Centetes.
(2d internal
Tupeide. Erinaceus. Mioclenus. |Leptictis. rudimentary)
Galeopithecidx Macroscelididz! Miacis. Stypolophus.
| |
Soricide. Talpide. Oxyena. Solenodon.
| (do.)
Urotrichus. '(Didelphys.) Chriacus.
| |
| |(Canis.) Deltatherium
| Esthonyx. |
(2nd internal
| rudimentary )
1 This view was first advanced by the writer in the Annual Report U. S.
Geol. Survey Terrs., 1873 (74), p. 472.
84 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
APKIL 10,
Rev. H. C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.
Thirty-two persons present.
Notes on Echinocactus.— Mr. THoMAs MEEHAN announced, at
the meeting of the Botanical Section, the discovery of sensitive
stamens in Hchinocactus Whipplet. This peculiarity had been
long known in Opuntia Rafinesqui and allied species, as well as in
Portulaca, which, though its natural order was regarded as very
distinct in systems of classification, had much in common with
Cactacex. The motion of the stamens when touched in this
species of Hchinocactus was not instantaneous. several seconds
sometimes elapsing before the motion responded to the touch.
The flowers of this species are unable to expand to any great
extent, on account of their short tube, surrounded by long and
stiff spines. If the flowers could expand as in Opuntia, and the
stamens lie flat, as in that genus, Mr. Meehan suggested that the
motion might be equal to that observed in Opuntia. The motion
in Opuntia was not always up towards the pistil, but might be
horizontal, to the right or to the left—there seemed to be no rule.
That seemed to be the case also in the Echinocactus. The bending
was from the base, as the filament retained a perfectly straight
line during the movement.
Mr. Meehan further remarked that in descriptions of cactaceous
plants, the relative length of the pistil to petals or stamens was
often given. He had observed that in many species, about the
period of the ejection of the pollen from the anther-cells, the
stamens and style were of about equal length, the stellate stigma
being just above the mass of anthers; but the style continued to
grow after the maturity of the anthers, and, in Hchinocactus
Whipplei, would finally reach to near half an inch above. He
had not been able to get any genera of Cactaceex to fruit under
culture except Opuntia, unless they were artificially pollinized.
By the application of the flower’s own pollen to the stigma, they
sometimes perfected fruit.
Mr. Meehan also remarked that in botanical descnnaiaa!
Echinocactus Whipplet and Echinocactus polyancistrus were
described as having greenish or yellow flowers. His plants had
bright purple flowers, and he had no doubt were correc ly referred
to the species named. They were from southern Utah.
Referring to Echinocactus uncinatus, he remarked that speci-
mens collected in New Mexico by George Vasey, and blooming
under culture, had the central spine double the length of the
others, whereas in the figure in Pfeiffer they are all represented
as uniform, and there were no green-edged sepals or bracts at the
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 85
base of the flower, as in that figure, warranting the var. Wrightiz
Eng.
On the Relations of Heat to the Sexes of Flowers.—At the
meeting of the Botanical'Section on April 9, Mr. THomas MEEHAN
referred to his past communications to the Academy, showing that
in monecious plants female flowers would remain at rest under
a temperature which was sufficient to excite the male flowers to
active development. Hence a few comparatively warm days in
winter or early spring would bring the male flowers to maturity,
while the female flowers remained to advance only under a higher
and more constant temperature. In this manner the explanation
was offered why such trees were often barren. The male flowers
disappeared before the females opened, and hence the latter were
unfertilized. He referred especially to some branches of Corylus
Avellana, the English hazel-nut, which he exhibited before the
Section last spring, in which the male flowers (catkins) were past
maturity, the anthers having opened and discharged their pollen,
and the catkins crumbling under a light touch, but there were no
appearances of action in the female flower-buds. There were no
nuts on this tree last season. ‘The present season was one of un-
usually low temperature. There had not been spasmodic warmth
enough to bring forward the particularly excitable maple-tree
blossoms. The hazel-nut had not, therefore, had its male blos-
soms brought prematurely forward. He exhibited specimens
from the same tree as last season, showing the catkins in a young
condition of development, only half the flowers showing their
anthers, while the female flower-buds had their pretty purple
stigmas protruding from nearly all of them.
Mr. Meehan remarked that his observations the past few seasons
had been so carefully made that he hardly regarded confirmation
necessary, but believed the further exhibition of these specimens
might at least serve to draw renewed attention to his former com-
munications.
Apri 17.
Rev. Henry ©. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.
Twenty-two persons present.
The following was ordered to be printed :—
86 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883:
AZTEC MUSIC.
BY H. T. CRESSON.
Primitive music seems to have been limited to a few sounds,
produced either by percussion or by means of rude instruments ;
these sounds or notes in most cases, as musical authorities unite
in asserting, represented five tones of the diatonic scale, viz., the
tonic or prime note, second, third, fifth and sixth. This would
indicate that most barbarous nations were ignorant of the fourth
and seventh tones of the scales as known to us. Among the
Aztecs, whose remains show superior advancement in the arts, a
more thorough appreciation of music evidently existed. Tospeak
first of their percussive music, the huehuetl or large drum of the
great temple, at the ancient pueblo of Tenochtitlan, was covered
by the skins of serpents, and when beaten could be heard at a
distance of several miles. They had clay balls or rattles placed
inside of their grotesque clay images, also within the handles
attached to their earthenware vessels, which are generally hollow,
and contain pebbles or small pellets of clay.
The Poinsett collection possesses several objects among its
interesting and valuable specimens of ancient Mexican art, which,
unfortunately, are much injured or almost destroyed ; these are in
th: form of a serpent’s head, with protruding forked tongue, and
have a ball of clay placed within the mouth. The first-named
portion is attached to a handle of terra-cotta, to which, after an
examination of several specimens, I am inclined to think, were
joined large hollow cylinders of the same material. A portion of
these still remain united to the handle, suggesting that they must
have been concave. When shaken toand fro, the ball within the
head of this terra-cotta serpent rebounds from side to side, thus
producing a clear sound resembling that given by our American
rattlesnake ( Crotalus horridus) when irritated. A series of these
instruments may have been used in their religious ceremonies, and
were no doubt placed upon cylinders of large size, balanced so as
to regain the perpendicular when set in motion, and in swaying
from side to side produced a rattling sound, suggesting that of
the serpent above named, which was esteemed a sacred animal by
these people.
PHILA., 1883.
PROC. A. N. S.
dent: hale
LE fig =
ce ah k :
Sex fu \ 0
e), CCNA 4 ES Balas
@. Closed . 1S: JultStop.
C-f u.. [yb Hol Stop,
O . Hew.
CRESSON ON AZTEC MUSIC.
and Huxley concluded
that they should be arranged in two suborders.* Professor Marsh,
after showing that one of my three orders (Symphypoda) was
established on characters erroneously ascribed to its type by
previous writers, proposed to divide the Dinosauria into seven
suborders. He later’ regarded the Dinosauria as a subclass, and
divided it into five orders, the fourth of which is composed of
three suborders. The characters used by Marsh to define this
supposed subclass, do not differ from those previously developed
as above cited, excepting that a number are introduced which
1 British Fossil Reptiles,
? Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, p. 33.
3 American Naturalist, 1871, p. 508.
4 Proceedings Amer. Assoc, Adv, Science, 1870 (1871), p. 233.
®> Transactions American Philosophical Society, xiy, 1869, 90-99,
6 Quarterly Jour. Geolog. Soc., London, 1870.
7 Amer. Jour. Sci. Arts, 1882, p. 83.
98 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
cannot be used to distinguish a subclass, or in some instances an
order. In like manner, the definitions of his orders and suborders
embrace many characters which are not usually regarded as
defining groups higher than families. Such, e. g., are the numbers
of toes; relative sizes of fore- and hind-limbs; solidity or non-
solidity of bones; presence or absence of dermal armor. Much
light was, however, thrown on the subject by Professor Marsh, by
the numerous characters he brought to light, and the number of
forms he defined.
The constitution of the pelvis is shown by Marsh to differ
materially in the different members of the Dinosauria, As this
region presents characters diagnostic of the order Dinosauria
itself, its modifications within the order become of importance.
The ungulate or unguiculate character of the feet must also not
be neglected, although of less importance than in the mammalia.
If the order is susceptible of division into suborders, it must be
by means of the following definitions, which I select from Marsh’s
diagnoses :
Feet ungulate; pubes projecting and connected in front; no
postpubes ; Opisthocela.
Feet ungulate ; pubes projecting free in front ; postpubes present ;
Orthopoda.
Feet unguiculate; pubes projecting downwards and codssified dis-
tally ; caleaneum not produced ; Gontopoda.
Feet unguiculate; caleaneum much produced backwards ;.? pelvis;
Hallopoda.
I have used for these orders the oldest names when the defini-
tions first given were not erroneous, although they were inadequate.
Thus I think the name Opisthoceela (Owen') must take precedence
of Sauropoda Marsh. I combine Marsh’s two divisions, Stego-
sauria and Ornithopoda, into one, and use the name I gave in
1866 and redefined in 1869,? for the division thus remodeled.
The name Goniopoda, given at the same time, I designed to
embrace the carnivorous Dinosauria, but included in my defini-
tion some characters which are of less significance than I then
attached to them.
Prof. Huxley recognized three families: the Scelidosauridz and
1 Palzontology, 1860, p. 272.
? Transactions American Philos. Soc., xiv, p. 90. See American Naturalist,
1882, March.
‘4 SITIGVUIN SAINOTOIA
Lee FC eel eee ee ee re ee ee
‘€881 19S LYN JO ‘GVOV 40 00Ud
me
a 7 a; : - i : i : tA ¥ ¥ 4 :
- ¥ Os ‘
a) oh
Pi. V,
. OF ACAD. OF NAT. SCI. 1883.
DICLONIUS MIRABILIS +
PROC
al “a he
PL VI.
PROC. OF ACAD. OF NAT. SCI. 1883.
1
7
DICLONIUS MIRABILIS
x
“
‘
bd ny 00)
Slice cioae Sree)
m
‘3
PROC
ee
|
$$$
i a I
OF ACAD. OF NAT. SCI. 18&3.
DICLONIUS MIRABILIS #¢.
Pie VE.
‘
’
.
ve
Sh
ea
1”
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 99
Iguanodontide, wich belong to the Orthopoda, and the Megalo-
sauridzx, which pertains to the Goniopoda. To the former, I
added the family Hadrosauride in 1869, and in 1877 I defined
the Camarasauridz, of the suborder Opisthocela.' To this family
Marsh gave, in 1882, the name of Atlantosauride.? At the same
time he proposed a number of families, some of which will be
retained, while others are not sufficiently defined.
The Hadrosauride are, so far as known, confined to the upper
cretaceous beds of North America, and continued, with their
accompanying carnivorous genera, later in geological time than
any other Dinosauria. Besides the genus Hadrosaurus, I have
added the genera Diclonius and Cionodon, and it is possible that
the genera Monoclonius, Dysganus and Agathaumas also belong
to it. These types are all found in the Laramie formation,
excepting Hadrosaurus, which is as yet only known from the
older Fox Hills or Mestrichtian, and Pierre epochs. From the
latter formations, came also Hypsibema, possibly a member of the
same family.
As the latest in time, the Dinosauria of the Laramie possess an
especial interest. Having recently obtained a specimen of a species
of the genus Diclonius Cope, lam in a position to give not only the
characters of the family and suborder more definitely than here-
tofore, but also to furnish some cranial characters of the order,
which have been hitherto little known or unknown. The species
on which these observations are made is the Diclonius mirabilis?
of Leidy. It is represented by a nearly complete skeleton, in-
cluding the skull, which was discovered by Messrs. Wortman and
Hill in the Laramie beds of Dakota. At present, I only describe
the general characters, and those chiefly cranial, leaving the com-
plete description and iconography for my forthcoming volume on
the Laramie vertebrate fauna.
_ The character which distinguishes this genus from Hadrosaurus
is the attenuation of the astragalocalcaneum, and its codssification
with the tibia. Ornithotarsus differs from Diclonius in the pro-
1 Proceedings American Philosophical Soc., 1877, p. 243.
2 Amer. Jour. Sci. Arts, 1882, p. 83.
%'This species is part of the one called by Leidy Trachodon mirabilis,
who included in it a species of Dysganus. He did not characterize the
genus Trachodon, and afterwards abandoned it. (Proceedings Academy,
Phila., 1868, p. 199.)
100 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
duced calcaneum, which supports the extremity of the fibula.
There are four digits of the anterior foot, and three of the pos-
terior. The fore-limb is much shorter than the hind-limb, so that,
the attitude of the animal was kangaroo-like, as in Hadrosaurus
and Lelaps. In this it differed from Monoclonius,! where the
anterior limbs are as long as the posterior.
Ordinal Characters.—The quadrate bone is immovyably articu-
lated to the skull by three elements; the parietal, the quadrato-
jugal, and the jugal. The intercalare occupies a position on the
external edge of the exoccipital, and nearly approaches the
proximal end of the quadrate at its posterior side. The post-
frontals and prefontals are well developed, and the parietals,
frontals, nasals and premaxillaries form the middle line of the
skull above, as in other reptiles. The elements of the lower jaw
belonging to reptiles are all present.
Subor dinal and Family Characters —The parietal is, as to its
superior face, a T-shaped bone, of which the transverse portion
rests on the supraoccipital bone, without interspace. The external
extremities of the transverse branches are excavated below to
receive the proximal end of the quadrate. These extensions of
the parietal are stout, and represent the parietosquamosal arch
of the Lacertilia. Resting as they do on the occipital, they present
a character exactly intermediate between those presented by the
Crocodilia and Lacertilia.
The zygomatic arch is complete, having the usual flexure observed
in reptiles, and branching to a postorvital arch by the interven-
tion of a postorbital bone. The postorbital part of the zygomatic
arch forms the external border of the superior aspect of the skull,
and encloses a crotaphite foramen. The portions of*the frontal
and parietal bones which separate the crotaphite foramina, forin
a narrow isthmus. The postorbital part of the zygoma consists
chiefly of the squamosal. This element is rod-like, and does not
reach or take part in the articulation with the quadrate. In this
respect this genus differs materially from Svelidosaurus, where,
according to Owen, the squamosal is more extended posteriorly,
and articulates with the superior part of the quadrate by a fixed
articulation. The external portions of the parietal are thus, in
Scelidosaurus, correspondingly reduced.
The malar or jugal bone is of large size, while the quadrato-
‘ Proceedings Phila. Academy, 1876, Octaber.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 101
jugal is rather small. Its articulation with the quadrate is
squamosal. The maxillary is convex on its outer face, presenting
the teeth inwards. The nasals are distinct,and much narrowed
forwards to their junction with the spines of the premaxillaries.
The latter bones are distinct. They form, when viewed from
above, an anchor-shaped body, with the curved flanges extending
outwards and backwards. These enclose, with the anterior apex
of the maxillaries, the huge external nareal orifices, which were
probably roofed over by membrane, as in the birds.
The pterygoids extend well posteriorly as broad plates, and are
in close contact with the inferior part of the quadrates. They are
separated for a short distance on the middle line posteriorly by a
fissure, which, with the narrow space between the pterygoids and
the presphenoids, gives exit to the transversely narrowed posterior
nares. The occipital condyle looks downwards. The sphenoid is
posteriorly horizontal, and overlaps the basioccipital with only a
trace of lateral tuberosities; but in front it is curved abruptly
downwards. At this point, an elongate, flattened, truncate process
extends posteriorly, forming the median part of the roof of the
fissure of the posterior nares. In front of this fissure the ptery-
goids are in contact, and extend a considerable distance ante-
riorly ; at least to opposite to the border of the large anterior
palatomaxillary foramen.
The maxillary bone is produced far posteriorly, so as to define
the zygomatic foramen on the inner side. The palatine bone
extends posteriorly between it and the pterygoid for a considerable
distance, when the expanding pterygoid cuts it off, and extends
to the posterior extremity of the maxillary, closing the space
occupied in the Lacertilia by the posterior palatomaxillary foramen.
I cannot distinguish whether the portion which extends to the
maxillary bone is distinguished as an ectopterygoid. The posterior
edge of this part of the pterygoid projects below the posterior part
of the bone, which is nearly horizontal until it reaches the quad-
rate. It then ascends, forming a lamina on the inner side of that
bone, reaching the process from the inner side of the condyle.
The vomer is a narrowed, horizontal lamina between the anterior
parts of the maxillary bones, anterior to which point it does not
appear to extend. It soon becomes a vertical lamina, spreading
at the base, where it is in contact with the middle line of contact
of the pterygoid bones (and perhaps of the palatines, but these
102 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
are not visible at that point). From this point it is a deep atten-
uated keel, dividing the palate into two deep channels, and
extends as far posteriorly as the nares. The posterior part is
free beyond its base. The entire vomer is like that seen in various
natatorial birds. The anterior maxillopalatine foramen separates
the vomer from the maxillaries anteriorly. Posteriorly, the fora-
men is bounded by an ascending process of the maxillary bone,
which is in contact with the palatines posteriorly.
The premazxillary is divided its whole length. At the middle
line above, it passes between the nasal laminz, while below it
forms the roof of the muzzle part of the mouth, and the floor
of the huge nareal fossa on each side of its spine. This part
extends posteriorly as a thin lamina, each meeting that of the
opposite side on the middle line, and recurving upwards, forming
a median superior crest. The horizontal portion extends above
the maxillary bone, between it and the descending postnareal part
of the nasal, and extends over the anterior part of the lachrymal,
intervening between the anterior extremity of the malar, and the
posterior extremity of the nasal. Its posterior portion develops
a rib-like projection, which descends downwards and forwards
towards the anterior part of the maxillary bone, and disappears.
This bone perhaps includes the mazilloturbinal.
The preorbital region includes a not unusual arrangement of the
elements. The prefrontal bone descends as far as the middle of
the anterior border of the orbit, and to the lachrymal. The
orbital edge of the latter is interrupted by an element which pre-
sents a vertical edge outwards, and appears to be distinct from
it, extending under it anteriorly, and separated from it by a ver-
tical groove externally. It is, perhaps, the superciliary bone
of Cuvier, which occupies a somewhat similar position in the
Varanide. Below the lachrymal a small part of the orbit is
bounded in front by the jugal. The latter sends forward a laminar
prolongation over the maxillary, separating it externally from the
posterior extension of the maxilloturbinal.
The mandibular ramus includes all the elements of the reptilian
jaw. The arrangement posteriorly is a mixture of that of the
crocodile and that of the lizard, while the remaining portion is
peculiar. The angle is formed by about equal parts of the articular
and angular, the former furnishing the external half, the latter the
internal. There are a huge dental fossa and foramen, as in the
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 103
Lacertilia,and no perforations either external or internal, in agree-
ment with the same type. The coronoid process is very large and
elevated, and its base, which is crescentic in section, is embraced
by the surangular, and is reached posteriorly by the anterior pro-
longation of the articular. Its posterior face is concave, and its
apex is curved anteriorly, reaching the superior edge of the jugal
bone at the inferior border of the orbit. The angular bone forms
the internal border of the dental fossa, and extends to the
posterior edge of the splenial above. Below, it sends a prolonga-
tion forwards. The greater part of the external and inferior faces
of the ramus are formed by the surangular bone, which has an
enormous extent, far exceeding in size that of any known reptile.
It extends posteriorly to below the quadrate cotylus. Anteriorly
it spreads laterally, and unites with its fellow of the opposite side,
forming a short symphysis, and simulating a dentary. At the
base of the internal side of the ramus, it is separated from the
anterior prolongation of the angular by an open Meckelian groove,
which shallows out near the middle of its length. In correspond-
ence with this extent of the surangular, the splenial is enormously
developed, and contains the great magazine of teeth which I have
described as characteristic of this type.! Its internal wall is very
thin, and adheres closely to the faces of the teeth, in the fossil, in
its present condition. This development and dentition of the
splenial bone distinguishes the Hadrosauridxe widely from the
Iguanodontide. The dentary bofie is a flat semicircular plate
attached by suture to the extremities of the surangulars. There
is no trace of symphysial suture, and the posterior border sends a
median prolongation backwards, which is embraced by the suran-
gulars. The edge of the dentary is flat, thin, and edentulous, and
closes within the edge of the premaxillary.
The dentition is remarkable for its complexity, and for the dif-
ference in character presented by the superior and inferior series.
Leidy pointed out the character of the latter? in the Hadrosaurus
foulkei, and I have described the character of the superior denti-
tion in the genera Cionodon*? and Diclonius.*| The teeth of both
1 Bulletin U. 8S. Geol. Survey Territories, F. V. Hayden ; iii, p. 594-7.
May, 1877.
2 Cretaceous Reptiles North America, 1864, p. 83.
3 Vertebrata of Cretaceous formations of the West, 1875, p. 59.
* Proceedings Philadelphia Academy, 1876, p. 250.
104 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1885.
series succeed each other in columns of from five to eight teeth
each, following an arc of acircle. The superior arc is convex
externally ; the inferior arc is convex internally, or towards the
position of the tongue. It results that the opposed grinding sur-
faces of the two dental series are vertical. The cementum-plate of
the tooth is, in both sets, on the convex side of the tooth, hence
external and inferior in the superior teeth, and internal and supe-
rior in the inferior teeth. The teeth replace each other differently
in the two jaws, or rather the replacement of the teeth does not
partake of the general reversal of relations which the opposite series
present in all other respects. The successional teeth rise in both
jaws on the inner sides of the older teeth. From this it follows,
that in the superior series the replacement is on the non-functional
side of the tooth, or from the side which does not bear the cementum-
plate. In the lower jaw, the successional teeth follow on the side
that bears the cementum-plate, so that one tooth must be worn
away before the apex of its successor can come into use. The
arrangement of the superior series permits the successional to
overlap the functional tooth far beyond the base of the enamel-
plate, which in point of fact they do in the Diclonius mirabilis,
though not to the same extent as in the Cionodon arctatus. The
superior teeth are smaller and narrower in form than the inferior,
and both have a keel on the median line of their cementum-face.
There are no teeth on the anterior parts of the surangular bone
nor on the dentary or premaxiMary bones. The extremity of the
muzzle is a flattened spatulate beak.
Dermal or corneous structures have left distinct traces in the
soft matrix about the end of the beak-like muzzle. Lamine of
brown remnants of organic structures were exposed in removing
the matrix. One of these extends as a broad vertical band round
the sides, indicating a vertical rim to the lower jaw, like that
which surrounds some tea trays, and which probably represents the
tomia of the horny sheath of a bird’s beak. At the front of the
muzzle its face is sharply undulate, presenting the appearance of
vertical columns with tooth-like apices. Corresponding tooth-
like processes, of much smaller size, alternate with them from
the upper jaw. These probably are the remains of a serration of
the extremital part of the horny tomia, such as exist on the lateral
portions in the lamellirostral birds.
Systematic Resulis.—The structure of the skull of this species
adds some confirmation to the hypothesis of the avian affinities
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 105
of the Dinosauria, which I first announced, as indicated by the hind-
limbs, and which Professor Huxley soon after observed in the char-
acters of the limbs and pelvis. The confirmation is, however,
empirical rather than essential, and is confined to a few points.
One of these is the form and position of the vomer, which much
reser bles that seen in lamellirostral birds. The large development
of the premaxillary bone has a similar significance. So has the
toothless character of that bone and the dentary.
Among reptiles, this skull combines, in an interesting way, the
characters of the two orders Crocodilia and Lacertilia. The
presence of the ethmoid above the maxillary and overlapping the
lachrymal, is unique among vertebrata, so faras [amaware. The
free exoccipito-intercalare hook is scarcely less remarkable.
Of mammalian affinity there is no trace to be found.
Specific Characters.—The general form and appearance of the
skull, as seen in profile, is a good deal like that of a goose. From
above it has more the form of a rather short-billed spoonbill
(Platalea’. For a reptile, the head is unusually elevated poste-
riorly, and remarkably contracted at the anterior part of the
maxillaries. The flat, transverse expansion of the premaxillaries
is absolutely unique. The posterior edges of the occipital bones
are produced far backwards, forming a thin roof over the anterior
part of the vertebral column. This roof is supported by two
strong buttresses, one from each side of the foramen magnum.
The latter is a vertical oval. The exoccipital (carrying the inter-
calare) descends on each side, forming a free hook-like process
behind the superior half of the quadrate. The recurved process
of the lateral branches of the parietal underruns the squamosal
two-thirds the length of the latter. The quadrate is separated
by a rather narrow, obliquely vertical fossa, from the postorbital
arch, owing to the posterior position of the latter.
The orbit is posterior in position, and is a horizontal oblong in
form. The superior (superciliary) border is flat, with slight
rugosities at the positions of the pre- and postfrontal sutures.
The frontal region is a little concave, and there is a convexity of
the superior face of the prefrontal bone in front of the line of the
orbit. The peculiar position of the teeth gives the side of the
face, when the mandible is closed, a horizontally extended con-
cavity. There are four and a half tooth-like colums on each side
of the middle line of the end of the muzzle.
8
106 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
The extremital teeth of both series are smaller than the great
majority, which are of equal size and similar form. Those of the
superior series are rod-like, narrowed at the extremities, and flat-
tened on one side. The edges of the cementum-plate are not
serrate, and the other faces of the tooth are finely rugose with
cementum-granules. In the inferior series, the cementum-faces
are diamond-shaped, and the tooth may thus be distinguished into
crown and root. The concealed surfaces are finely rugose; the
edges of the cementum-plate are not serrate, and its surface is
smooth. As compared with the Hadrosaurus foulkei, the dental
magazine is much deeper, and contains a greater number of teeth
in a vertical column, and probably a larger number in the aggre-
gate. I find in each maxillary bone of the Diclonius mirabilis
six hundred and thirty teeth, and in each splenial bone four hun-
dred and six teeth. The total number is then two thousand and
seventy-two.
According to Mr. Wortman, who, with Mr. Hill, dug the skeleton
out, its total length is thirty-eight feet. The length of the skull
is 1:180 meters.
Restoration.—This animal in life presented the kangaroo-like
proportions ascribed by Leidy to the Hadrosaurus foulkei. The
anterior limbs are small, and were doubtless used occasionaily for
support, and rarely for prehension. This is to be supposed from
the fact that the ungual phalanges of the manus are hoof-like,
and not claw-like, though less ungulate in their character
than those of the posterior foot. The inferior presentation of the
occipital condyle shows that the head was borne on the summit of
a vertical neck, and at right-angles to it, in the manner of a bird.
The head would be poised at right-angles to the neck when the
animal rested on the anterior feet, by the aid of a U-like flexure of
the cervical vertebree. The general appearance of the head must
have been much like that of a bird.
The nature of the beak and the dentition indicate, for this
strange animal, a diet of soft vegetable matter. It could not have
eaten the branches of trees, since any pressure sufficient for their
comminution would have probably broken the slightly attached
teeth of the lower jaw from their places, and have scattered
them on the floor of the mouth. It is difficult to understand also
how such a weak spatulate beak, could have collected or have
broken off boughs of trees. By the aid of its dentate horny edge
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 107
it may have scraped leaves from the ends of branches, but the
appearances indicate softer and less tenacious food. Could we
suppose that the waters of the great Laramie lakes had supplied
abundant aquatic plants without woody tissue, we would have the
condition appropriate to this curious structure. Nympheas,
Nuphars, Potamogetons, Anacharis, Myriophyllum and similar
growths could have been easily gathered by this double-spoon-
like bill, and have been tossed, by bird-like jerks of the head
and neck, back to the mill of small and delicate teeth. In
order to submit the food to the action of these vertical shears, the
jaws must have been opened widely enough to permit their edges
to clear each other, and a good deal of wide gaping must, there-
fore, have accompanied the act of mastication. This would be
easy, as the mouth opens, as in reptiles and birds generally, to a
point behind the line of the position of the eye. The eye was
evidently of large size. On the other hand the indications are
that the external ear was of very small size. There is a large
tract that might have been devoted to the sense of smell, but
whether it was so or not is not easily ascertained.
We can suppose that the huge hind-legs of this genus and of
Hadrosaurus were especially useful in wading in the water that
produced their food. When the bottom was not too soft, they
could wade to a depth of ten or more feet, and, if necessary,
drag aquatic plants from their hold below. Fishes might have
been available as food when not tou large, and not covered with
bony scales. Most of the fishes of the Laramie period, are, how-
ever, of the latter kind (genus Clastes). The occurrence of several
beds of lignite in the formation shows that vegetation was
abundant.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
(All the figures are one-seventh of the natural size.)
Prats IV. Side view of skull of Diclonius mirabilis.
PuaTE Y. The same viewed from above.
Puate VI. Inferior view of the same.
PuaTE VII. Fig. 1, View of occipital region of ie same. Fig. 2, View of
the extremity of the muzzle from the front.
The complete iconography of this species will appear in the third volume
of the Report of the United States Geological Survey of the Territories,
under F. VY. Hayden and J. W. Powell, now in course of preparation.
108 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
ON SOME VERTEBRATA FROM THE PERMIAN OF ILLINOIS.
BY E. D. COPE..
The first notice of the existence of the Permian formation in
Illinois was published in these Proceedings for 1876, p. 404, et
seq. Ithen described the genera Cricotus and Clepsydrops, and
a species of fish allied to Ctenodus. In the Proceedings of the
American Philosophical Society for 1877 (commencing at p. 52),
I added descriptions of other species, and in a second paper in
the same volume, p. 182, I showed that the entire number known to
that date was seventeen. Since then Mr. William Gurley, of
Dansville, Ill., has sent me some additional specimens, which
increase our knowledge of this interesting fauna.
A tooth in the collection is an incisor of a species of the Diadece-
tidx, a family not hitherto recognized in Illinois, although I have
recorded it from Texas and New Mexico. It is moreslender than
the corresponding teeth of any of the species known to me. I do
not know the incisors of the Chilonyx rapidens. I note here that
the genus Phanerosaurus von Meyer, from the Permian of Germany,
probably belongs to the Diadectidz or the Bolosauride. The
vertebree are a good deal like those of Hmpedias,' but apparently
lack the hyposphen. ;
Didymodus (?) compressus Newberry. Diplodus (?) compressus Newb. Cope, Pro-
ceeds. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1877, 53.
The name Diplodus was used by Rafinesque for a valid genus
of fishes before it was employed by Agassiz for the present genus.
I therefore propose to substitute for it the name Didymodus.
Thoracodus emydinus gen. et sp. nov.
Char. gen.—The form of the tooth or jaw on which this genus
is proposed, reminds one of that of a Diodon, and also of one-half of
that of a Janassa. It appears to be the half of a bilateral plate, which
is divided on the middle line by suture. Its form is somewhat
that of the anterior part of an episternal bone of a tortoise. It
consists essentially of a smooth border, separated from the
remainder of the tooth by a transverse groove. The interior
1 Mittheilungen a. d. Koeniglich. Mineral., Geolog. u. praehistor.-
Museum, Dresden; V, Nachtrage zur Dyas; Geinitz und Deichmiller,
1882, p. 10.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 109
portion is, on the superior face (if the piece belong to the inferior
jaw, and vice versa), transversely ridged and grooved, after the
manner of the genus Janassa.
Char. specif.—The smooth border is wide above and below.
Its edge is produced into a median projection, which is*decurved.
On the inferior surface it is marked by shallow grooves, which
radiate from the groove which bounds it posteriorly, extending
nearly to the free edge. Posterior to the bounding groove, the
surface is smooth. The posterior surface above has its grooves
concentric with the curved free margin. The ridges are narrow,
and step-like in position, presenting their free edges backwards.
There are no grooves other than these steps. They have an
angular curve opposite to the angle of the free margin, and at
the angle the groove which separates them is narrowed, while it
widens at other points. Free edge of border thickened ; surface
everywhere smooth.
Measurements. M.
Length of fragment transversely, . : ; 014°
Length of fragment anteroposteriorly, . : ‘011
Width of border area at median suture, . 3 005
Seven cross ridges, . : 2 : 3 : 005
Thickness at suture at cross-ridges, : : 002
Ctenodus heterolophus sp. nov.
This species is represented by a single broken tooth, which
presents remarkable characters. It had apparently, when perfect,
but three crests, which differ greatly in length, diminishing very
rapidly from the first or marginal crest.
The crest just mentioned is not only longer, but much more
elevated than the others, except at the base, where the second
crest is the highest. But while the first rapidly rises, the second
retains its elevation, and then descends, forming a convex edge,
of which the distal part is obtusely serrate. The proximal part
of the first crest is worn by friction with the opposing edge of
the opposite jaw into a sharp edge, below which its base is
covered by a thin layer of the shining cementum which invests
the teeth and sides of the second crest. The amount of this
shining layer is thus more extensive than in any other species of
Ctenodus known to me. The third crest, judging by its base of
continuity with the second, is very small.
110 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
Measurements. M.
Elevation of first crest at middle, : - 0095
Elevation of second crest at middle, . - 0065
Length of a tooth of second crest, : - °0020
The peculiarities of this tooth suggest that the genus Gnathor-
hiza Cope (Proceedings Amer. Philos. Soc., 1882, p. 629) is
Dipnoan, and allied to Ctenodus.
Ctenodus vabasensis sp. nov.
This fine species is represented by ap almost perfect tooth.
It is allied to the C. fossatus Cope, but is wider, and the crests
do not radiate so equally, but are chiefly directed in one direction
as in most species of the genus. The C. gurleianus and é
pusillus are at once distinguished by the small number of crests,
while the C. periprion and C. dialophus have a larger number of
crests, and are otherwise different. C. porrectus differs less from
it, but has only five + crests, while the C. vabasensis has six }.
The 1 represents the small posterior (?) crest, which is double.
This, with the next one, is directed slightly posteriorly; the
fifth is at right-angles to the long axis, and the anterior four
extend more or less forwards. They are serrate nearly to their
bases, but the teeth are obsolete on their basal halves. The
straight part of the internal edge extends as far forwards as the
fourth crest, and is continued posteriorly as a short process. No
fosse at ends of crests. Superior face of tooth wide, and slightly
concave. The anterior parts of the first and second crests are
broken away, so that it is impossible to say whether they are
produced as in C. porrectus.
Measurements. M.
Length to marginal base of second crest, . - 024
Width at marginal base of second crest, : - 009
Width at fourth crest, inclusive of apex, . >, 1p
Width of posterior side, ; : : - «010
Thickness at base of fifth crest, . ‘ - - 005
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 111
May 15.
The President, Dr. Letpy, in the chair.
Twenty-five persons present.
The following were presented for publication :—
‘“ Pinus Koraiensis,” by Josiah Hoopes.
“ On the Fishes of the Lakes of the Western Part of the Great
Basin,” by Edw. D. Cope.
Observations on Forsythia.—Mr.THoMAS MEEHAN, at the meeting
of the Botanical Section, May 14, referred to his communication
to the Academy (December 29, 1868), in which he suggested that
notwithstanding the strong specific differences between Forsythia
viridissima and F. suspensa, he believed they must have had a
common origin. /. suspensa has short styles and long stamens,
broad lobes to the corolla, broadly-ovate, thin, glaucous, sometimes
trifoliate, deeply serrate leaves,and makes a shrub of some ten feet
high, with numerous slender, pendulous branches. F. viridissima
is a stiff, erect bush, but of not half the height, with narrowly
lanceolate, thick, bright green, lightly serrate leaves; flowers with
narrow lobes, and the style long and the stamens short. F’. suspensa,
in cultivation, often produces abortive capsules; /. viridissima
rarely,if ever. In the paper cited above, an account is given of the
production of seed-vessels on F. viridissima, by using the pollen of
F. suspensa. Though the seeds were not wholly perfect, a winged
seed of one species was produced among the wingless ones of the
other. The resultant impression from those observations was that
in spite of what would be regarded as good specific differences,
they are but dimorphic forms, referable to sexual peculiarities.
Three years ago, the usually seedless capsules of F’. suspensa
produced a number of good seeds, which were sown. This season
thirty-four flowered. The leaves and general habit of these
plants present every shade of gradation between F’. suspensa and
F. viridissima; some of the leaves of the latter being even much
more slender than those of the original species. The flowers also
present in the larger number of cases the slender lobes of the
F. viridissima; some with the lobes recurved laterally to such
an extent as to seem much narrower than they are.
The most interesting fact in connection with this is the sexual
characteristics. Of the thirty-four plants, raised from a parent
having a short style and long stamens, only four have retained’
this parental character, but have assumed that belonging to the
form viridissima. ;
Some interesting questions are suggested by these observations :
112 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AUADEMY OF [1883.
The fact that F. suspensa makes abortive capsules freely, and
F, viridissima rarely, though it has the best developed pistil,
indicates that fertility is dependent on the potency of the pollen ;
and this is confirmed by the production of capsules on F. viridissima
when the pollen of F. suspensa was applied :
The fact that the speaker has had both forms growing on his
grounds for many years, without any seed-vessel appearing on
F. viridissima, except in the case cited, shows that it is not likely
to be cross-fertilized through insect agency.
In the fully fertile case of F. suspensa, the plants of F. viridissima
were fully four hundred feet away; and the suggestion of inter-
crossing between these forms, considered in connection with the
points previously made, seems to place hybridization out of the
question.
We may conclude, therefore, that these two supposed species are
but sexually dimorphic forms of one; and we have also the curious
fact that, in this case, notwithstanding the presumable influence of
the law of heredity, the strongly masculine tendency of the parent,
as indicated by the highly developed stamens, the potency of its
pollen on the F. viridissima, the power to almost perfect seeds in
partially developed seed-vessels generally, and the actual perfection
in one year, notwithstanding the imperfectly developed pistil,
should have had to give way to the female tendency in the offspring
to such a great degree as to leave only four out of thirty-four to
represent the parent.
Influence of Circumstances on Heredity.—Mr. THomas MEEHAN
referred to the fact that seed of the purple-leaved variety of Ber-
beris vulgaris, collected from plants growing near Philadelphia,
reproduced the purple-leaved peculiarity to an extent which it
could not do more perfectly if the variety were a true species.
In a bed of seedlings, containing on an estimate one thousand
plants, there were only two reversions to the original green-leaved
condition. Two years ago, he had been given, by Prof. C. S.
Sargent, some seeds of ligneous plants, sent to him from some
European Botanical Garden, and of thirty seedlings planted only
two are dark purple as in the parent.
May 22.
Rev. Dr. H. C. McCook, Vice-President, in the chair.
Forty persons present.
A paper entitled “A Revision of the Species of Gerres found
in American Waters,” by B. W. Evermann and Seth E. Meek, was
presented for publication.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 113
May 29.
The President, Dr. Lrrpy, in the chair.
Forty persons present.
N. A. Randolph, M.D., J. Reed Conrad, M.D., and Spencer
Trotter, M. D., were elected members.
Arnould Locard, of Lyons, Fred. W. Hutton, of Christchurch,
N. Z., and C. E. Beddome, of Hobart Town, Tasmania, were elected
correspondents.
The following were ordered to be printed :—
114 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
PINUS KORAIENSIS Sieb. & Zuce.
BY JOSIAH HOOPES.
Through the kindness of Chief Eng..G. W. Melville, U. S. N.,
T have enjoyed an opportunity of studying some excellent speci-
mens of this interesting species of pine, collected by him during
the late voyage of the unfortunate “ Jeannette” to the Arctic
regions. These specimens consist of a branch clothed with foliage,
two immature cones, and a few mature seeds, and were collected
in the District of Tuknansk, in Eastern Siberia. It was seen
along the banks of the Lena, Yenisei and Obi Rivers, forming a
tree about thirty feet in height, with a trunk about ten inches in
diameter at base. The collector further states that it fruits
abundantly, and “the edible seeds are used by the natives as
food, and by travelers as nuts.” It is interesting to note that
this heretofore comparatively rare species has a wider habitat,
and is more numerous than has generally been supposed, although
reported as having been found up to the Amoor River, which
takes its rise in the mountain range dividing the Lena from the
Amoor; hence it was reasonable to suppose it was more generally
distributed throughout Siberia and adjacent islands. Siebold
found it in Kamtschatka; and various authors have described it
in the list of Japanese Coniferze, but only in the latter as an
introduced species, where it is said to be quite rare.
Pinus Koraiensis is placed by Dr. Engelmann, in his recent
revision of the genus Pinus, in the subsection Cembre, of his
first section, Strobus. It is distinguishable from the section
Eustrobi by reason of the parenchymatous ducts, and with leaves
sparingly serrulate, scarcely denticulate at tip. This nut-bearing
pine is well marked throughout, and especially so in its cones and
seeds, the latter being wingless, subangulate, flatly compressed,
leaving on both sides of the scale when removed, remarkably deep
impressions. The cones are very distinctive, with long reflexed
scales, terminating in an abrupt mucro-like apex. The leaf-
characters in the specimens before me coincide with the published
description given by Dr. Engelmann, in relation to the absence
(or nearly so) of hypoderm or strengthening-cells, as well as in
other peculiar features of the Cembran group.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 115
Murray, in his “ Pines and Firs of Japan,” records its height
from ten to twelve feet, yet Parlatore, on the authority of Perfetti,
gives it at “sometimes thirty to thirty-three feet.” The latter is
corroborated by Chief Eng. Melville, thus showing conclusively
that it is a true northern species, attaining only its greatest size
near the extreme limits of arboreal vegetation; and yet, like all
other species of nut-pines, it never forms a large-sized tree.
This species will no doubt make a valuable addition to our list
of ornamental Conifers, as its hardiness is unquestioned, and the
foliage is as attractive as any other of the White Pine group,
unless we except the P. excelsa. In England it has proven reliable,
and with us the small plants show evidences of success.
116 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
A REVIEW OF THE SPECIES OF GERRES FOUND IN AMERICAN WATERS.
BY B. W. EVERMANN AND SETH E. MEEK.
Upon attempting to identify various specimens of Gerres from
different points on our coast,and from Mexico and Central America,
we were led to the thought that the species of this genus have been
unduly multiplied.
Through the kindness of Prof. D.S. Jordan, to whom we here desire
to acknowledge our indebtedness for the use of specimens and his
library, and for many valuable suggestions, we had placed at our
disposal his entire collection of specimens of Gerres, thus affording
us a considerable amount of material for purposes of comparison.
In Jordan and Gilbert’s Synopsis of Fishes of North America,
six species of Gerres are given as found on the United States
Coast; of these, G. homonymus appears to us to be identical with
G. gula C. and V.; and G. harengulus Goode and Bean, with
Eucinostomus pseudogula of Poey, and with Diapterus gracilis
described from Cape San Lucas by Dr. Gill.
In the present paper it is desired to set forth the conclusions
reached from a study of the material in hand. These conclusions
are all to be considered as provisional, perhaps to be modified by
the study of a greater number of specimens.
The synonymy given, however, appears to be fully justified by
the evidence before us.
We have been kindly permitted to copy the synonymy of the
Pacific Coast species from Profs. Jordan and Gilbert’s MSS.
The different species of Gerres noticed in this paper may be
readily separated by the following analysis :—
a. Preopercle and preorbital entire; body elongate, depth 23 to 4
in length.
b. Premaxillary groove naked.
c. Anal rays II-8; body very elongate, depth less than: one-
fourth its length. lefroyt. 1.
ec. Anal rays III-T.
d. Premaxillary groove linear.
e. Eye small, about 3} in head; depth nearly 3 in
length. gracilis. 2.
ee. Eye large, less than 3 in head; depth about 22 in
length. dow. 3.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 117
dd. Premaxillary groove not linear.
e. Body slender, depth 3 to 3Lin length. jonesi. 4.
ee. Body somewhat elevated, depth about 25 in length.
f. Caudal fin moderate, shorter than head ; second
anal spine not very strong, shorter than
third, 1 to length of head; ventrals short,
little more than half length of head, not
reaching vent. Color bright silvery, darker
above; snout and upper edge of caudal
peduncle somewhat dusky; dark punctula-
tions on body few or none; no trace of
vertical bars; upper part of spinous dorsal
becoming gradually blackish, other fins
nearly plain; axil faintly dusky.
californiensis. 5.
ff. Caudal fin about as long as head ; second anal
spine very strong, longer than third, one-
third or more length of head; ventrals long,
two-thirds length of head, reaching vent.
Color in life, clear silvery, bluish above,
sides with obsolete longitudinal streaks ;
back and sides with 8 or 9 bluish vertical
bars, about as broad as the pupil; a dark
blotch on upper edge of eye. cinereus. 6.
bb. Premaxillary groove scaled in front, forming a naked pit
behind; depth about 22 in length. gula. T.
aa. Preopercle serrate; premaxillary groove broad.
b. Preorbital entire.
c. Premaxillary groove naked.
d. Body ovate, the outline somewhat regularly elliptical,
depth a little less than half length; spines rather
slender and short, second dorsal spine half length
of head, second anal spine less than half length
of head. aureolus. 8.
dd. Body rhomboid, short and deep, with angular outlines,
the depth usually more than half length; spines
long and strong.
e. Anal rays III-8; second dorsal spine three-fourths
or more length of head; second anal spine more
than half length of head. peruvianus. 9.
118 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
ee. Anal rays II-9; second dorsal spine not nearly so
long as head, and not half longer than second
anal. rhombeus. 10.
cc. Premaxillary groove broad, rounded behind, witha median
linear depression, its surface scaled ; anal rays III-8;
second dorsal spine about as long as head; pectorals
nearly as long as head, reaching front of anal; teeth
long, slender, and brush-like ; depth 2 in length.
olisthostoma. 11.
bb. Preorbital serrate ; body with distinct dark stripes along the
rows of scales; body rhomboidal, with angular outline;
spines very strong.
e. Ventrals blackish. gatao. 12.
ce. Ventrals pale.
d. Second dorsal spine 2 to ? length of head, and ? depth
of body, which is 2 to 22 in its length.
e. Pectoralslong,reaching about to front of anal; caudal
longer than head; lateral stripes numerous ;
depth nearly 2 in length. lineatus.' 13.
ee. Pectorals short, barely reaching vent; caudal
shorter than head ; lateral stripes few; depth
about 22 in length. brevimanus. 14.
dd. Second dorsal spine as long as head, and longer than
longest anal spine; pectorals narrow, reaching
past tips of ventrals to anal; lateral stripes about
12; depth 2 to 2} in length. plumiert. 16.
1. Gerres lefroyi (Goode) Giinther.
Diapterus lefroyi Goode, Am. Jour. Sci. & Aits, 123, 1874.
Eucinostomus lefroyi Goode, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 5, 39, 1876.
Fucinostomus productus Poey, Ann. Lyc., xi, 59, 1876.
Gerres lefroyt Giinther, Voyage of Challenger, Fishes, i, 10, 1880.
(Name only.)
Habitat—Bermuda Islands.
2. Gerres gracilis (Gill) Jordan & Gilbert.
Diapterus gracilis Gill, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 246, 1862. (Cape
San Lucas. )
Gerres aprion Giinther, iv, 255, 1862. (San Domingo; Jamaica; Bahia.)
1 The short description of Gerres brasilianus C. and V., vi, 458, contains no
characteristics by which we are able to distinguish it from either G. lineatus
or G. brevimanus, hence we do not include it in the Key.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 119
Eucinostomus pseudogula Poey, Anal. Soc. Esp., iv, 124 & 125, 1875.
(Cuba.)
Eucinostomus harengulus Goode & Bean, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1879,
132. (Western Florida.)
Diapterus harengulus Goode & Bean, Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus., 1879, 339.
(Clear Water Harbor, Florida.)
Gerres gracilis Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 274
(Guaymas) ; and Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1881, 329 (Guaymas ;
Mazatlan ; Panama) ; idid., 1882, 108 (Mazatlan; Panama).
Gerres harengulus Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 584, 1883.
(Pensacola, Florida.)
Body elliptical, compressed, tapering regularly each way from
the spinous dorsal; anterior profile almost straight and not steep;
angle at front of breast little marked. Mouth small, maxillary
reaching vertically from front of orbit or slightly past it. Teeth
rather strong, in broad patches. Exposed portion cf maxillary
ovate, about twice as broad as long. Preorbital entire, very
narrow, its narrowest part about half width of maxillary. Eye
not very large, its diameter about equal to length of snout, or the
interorbital space, and is about 3} in head. Furrow for the base
of the premaxillaries a narrow naked groove, its length about
three-fifths of the eye, and more than three times its own breadth,
measured from the anterior limit of the scales along its sides.
Preopercle entire. Dorsal spines weak and flexible, the last two
or three proportionally stronger than the others. Longest dorsal
spine about twice in head, more than two-fifths greatest depth of
body, and nearly twice length of second anal spine. Anal spines
short, the second somewhat stronger than the third, but shorter,
its length 32 to 44 in head. Third spine shorter than soft rays.
Ventrals short, three-fifths length of head, reaching about half-way
to anal, but not nearly to vent. Pectorals slender, about as long
as head, reaching about to vent. Caudal not very long, the inner
margins of the lobes convex, the middle rays about one-fourth
length of outer ones, which are a little shorter than head. Scaly
sheath at base of fins moderate, the last rays of the anal hidden
by it. Ventrals and caudal mostly covered with small scales ;
other fins naked.
Color in life, silvery, greenish above. Snout and upper part of
caudal peduncle dusky. Spinous dorsal, in a male specimen,
dusky, punctate at base, abruptly black at tip, the dark areas
separated by a transparent, horizontal bar; in a female specimen,
the dorsal grows gradually darker at tip. Soft dorsal punctate.
120 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
Caudal with a faint dusky margin. Ventrals very slightly dusky
on the middle in the male, plain in the female.
Head 3,3,; depth 2,°,; D. IX-10; A. III-7; lat. line 5-45-9.
It seems probable that the habitat of the various species of
Gerres will be found to be much more extended than has hitherto
been supposed. Specimens of the present species have been
obtained in the West Indies, on the coast of Florida, and at
several points on the Pacific coasts of Central America and
Mexico. Prof. Chas. H. Gilbert reports it as abundant at Mazatlan,
where it is found in shallow waters near the shore. It reaches a
length of six inches or more, and is known to the fishermen as
Mojarra cantilena.
3. Gerres dowi (Gill) Giinther. ,
Diapterus dowi Gill, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 162, 1863. (Panama.)
Gerres dowt Giinther, Fish. Centr. Amer., 448, 1866 (Description taken
from Gill); Steindachner, Ichth. Beitrige, iv, 13, 1875 (No descrip-
tion). (Callao, Peru; Galapagos Islands).
Gerres dowi Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1881, 329
(Panama); 7bid., 1882, 111 (Panama); Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. 8.
Nat. Mus., 1882, 377 (Panama).
Gerres aprion Ginther, Fish. Centr. Amer., 391, 1866. (Name only.)
(Panama. )
Habitat.—Panama to Peru. Very abundant on the coasts of
the Galapagos Islands. (Steindachner.)
4, Gerres jonesi Giinther.
Gerres jonesit Giinther, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1879, iii, 150, 389;
Voyage Challenger, Fishes, i, 10, 1880 (Bermuda).
Habitat.—Bermuda Islands.
5. Gerres californiensis (Gill) Jordan & Gilbert.
Diapterus californiensis Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1862, 245.
(Cape San Lucas.)
Gerres californiensis Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1881, 274
(Guaymas); Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1881, 319
(Guaymas; Mazatlan); zbid., 1882, 108 (Mazatlan). ss
? Gerres gula Steindachner, Ichth. Beitrage, iii, 60, 1875. (Name only;
nec Cuv, & Val.) (Magdalena Bay.)
Habitat,—Pacifie coast of Mexico, (Mazatlan; Guaymas; Cape
San Lucas, )
6. Gerres cinereus (Walbaum) Jordan & Gilbert.
Turdus cinereus peltatus Catesby, pl. ii, fig. 2, 1750.
Mugil cinereus Walbaum, Arte di Piscium, 228, 1792. (After Catesby.)
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 121
Gerres aprion Cuv. & Val., vi, 461, 1830 (Martinique; San Domingo;
Montevideo; East Coast of Mexico). (Not of Giinther = Hucinos-
tomus pseudogula Poey); Poey, Rep. Fis. Cuba, i, 316, 1865.
Diaptereus aprion Poey, Syn. Pisce. Cuba, 321, 1868. (Cuba.)
Gerres zebra Miller & Troschel, Schomburgk Hist. Barbadoes, 668,
1848 (Barbadoes); Giinther, i, 343, 1859, and iv, 254, 1862 (Copied);
Steindachner, Ichthyol. Notizen, iv, 11, 1867 (Surinam); Stein-
dachner, Zur Fisch-Fauna des Magdelenen-Stromes, 9, 1878 (Rio
Magdalena, identified with G. squamipinnis); Jordan & Gilbert,
Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 1881, 329 (Mazatlan).
Gerres squamipinnis Giinther, i, 349, 1859, and iv, 254, 1862 (Jamaica;
Gautemala); Giinther, Fish. Centr. Amer., 391, 1869 (No description)
(Jamaica; Chiapam; Panama); Steindachner, Ichthyol. Notizen,
iv, 12, 1867 (Surinam).
Gerres cinereus Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Comm., 1882, 108
(Mazatlan); and Syn. Fish. N. A., 935, 1883.
Habitat.—Both coasts of Tropical America (Mazatlan; Chiapam ;
Panama; Bahamas; Barhadoes).
7. Gerres gula Cuvier & Valenciennes.
Gerres gula Cuv. & Yal., vi, 464, 1830 (Martinique ; Brazil); Jenyns,
Zool. Beagle, Fishes, 58, 1842; Giinther, i, 346, 1859, and iv, 255,
1862 (Atlantic Coasts of Tropical America); Poey, Rep. Fis, Cuba,
i, 316, 1865.
Eucinostomus argenteus Baird & Girard, Ninth Smith. Report, 345,
1855; Baird & Girard, Mex. Bd. Survey, 17, pl. 9, figs, 9-12, 1859,
?Gerres argenteus Giinther, iv, 256, 1862. (Atlantic Coasts of N.A.)
Huctnostomus gulula Poey, Anal. Sac. Esp., iy, 128, pl. vi, 1875.
Diapterus homonymus Goode & Bean, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1879,
340. (Clear Water Harbor, Fla.)
Gerres gula Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish, N. A,, 934, 1883. (West
Indies, north to Cape Cod.)
Body elliptical, compressed, dorsal profile tapering regularly
each way from beginning of spinous dorsal ; anterior proffle nearly
straight, posterior slightly more convex. Line from angle at
front of breast to vent nearly straight. Mouth small, slightly
oblique (when not protruded), maxillary reaching just beyond
vertical at front of eye, exposed part triangular, about twice as
long as broad. Premaxillaries very protractile; premaxillary
groove longer than broad, scaled in front, with a naked pit behind;
these scales, however, are not very distinct in young specimens,
and are apt to be rubbed off in poorly preserved ones.
Villiform teeth on both jaws; no canines, incisors, or molars;
no teeth on vomer or palatines. Preopercle entire; gill-rakers
9
122 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
short, about seven below angle. Eye large, 3 in head, its diameter
a little greater than its distance from snout, and about equal to
the interorbital space.
Scales moderate, as in other species. Lateral line follows curve
of back, being most arched beneath fifth and sixth spines.
Spinous dorsal as long as soft, second dorsal spine nearly 1? in
second anal spine, which is stronger than the third, but equals it
in length; posterior ends of anal and dorsal fins opposite, soft
parts of these two fins depressible into a scaly sheath. Pectorals
nearly as long as head, reaching to vent. Ventrals short, not
reaching quite to vent. Caudal deeply forked.
Color, in alcohol, silvery, palest below, no lines or bars except
sometimes in young, but the scales are minutely punctate with
dark, thickest on dorsal region. A black spot at top of spinous
dorsal,
Head 3} in length; depth, 23.
line about 5—45-9.
D. IX-10;. A. IlI-7 or 8; Lat.
We append averages of the measurements of thirteen specimens,
viz. :—1 from Bermuda; 2 from Beaufort, N.C.; 2 from Charleston,
S. U.; 7 from Pensacola, Fla.; 1 from Aspinwall.
From a comparison of these specimens and of some seven
others which we have examined, we are convinced that the
synonymy of this species should stand as given above.
TABLE OF MEASUREMENTS,
Number of specimens measured............. Dee ee
6) : EI 5
Z @ Ee — i
Specimens from Bin || Sv S| Sie es
B50 | 334\, soe
a1s| es Cee ete |
318 | 2 | oven ae
fQ & ie) a 48
Greatest depth in length. ................... 2.77 .2.81/2.67 2.61/2.67/2.66
Head inlength... .,.. Stieda’s
work is principally upon the microscopic structure of the brains
of the Frog and Axolotl; Wilder, in his study of the Frog and
Menobranchus, has directed attention largely to parts of the brain
which have been less studied hitherto, namely to the cavities and
the thinner portions of the brain parietes surrounding them, as
well as to the brain membranes. I am indebted to the writings
of both of these authors for light upon this subject, although I
have not as yet so fully consulted either as I would like to do.
In the general description the usual terminology of different
portions of the brain is employed, but in referring to the various
segments of the brain tube and to the ventricles they enclose I
largely employ the terms partly adopted and partly introduced by
Wilder. His system of nomenclature, which is chiefly founded
upon the embryonic divisions of the brain, is admirably clear and
1T employ this title as it is the family name (Amphiumide), and is more
generally known, although Murenopsis, the three-toed genus, is the one
which I studied.
? Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, Washington, 1853.
7 Amphibiorum Nudorum Neuroglia; also, Anat. Abhandlungen tber
die Perennibranchiaten und Derotremen.
* Zeitschrift fiir wiss. Zoologie, Band xx, xxv.
5 Anatomical Technology, Wilder and Gage, 1883.
178 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
consistent, although objections may be raised to the author’s
means of indicating position and direction.!
My method of study was: (1) A careful examination of the
external features of the brain. (2) A series of very thin transverse
and longitudinal sections of the brain, the sections after staining
being carefully mounted in serial order. These series naturally
supplement each other and give a very accurate idea of the gross
aud minute structure.
The technical process of preparing the brains was as follows :
They were hardened, after removal from the skull, in a saturated
solution of bichromate of potash, the acid being subsequently
removed with alcohol of different densities. The brains were then
embedded in an egg-mass prepared by shaking the white and yolk
of egg together, with three drops of glycerine to each egg. This
mass was first stiffened around the brain by placing in a ass of
alcohol, then hardened in absolute alcohol until ready for cutting.
Its advantages are that it closely embraces the brain, holding all
the parts together and becoming transparent in oil of cloves.
The section cutting was done with one of the large instruments
manufactured by Jung, of Heidelberg, which is far superior to
any other instrument of its kind now in use.
External Structure. The brain of Amphiuma (Plate VIII, figs.
A and B) resembles that of Menopoma (figs. C and D) more
closely than that of any of the remaining Urodela. Its most
striking feature is that the component parts are, in the main, little
differentiated from each other, giving the exterior very much the
simple character of an embryonic brain. This is especially true
of the Di-, Mes- and Epencephala. The vertical longitudinal
section (fig. H) shows that the construction of the interior is
equally simple. The brain flexure is apparently slight. The
brain is also extremely small in proportion to the body, and has
a narrow, elongated form; a remarkable feature is the diminutive
! The following are some of the terms employed and their synonyms:
Rhinencephalon, olfactory lobes; Prosencephalon, including the cerebral
hemispheres and their cavities (ee: Diencephalon, including the
thalami optici, the infundibulum, the pineal gland, etc., and the dia-
celia or third ventricle; Mesencephalon, including the optic lobes, the
crura cerebri and eantetel or iter; the valvula, or valve of Vieussens ;
Epncephalon or cerebellum ; Metencephalon, medulla oblongata, and roof
of fourth ventricle.
1883. ]} NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 179
size of the cerebellum. This general simplicity corresponds to
the partial blindness and to the degenerate structure and habits
of Amphituma.
The Metencephalon is very broad and shallow, with its upper
surface divided longitudinally by a central and two slight lateral
furrows, and with its borders turning bluntly inwards anteriorly,
apparently to enter the cerebellum. On its lower surface the
medulla is divided by the central furrow, a continuation of the
anterior fissure of the spinal cord. As in other Amphibia, the
medulla passes without clear demarkation into the crura cerebri.
The Epencephalon. The cerebellum is a narrow, band-like
structure, arching across the wide medulla. It is unusually small,
and was actually overhung by the optic lobe in my specimens,
so as not to be seen in the median line, although this point may
require confirmation. The valvulais therefore out of sight, in the
dorsal aspect of the brain, but may be seen in the longitudinal
sections.
The Mesencephalon. The optic lobe has no longitudinal
furrow, but forms a single, narrow, unpaired body, passing
forward into the roof of the Diencephalon without demarkation.
These divisions of the brain cannot be distinguished upon the
dorsal surface, but can be seen in side view by noting the position
of the infundibulum below. The Crura (pars peduncularis) form
a broad base for the posterior half of the Mesencephalon, which,
by an oversight, is not represented in the drawings. As they
pass forward, however, they cannot be distinguished from the
optie lobe nor from each other, so that this division of the brain
forms a cylindrical tube, the component parts of which can only
be detected in the microscopic structure.
The Diencephalon. The roof of this portion of the brain ter-
minates anteriorly in the large pineal gland ; its median surface is
marked, in Menopoma, by two circular thickenings which were
not noticed in Amphiuma. These may correspond to several
structures in the brain roof, which are apparent in the sections.
The sides of the Diencephalon form the thalami, but the promi-
nent feature of this portion of the brain is the production of the
floor into the long, backward-direc‘ed infundibulum, which is best
seen in side view. At the base of this process is the large pitui-
tary body. At the sides of the infundibulum are two thickenings
which converge to enter the thalami; their relations are clearly
180 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
shown in the sections. In front of the infundibular region the
Diencephalon.as a whole becomes higher and narrower. There is
quite a space between the infundibulum and optic chiasma; the
latter has no clear decussation of fibres as in the frog ; on the other
hand, the nerves are given off as two slender fibres on either side
of a slightly raised whitish plate.
The Prosencephalon. The cerebral hemispheres are very long,
flattened-oval bodies, narrowing forwards; they are in. close
contact, but there is no structural union, except. for a short
distance in front of the lamina terminalis. The Rhinencephala
arise from the outer anterior third of the hemispheres and give off
on the lower surface of the brain, the large olfactory nerves.
INTERNAL AND MIcROSCOPIC STRUCTURE.
The internal structure of the brain, so far as studied, has many
interesting features, which may here be considered in connection
with the various divisions of the brain tube, concluding with
some observations upon the general distribution of the gray and
white matter. It must here be said that the minute histology has
not been so carefully studied as to afford conclusive data.
Fig. H represents a longitudinal vertical section of the brain
of Amphiuma, magnified four diameters, the shaded portions
showing the gray or cellular matter. The vertical lines indicate,
approximately, the position of twelve of the thirteen transverse
sections which are figured. Fig. 9 passes through the anterior
commissure and the forward portion of the diaccelia, not quite
agreeing with any vertical line that could be drawn through fig. H.
Much enlarged longitudinal and transverse views of the cere-
bellum are given in E and F. Fig. G gives an imperfect idea
of some of the cells found in the crura.
The Epencephalon is the only division of the brain which has
a complete investment of gray matter; this statement needs the
reservation that the cells surrounding the cerebellum may be of
epithelial origin, although this doubt is apparently disproved by
the close similarity and continuity of their structure with those of
the optic lobe. If this be admitted, the cerebellum is composed
of three parts: (1) A continuous band of fibres arching from
side to side of the medulla. (2) A fine layer of fibres which
have an antero-posterior direction. (3) An investing layer of
cells one or two rows deep. These parts are represented in
fig. E, 6, a and ¢c; also in fig. F, 6 and c.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 181
(1) The transverse band of fibres (fig. 1) form the greater
part of the cerebellum; they appear to arise from columns of
fibres in the lateral portions of the medulla, so that they
correspond partially to the inferior peduncles of the mammalian
cerebellum arising from the restiform bodies. (2) The fine layer
of fibres have a direction at right-angles to these, and are three
or four deep, seeming to terminate in the lateral portions of the
cerebellum, in some cells lying between the cerebellum and the
optic lobe. This layer, owing to the peculiar position of the
cerebellum beneath the optic lobe, is dorsal to the main transverse
band; if the cerebellum were turned backwards, this layer would
be ventral to it. (3) The cells composing the cortex of the
cerebellum are of an elongated-oval shape, usually one row, in
some places two rows deep. Their greatest diameter is arranged
parallel to the main band of transverse fibres. Here, as in other
portions of the brain, it was difficult to ascertain whether or no
these cells were continued into fibre processes. No such processes
were discovered.
The above account differs widely from that given by Stieda! of
the frog’s cerebellum; although the latter is somewhat difficult to
understand owing to the lack of figures.
The Mesencephalon. Posteriorly, the mesocelia is broad and
low, and the brain tube has a subpyramidal section; anteriorly,
it becomes more circular and is surrounded by a shield-shaped
mass of cells (figs. 2 and 3), surrounded in turn by the mass of
longitudinal fibres, the whole constituting the optic lobe and
erura. According to Stieda,? the brain of axolotl has a similar
structure in this region.
The Diencephalon is the most interesting division of the brain;
its deep but narrow cavity (diaccelia) is filled with the large
choroid plexus; it has a very thin roof and floor, but broad lower
sides. The infundibulum is formed by the thrusting downward
of the posterior portion of the floor. Its walls are much conyo-
luted; they are composed chiefly of white matter, with here and
there a scattering of nerve-cells, which in some places form a
continuous layer. The base of the infundibulum is closely
reflected over the pituitary body as a thin lamina. The pituitary
_body has therefore no communication with the brain cavity, as has
' Zeitschrift fiir wiss. Zcologie, Band xx.-
? Same Journal, Band xxy.
182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
been observed in some animals. It is composed of a solid
mass of granular cells, traversed by numerous blood-vessels, and
resembles in structure, although more compact, one of the ordi-
nary lymphatic glands.
The lumen of the infundibulum becomes narrower before it
communicates with the diaceelia, and the lateral walls become
thickened into two solid oval masses, largely composed of nerve-
cells. These bodies resemble the lobi in/eriores of the Teleosts,
and, according to Stieda,! correspond in position with the tuber
cinereum of the mammalia; anteriorly they gradually converge
(figs. 4 and 5), finally entering the thalami. At this point the
diacelia has a cruciform shape, the lateral cavities separating the
tuber cinereum from the walls of the Diencephalon above. In
front of this is the thickening of the optic chiasma, and around
the upper portion of the ventricle is a row of compact cells which
resemble columnar epithelium. Anteriorly the latter flatten out,
covering a lateral expansion of the ventricle. Above this is a
small hollow sphere formed of a single layer of cells (fig. 7, x);
the meaning of this structure is not known, and no mention of it
has been found by the writer elsewhere. It corresponds in
position with the external markings noticed upon the dorsal
surface of the Menopoma brain at this point (see fig. C, Dz. ¢.).
Immediately below this point is a transverse band of nerve-fibres
which probably belong to the optic chiasma.
The roof of the Diencephalon is of irregular thickness; forward
it is carried as a very thin lamina over the pineal gland. The
structure of this body is nothing more than a rich plexus of blood-
vessels produced from the choroid ; in the apex are numerous fine
nuclei, resembling those of connective tissue, certainly not of
nerye-tissue. There is no evidence that the latter is present.
It will thus be seen that the pineal body is a simple vascular
structure, properly speaking, in communication with the brain
cavity, since it is apparently surrounded by the brain parietes.
The pituitary body, on the other hand, is a compact glandular
structure, not in apparent communication with the brain cavity,
except by an improbable process of osmosis through the attached
cells.
1Stud. iiber d. centrale Nervensystem d. Knochenfischer. Zeits. fiir
wiss. Zoologie, Band xviii.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 183
The sections are imperfect in the forward portion of the root
of the Diencephalon (diatela); they do not show the postcommis-
sura, described by Stieda and Wilder. The precommissura' has
its usual shape and position.
The relations of the Diencephalon to the Prosencephalon are
shown in figs. 7,8 and 9. The procelis extend back into the
posterior sections of the hemispheres. Anterior to this the hemi-
spheres fuse with the thalami below, receiving from the upper
portion of the Diencephalon a conspicuous band of fibres (fig. 8, a).
The relations of the dia- to the proccelie are best obtained by
means of horizontal longitudinal sections; these have not been
made as yet, so that the nature of these cavities is somewhat
doubtful. It appears that the proceliz communicate with each
other some distance anterior to the lamina terminalis.
The hemispheres have a great lateral extent, containing exten-
sive cavities. Their posterior halves are partly fused together ;
anteriorly; however, they are quite separate and distinct, becoming
more cylindrical in section in the region of the Rhinencephalon.
A peculiar feature of each procelia is the formation of a short
superior median cornu (fig. 11, a); corresponding to this is an
extension of the gray matter lining the ceelia to the cortex of the
hemisphere. Forwards the celiz have a vertical and more in-
ternal position. The Rhinencephala arise in masses of gray cells
in the anterior third of the lateral portions of the hemispheres;
they do not contain any cavity, but are continued forward into the
solid olfactory nerve.
The structure and distribution of the nerve-fibres and cells
have not been closely studied ; the following are some preliminary
notes :
The cavities of the brain are throughout lined with masses of
nerve-cells of varying thickness. Nerve-cells are also found
scattered among the fibres, but these are somewhat rare. The
gray substance lining the hemispheres corresponds to the central
gray, the Hohlengrau of Meynert. Ata few points it is found
upon the brain cortex; these are: (1) the lateral bodies of the
infundibulum (fig. 3); (2) the upper surface of the central portion
of the hemispheres (fig. 11); (3) and the inner sides and front of
the foremost portion of the same (fig. 12); (4) the cerebellum.
! Anterior and posterior commissures,
184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1883.
None of these cortical exposures of the central gray can be
considered to correspond to the cortieal gray (Rindengrau) of
the mammalian brain. The gray substance is, therefore, chiefly
central.
The scattered nerve-cells above referred to are principally found
in the substance of the hemispheres above the cavities, internal
to fig. 1l, a. Here they are numerous.
The nerve-cells are chiefly small, oval and nucleated bodies,
very compactly placed; among these at some points, as in the
crura, much larger cells enveloped in loose capsules were discov-
ered. No processes were found leading out of these cells, in fact
no unmistakably branched cells were found at any point; this
may have been the fault of the preparation methods, for Stieda
has found that the branched nerve-cells are very numerous in the
frog, while Wyman, employing simpler histological methods, failed
to find them.
This is as far as the sections have been studied, although they
offer very tempting opportunities for making out the nerve-tracts.
The following is a resumé of the results thus far obtained :
In external characters, Amphiuma differs widely from the frog
type in the simpler differentiation of its parts, the mid-region of
the brain being a rounded tube with no separation of its optic
lobes and thalami indicated above. The cavities of the brain are
equally simple, the meta-, meso- and diaceelie forming a uniform
cavity, forking into the procceliz in front. The infundibulum has
the large size which is so characteristic of it in the fishes, and its
lateral bodies recall the lobt inferiores in the Teleosts, although
passing forwards they form the tuber cinereum. The pineal and
pituitary bodies are constructed upon clearly different principles,
one being within, the other without the brain walls, the former a
vascular plexus, the latter a gland. In the roof of the Dien-
cephalon is a small spherical body whose meaning is not known,
but which may prove to be of some morphological significance.
The cerebellum has a cellular investment and consists of two sets
of fibres with a transverse and fore and aft direction. The gray
matter of the brain lines the cavities throughout, as the “ central
gray ;”’ continuations of it extend in some places to the:cortex,
but the “cortical gray,” if present at all, is very limited in
distribution.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 185
EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIII.
ILLUSTRATING THE BRAINS OF AMPHIUMA AND MENOPOMA.
Lettering and Abbreviations.
Rh.—Rhinencephalon ; Pr. and Pro. c.—Prosencephalon and Proceelia; Dz.,
Di. t. and Di. c.—Diencephalon, Diatela (roof of Diencephalon), and
Diacelia; Me. and Me. c.—Mesencephalon and Mesocelia; Hp. and
Ep. c.—Epencephalon and Epicelia ; Met.—Metencephalon.
Tc.—Tuber cinereum ; ch.—optic chiasma ; pt.—pituitary body ; pn. — pineal
gland ; iz.—infundibulum ; cho,—choroid plexus; er. —crura cerebri ;
p. cm.—precommissura (anterior commissure) ; th.—optic thalamus.
I.—Optic; Il.—Olfactory; IlI].—Oculo-Motor; V.—Trigeminis; VI.—
Abducens; VII.—Facial; VIII.—Auditory; IX, X, XI.—Vagus
Group. ‘N. B.—The identification of the nerves was by noting their
origin; the distribution of the nerves has not been worked out.
Special References in Figures.
Fieures A-D, twice natural size. Figs. H and 1-13, eight times natural
size.
Figure A. Dorsal view of the brain of Amphiuma.
Fieure B. Ventral view of the same.
Fieure C. Dorsal view of the brain of Menopoma.
Figure D. Lateral view of the same. Dit. corresponds to vertical line
(peteedele
Figure E. Enlarged view (about 30 diameters) of a longitudinal section
of the cerebellum and a portion of the optic lobe, taken at one side
of the median line. The valvula, 7, is broader in the median line;
d, white, e, gray portion of Mesencephalon ; a, fine longitudinal fibres ;
b, transverse band of fibres ; ¢, cortical layer of cells.
Fieure F. Transverse section of the cerebellum, lettering as in fig. E.
FiaurE G. a, large, b, small cells found in crura eerebri (30 diameters).
Figure H. Longitudinal section of the brain of Amphiuma, taken to the
left of the median line. Vertical lines, 1 to 13, correspond to trans-
verse sections represented by figs. 1 to 13. Black line represents the
pia mater; the roof of the metaccelia (fourth ventricle) is omitted in
the drawing.
Figure 1. Vertical transverse section through cerebellum, showing it as
ad a transverse band passing beneath Mesencephalon.
Figure 2. Ditto through pituitary body and infundibulum, showing
crura cerebri and optic lobe unpaired.
Figure 3. Showing sides of infundibulum thickening into tuber cinereum.
Figure 4. Through posterior portion of the Diencephalon.
Figure 5. Through the median portion of the Diencephalon.
Figure 6. Slightly anterior to fig. 5. y, a constriction of the upper por-
tion of the diaccelia.
138
186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
Fieure 7. Forward portion of Diencephalon. y corresponds to y in fig.
65 2, see # in fig. H.
Figure 8. Forward portion of Diencephalon. a, bands of fibres passing
downwards into the hemispheres.
Figure 9. Forward lower portion of Diencephalon (Di. c.), showing
precommissura and proceelia.
Figure 10, Through the hemispheres slightly anterior to the lamina
terminalis.
Figure 11. Median portion of hemispheres ; a, gray matter extending to
cortex.
Figure 12. Anterior third of hemispheres ; showing the beginning of the
Rhinencephalon.
Figure 13, Section near the tips of the hemispheres,
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 187
AUGUST ".
Mr. CHartes Morris in the chair.
Six persons present.
Avuaust 14.
Mr. CHarwues Morris in the chair.
Nine persons present.
Auvcust 21.
Mr. Cuartes Morais in the chair.
Six persons present.
AvGusT 28.
Mr. Tos. MrenAn, Vice-President, in the chair.
Fifteen persons present.
Some Evidences of Great Modern Geological Changes in
Alaska.—Mr. THomMas MEEHAN exhibited a piece of wood taken
from a prostrate tree, in what appeared to have beeu a sunken
forest in Alaska. It was in Hood’s Bay, as marked on some
charts, on a peninsula formed by the junction of Glacier Bay and
Lynn Channel, and facing Cross Sound, in lat. 58° 30’. The
arboreal vegetation generally prevailing in this section consists
of Abies Sitkensis (A. Menziesii of many botanists); Abies Mer-
tensiana, the western hemlock spruce; and Thuja gigantea,
called here “cedar” and “‘ white cedar.” Thujopsis borealis is
said to “abound” in these districts by some authors, but Mr.
Meehan remarked that though looking for it through many hun-
dred miles along the shores of the inland seas in southeastern
Alaska, he did not see one specimen. The trees in the forest are
of all ages, from young seedlings to aged decaying and dead ones.
But in sailing into Hood’s Bay he noted that the forests all had
a comparatively young look—few of the trees appearing over
fifty years old. The shores were high—at the point where he
landed not less than fifty feet above tide-water—and the soil was
sand, or of glacial production. Across from here to Lynn Channel
the distance might be about twelve miles, and, so far as could be
judged, the soil and trees across were of the same character; and
188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
it appeared the same up and down the peninsula for miles. Along
the shore he found numerous prostrate trees, and upright stumps
which had been ground off a few feet above the surface. The
stumps could be seen extending down below low-water mark, and
they extended up. to the bottom of the highland at high-water
mark, where the mud in which they had grown was covered by the
glacial deposit already referred to. The wood exhibited was part
of one of these prostrate trunks,and is evidently the same species
as that now existing on the land, Abies Sitkensis. It is quite
sound, and exhibits no evidence of great age since it became
covered with the drift. The shores are strewn with rocks and
stones of various classes, as usual in cases of glacial deposits.
On one of the prostrate trunks—the one from which the piece of
wood exhibited was taken—there lies a block of granite which,
by measurement, was found to contain 2214 cubic geet. This
trunk was partially bent in the middle by the weight of the huge
block of stone, showing that the block had fallen on it, while the
ground beneath the trunk was comparatively soft. Near this, but
so far as could be seen not on any trunk, was a much larger mass
of granite, comprising 3888 cubic feet. The whole of the circum-
stances pointed to the almost certainty that there had been a
sudden subsidence of the land,and that with the subsidence there
was a flow of water with icebergs on which were these huge rocks,
and which crushed the trees and tore off those which were strong
enough to resist; and that subsequently to the destruction of the
forest, the whole surface became covered to a great depth with
drift. Since that time there must have been an elevation of the
land, and the remains of the trees are again brought to their
original surface, but with a deep bed of earth above them. Mr.
Meehan believed that the botanical facts might afford a clue to
an approximation to the time when these events occurred. The
youth of the living forest indicated that, at the farthest, it could
not have been more than a few hundred years since the elevation
occurred. As already noted, the trees in the immediate vicinity
appeared to be but about fifty years since germination; but
unless the original parent trees which furnished the seed for the
uplifted land were near by, it might take some years for the seed
to scatter from bearing trees, grow to maturity, again seed, and
in this way travel to where we now find them. But as original
forests were evidently not so very far distant,two or three uundred
years ought to cover all the time required. The Rev. Mr. Corlies,
a missionary at Juneau, or Harrisburg as it is marked on some
charts, informed the speaker that an Indian chief had told him
that about seven or eight generations ago, as tradition told them,
there had been a sudden and terrible flood in tbat land, and only
a few Indians had escaped in a large canoe. The probable iden-
tity of the sunken trees with the present species, and the freshness
of the wood, would indicate no very great date backwards at
which the original subsidence occurred.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 189
In connection with the subject of the comparative recentness
of great geological changes as indicated by botanical evidence,
Mr. Meehan referred to an exposure of the remains of a large
forest near the Muir glacier, one of five huge ones which form the
head of Glacier Bay, between lat. 59° and 60°. This glacier is
at least two miles wide at the mouth, and has an average depth of
ice at this spot of perhaps five hundred feet. At the present time
there is not a vestige of arboreal vegetation to be seen anywhere,
except some willows on the hillsides, some miles from huge hills
of drift piled up everywhere around. The river which flows under
the glacier, and which has a volume equal to the Schuylkill at
Philadelphia, does not flow into the bay from under the ice at the
face, but rushes out in a mighty torrent on the northwest side, a
few miles above the mouth,and has cut its way through mountains
of drift, the gorge being many hundred feet in width, and the
sides from two hundred to five hundred feet high. The torrent
through the bed is now comparatively level, carrying with it an
immense quantity of heavy stones, some of which must have
comprised masses of six or eight cubic feet. Along the sides of
this gorge were the exposed trunks, all standing perfectly erect,
and cut off at about the same level. Some were but a few feet
high, and others as much as fifteen—the difference arising from
the slope of the ground on which the trees grew. These trunks
were of mature trees in the main, and were evidently of Abies
Sitkensis, with a few of either Thuja gigantea or Juniperus,
perhaps Occidentalis, the uncertainty arising from the imperfec-
tion of the bark—what there was of this indicating the former,
while an eccentricity of outline of the wood, not uncommon in
Juniperus, favoring the latter view. These trees must have been
filled in tightly by drift to the height of fifteen feet before being
cut off, or the trunks now standing would have been split down
on the side opposite to that which received the blow, and the
grinding off could not have been many years after, or the dead
trees would have lost their bark, as they always do when under
varying conditions of heat and moisture. The facts seemed to
him to indicate that the many feet of drift which had buried part
of the trees in the first instance was the work of a single season,
and that the subsequent total destruction of every vestige of these
great forests was the work of another one soon following. SE RE IC I TE OR |
aT i °
Fhite
T. Sinclair &Son, Inth
PH C1IOSA
=
ro)
IA
MANAYUNI
ro
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 205
most tubicolous annelides. The simple tubes range from two to
four lines in length by the one-fifth to the one-fourth of a line in
width.
Manayunkia is very sensitive, and on disturbance withdraws
deeply into its tube, so that half the length of the latter may be
removed before reaching the worm. The little creature clings
tightly to the inside of its habitation, apparently mainly by
means of the minute podal hooks of the posterior segments of
the body.
The mature worm (fig. 1) is from three to four millimetres in
length by about one-fourth of a millimetre in breadth, and is
divided into twelve segments, including the head. The color is
translucent olive-green, with the cephalic tentacles of a slightly
brownish hue. As the worm shortens, the segments become more
bulging laterally and the constrictions deeper; in elongation, the
segments become more cylindrical and the constrictions less
marked. When the worm is elongated, it is of nearly uniform
width for about three-fourths of the length, and then slightly
tapers to the end, or is a little widened again in the two segments
before the last. The head is about as broad as it is long, and is
surmounted by a pair of lateral lophophores supporting the ten-
tacles. Its border above projects dorsally into a short rounded
process. The succeeding four segments of the body are about
as broad as they are long, and nearly of uniform size; the next
one is somewhat longer than those in advance. The seventh
segment, in all the mature worms observed, greatly exceeded any
of the others. It was usually twice the length, and differed from
them in having an abrupt expansion at the fore-part, which sug-
gested the production of a head prior to division of the worm;
a process, however, if it occurs in Manayunkia, I had not the
opportunity of observing. The succeeding segments, smaller
than the anterior ones, differ little in size, except the last two.
The terminal segment abruptly tapers from above its middle in an
obtusely rounded extremity. When the worm protrudes from its
tube, the lophophores are reflected from the head, and they
~ exhibit a double row of tentacles extending forward. The num-
ber of tentacles varies with the age of the worm, but at maturity
there are usually eighteen for each lophophore. They are of
moderate length, and of uniform extent, and measure about half
a millimetre. Two of them internally, one for each lophophore,
206 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
are rather longer and larger than the others, and are rendered
conspicuous by a large vessel filled with bright green blood.
The tentacles are invested with ciliated epithelium, with actively
moving cilia, and in all respeets bear a close resemblance to those
of the polyzoa. In the allies of Manayunkia, they are regarded
as branchial appendages, and usually named cirri; and although
this is unquestionably correct, as in the case of the corresponding
organs of the polyzoa, they perform a varied function, and may,
with equal correctness, be called tentacles.
When Manayunkia is about to withdraw into its tube, the
lophophores approach, and together with the tentacles form a
close longitudinal fascicle. Along the lophophores, at the base of
the tentacles, there is a row of half a dozen or more brownish pig-
ment spots, resembling eyes, but not having the usual constitution
of such organs. The segments of the body of Manayunkia, suc-
ceeding the head, are furnished on each side with a fascicle of
locomotive setze, which is divided into two portions, one usually
consisting of shorter setz than the other. The fascicles, when
most protruded, project from a papilla, which disappears with the
partial retraction of the former. They are projected directly
outward or in a slanting manner either forward or backward, and
are moved in the same manner and by the same arrangement of
muscles as in other chetopods. The number of podal setz is
from four to ten in each fascicle. In several mature individuals
the numbers in the different segments were as follows: 8 to 10
sete in the first to the sixth segment; 6 to 7 in the three suc-
ceeding ones; 4 or 5 in the tenth, and 3 or 4 in the last segment.
The sete, figs. 3,4, of the anterior segments are longest, and
range from about 0°15 to 0:25 mm. in length. They consist of a
long, straight rod, with a linear-lanceolate blade tapering into a
long filament. The rod varies little in length in the different
sete; but the blade varies considerably in this respect. The
blade is more or less bent from the rod, and is longest in the
longer setz.
Except the head and the first setigerous segments, the others
are provided on each side with a fascicle of podal hooks, which
are situated ventrally behind the bottom of the podal sete. The
hooks are 4 or 5 in each fascicle in the setigerous segments from
the second to the eighth inclusive, and are very different from
those of the succeeding segments. The podal hooks, fig. 5, of the
1883. ] ¢NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 207
anterior segments, are about 0°05 to 0°06 mm. long, and consist of
a long curved handle, ending in a small recurved hook.
The podal hooks of the posterior three setigerous segments
form close transverse rows, fig. 6, of variable number, from 9 to
24 in each row. The hooks are minute, and measure from 0°025
0:03mm.long. They consist of a broad handle, ending in a lateral
comb-like extremity, as represented in figure 7.
The number of podal setz and podal hooks is more or less
variable in the corresponding segments of different individuals,
and frequently also on the two sides of the segments of the same
individual. The difference is due sometimes to the accidental
loss of some of the appendages; sometimes probably to circum-
stances interfering with their development. In several specimens
the following differences were observed :
SPECIMEN l.
First segment, 6 and 8 sete.
Second to fourth segment, inclusive, 8 to 10 sete and 4 to 5 hooks.
Fifth to eighth segment, inclusive, 6 to 8 setz and 4 to 5 hooks.
Ninth segment, 6 setz and 9 and 22 hooks.
Tenth segment, 4 setze and 12 and 18 hooks.
Eleventh segment, 3 and 4 setz and 12 hooks on each side.
SPECIMEN 2.
First segment, 8 setz on each side.
Second to sixth segment, inclusive, 8 sete and 4 hooks on each
side.
Seventh and eighth segments, 6 or 7 setz and 4 hooks, except on
one side of the eighth segment, in which another fascicle of 6
setz substituted the usual fascicle of hooks.
Ninth segment, 6 setz on each side and 9 and 20 hooks.
Tenth segment, 4 and 5 setz and 13 and 16 hooks.
Eleventh segment, 3 and 4 setz and 12 hooks on each side.
SPECIMEN 3.
First segment, 8 setz each side.
Seven succeeding segments, 6 to 10 sete and 3 to 4 hooks each
side.
Ninth segment, 7 setee and 24 hooks each side.
Tenth segment, 3 sete and 18 hooks, but on one side the latter
were all imperfect, mostly with the comb undeveloped.
Eleventh segment, 2 setze and 14 hooks each side.
208 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF ~, [ 1883.
In the last specimen the rows of 24 hooks in the ninth segment
measured 0°08 mm. wide; the rows of 18 hooks of the tenth seg-
ment 0-072 mm. wide; and the rows of 14 hooks of the last segment
0:06 mm. wide. The height of the rows corresponding with the
length of the hooks was 0:025 mm.
The intestinal canal of Manayunkia is of extreme simplicity,
consisting of a median tube alternately dilated within the segments
and contracted in the intervals of the latter, without any other
conspicuous division into more distinct portions. The widest
expansions are within the fourth to the seventh segment, inclusive,
but are also variable in these. Afterwards the intestine becomes
narrower to the anus, which opens ventrally in the last segment.
The mouth is funnel-like, capacious, and without armature of any
kind. Along the intermediate two-thirds of the canal the walls
are of ayellowish brown hue. Within the intestine in the seventh
segment, and within the terminal portion, active ciliary motion was
observed. The intestine, as usual in other annelides, is connected
by thin diaphragms to the wall of the body-cavity in the intervals
of the segments. The intervals are occupied with liquid with
multitudes of floating corpuscles.
The ovaries, with ova in different stages, occupy the fourth to
the sixth segment inclusive. Within the lower part of the head,
extending thence into the third segment on each side, there is a
large elliptical organ, which I have suspected to be the testicle,
though I did not examine its structure.
I was greatly puzzled in the attempt to ascertain the arrange-
ment of the vascular system of Manayunkia, and am in doubt as
to the following explanation I give of it. The blood is of a bright
green color, and in many positions serves clearly to define the
course of the larger vessels. As represented in figure 1, the
chief blood-vessels appear to be a large one on each side of the
intestinal canal, closely following the course of this so as to seem
to form a green coat toit. In each segment of the body the vessel
gives off a pair of lateral branches apparently uniting in a loop.
In the head the two main vessels leave the sides of the intestine,
and after forming a close flexure or a sinus at the base of each
lophophore, proceed onward through the interior of the larger pair
of tentacles. In viewing the worm in any direction, the two main
vessels so constantly appeared at the sides of the intestine, that
I at first took them for the walls of the latter itself. The condi-
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 209
tion I did not comprehend until I found an explanation in the
following paragraph in Claparecde’s Recherches sur la structure
des Annelides Sedentaires, Geneva, 1873, page 76: “ M. de Quatre-
fages has discovered that in certain Serpuliens,’”’ to which family
Fabricia and Manayunkia belong, “ the intestinal canal is enclosed
in a lacuna or rather a veritable sheath taking the place of a
dorsal vessel.” Claparede adds from his own observations the
statement ‘that a number of the sedentary annelides present the
same peculiarity of having the intestine included in a vascular
sheath playing the part of a dorsal vessel.” In this view the two
chief vessels, in figure 1, at the sides of the intestine, are to be
regarded as sections of the vascular sheath enclosing the latter.
The principal movement observed in the vessels of Manayunkia,
consisted in an incessant pumping of blood into those of the two
larger tentacles alternating with contraction and partial expulsion
of blood from the same.
The nervous system of Manayunkia I did not attempt to inves-
tigate. A well-developed eye occupied the head at the side of the
gullet. It exhibited a clear vitreous humor ina choroid cup. No
trace of eyes. was to be detected in the terminal segment of the
body, such as exist in Fabricia.
In several instances in which I have extracted Manayunkia
from its tube, a number of young ones, about half a dozen, have
been liberated, from which it appears that the eggs are laid within
the tube, there hatched, and the young then retained under the
care of the parent until sufficiently developed to be able to care
for themselves.
Figures 8-13, Pl. IX, represent an ovum and a series of young
in different stages of development, which were obtained together
with others in the same condition from three tubes.
The ovum, fig. 8, about 0°2 mm. long, obtained with several
similar ones from a tube, exhibits a central mass of large yolk-
cells enclosed by a layer of smaller ones. Fig. 9 represents an
embryo, which accompanied the former. It was motionless and
devoid of cilia. The yolk-cells appear to have been resolved
into a stomachal cavity. The embryo was about the same size
as the ovum. Fig. 10 represents a more advanced embryo, from
the same tube. It measured 0°265 mm. in length. The intestine
indicates a division into eight segments. Fig. 11 is a more
advanced stage of development of the worm from another tube.
210 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
It measured one-third of a millimetre in length. The body-wall
and intestine are quite distinct, the latter exhibiting eight seg-
ments. The tentacular lobes have commenced development. Fig.
12 represents an individual further developed, from the same tube
as the former. It measured half a millimetre long. The body is
distinctly divided into nine segments, of which eight bear a pair
of setze on each side. The tentacular lobes exhibit each the rudi-
ments of four tentacles. Eyes also have made their appearance.
Fig. 13 represents a young worm, from another tube, the only one
accompanying its parent. It measured 0°72 mm. long. The body
is divided into the same number of segments as in the former.
The tentacular lobes have developed each four tentacles with the
rudiment of a fifth. Podal hooks could be detected in none of the
segments except the last, in which there were three comb-hooks on
each side. Another young individual observed, from another
tube, about the same size of the preceding, had five tentacles on
each side, but was otherwise exactly similar. Another individual
three-fourths of a millimetre long, with five tentacles on each side,
had one more setigerous segment than in the others.
The species of Fabricia to which I referred in the beginning of
the present communication,and which I examined with particular
interest on account of the near relationship of Manayunkia to it,
is the same as that described by Prof. Verrill, as being common
from New Haven to Vineyard Sound and at Casco Bay (see Report
on the Sea Fisheries of New England, Washington, 18783, p. 619).
I first noticed the worm at Newport, Rhode Island, in 1858, and
found it abundantly at Bass Rocks, Gloucester, Mass., in 1882.
It occurred on rocks between tides, under a luxuriant growth of
Fucus vesiculosus, with its tubes projecting from among the mud
and sand firmly fixed together with multitudes of little mussels
about the roots of the sea-weed.
The worm is three or four millimetres long and of a yellowish
or yellowish brown hue, with more or less reddish. The body is
compressed cylindrical and slightly tapering behind, and is
divided into twelve segments, including the head, This is pro-
longed dorsally in a half elliptical process or upper lip. The
vertex supports on each side a trifurcate lophophore, each fork
of which is provided with a double row of narrow cylindrical
tentacles invested with cilia.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 211
The segments succeeding the head are furnished with lateral
fascicles of podal setie, and, except the first one, are provided
with fascicles of podal hooks, all of which have the same general
arrangement and form as thuse described in Manayunkia. The
fascicles of podal sete, from the first to the eighth segments, usu-
ally contain six or seven sete; those of the ninth and tenth
segments, three or four sete ; and those of the eleventh segment
two or three sete. The longer setz, figs. 14, 15, resemble those
of Manayunkia, consisting of a straight rod with a feather-like
vane ending in a long point and bent at an obtuse angle from the
rod. The stouter sete, fig. 16, have the same form, but differ
in the variably much shorter proportion of the vane. The setz
range from 0°12 to 0°25 mm. long.
The first setigerous segment possesses no podal hooks, as in the
case of Manayunkia. The fascicles in the succeeding segments
to the fourth contain each eight or nine hooks, and those following
to the eighth, inclusive, six or seven hoeks. The hooks of the
remaining three segments, as in Manayunkia, are very different
from those of the anterior segments, and are arranged in close
transverse semicircular rows of from 20 to 28 in each row.
The anterior podal hooks consist of a curved handle ending in
a short robust hook, like those of Manayunkia, but differing in
the hook being furcate, or even divided three or four times on
the dorsum, as represented in figs. 17,18. These podal hooks
usually measure about 0°08 mm. long.
The posterior podal hooks resemble the corresponding ones of
Manayunkia as represented in fig. 19. They measure from 0:035
to 0:04 mm. long.
The intestinal canal of Fabricia has the same simple character
as that described in Manayunkia. The mouth has a pair of palp-
like appendages, situated between the lophophores. The vascular
system appears to exhibit the same arrangement as in Manayunkia,
but the blood is of a red color.
Fabricia is remarkable for being furnished with a pair of eyes
to the terminal segment of the body as well as to the head. The
eyes are of simple character, but equally well developed at both
extremities of the body. They consist of a black pigment cup,
including a spheroidal vitreous body. In several instances I
observed a curious variation of the eyes in different individuals
and on the different sides of the same individual. Fig. 20 repre-
212 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
sents the usual form of the cephalic eye. Figs. 21 and 22 represent
the two eyes of the same individual, the right eye apparently
double. Fig. 23 represents another double eye, but with the lens
directed backward. Fig. 24 represents a caudal eye.
The tube of Fabricia is composed of exceedingly fine particles
of quartzose sand and indefinite particles of mud.
I observed no specimens of this genus, exhibiting the repro-
ductive organs in the condition usual in mature ones of Mana-
yunkia.
In several instances I observed a few free eggs and young worms
of 0:12 mm. in length within tubes in company with the parent,
but did not have the opportunity of investigating them.
Manayunkia mainly differs from Fabricia in having a pair of
simple or undivided tentacular lophophores instead of having
them trilobate; in the possession of an inner pair of larger ten-
tacles which receive a continuation of the main trunks of the
vascular system; and in having no eyes to the terminal segment
of the body.
EXPLANATION OF THE FIGURES OF PLATE IX.
Fie. 1. MANAYUNKIA SPECTOsA. Magnified about 50 diameters. The
worm in the ordinary condition of extension, with its tentacles
spread.
Fie. 2. A stock of five tubes. Magnified about 4 diameters.
Fig. 3. One of the longer podal sete from the second setigerous segment
ot the body. 666 diameters.
Fre. 4. One of the shorter podal sete, from the same. 666 diameters.
Fie. 5. A podal hook, from the same. 666 diameters. '
Fic. 6. A row of podal hooks, from the last segment of the body. 230
diameters.
Fig. 7. A podal hook from the same row. 666 diameters.
Fig. 8-13. Egg and different degrees of development of the young of
Manayunkia. 100 diameters.
Fia. 14-16. Podal sete of Fabricia Letdyit, Verrill. 500 diameters.
Fie. 17, 18. Podal hooks of anterior segments. 500 diameters.
Fig. 19. Podal houk of posterior segment. 666 diameters.
Fie. 20-24. Eyes of Fabricia. 250 diameters.
Fie. 20. A cephalic eye of the usual form.
Fig. 21, 22. Rizht and left cephalic eyes of the same individual.
Fig. 23. A double cephalic eye.
Fig. 24, A caudal eye.
1883. NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 213
NOTE ON A COLLECTION OF FOSSILS FROM THE HAMILTON (DEVONIAN)
GROUP OF PIKE CO., PA.
BY PROF. ANGELO HEILPRIN.
Among a small collection of invertebrate fossils obtained from
the Hamilton rocks of the vicinity of Dingman’s Ferry, Pike Co.,
by Drs. E. C. Hine and J. Holt of this city, and now in their
possession, I have been able to identify the following species
and genera. Most of these are probably not new to the State,
but inasmuch as the paleontology of Pennsylvania has been but
very imperfectly (indeed, one might say, not at all) worked up,
and the fossils there occurring, although known in some part to
amateur collectors, but very sparingly recorded, it has appeared
to the writer that the publication of the present list, as well as of
others of a similar character to follow, may not prove entirely use-
less, tending toward a more complete knowledge of the extinct
fauna of the State.
ACTINOZOA.
Heliophyllum Halli.
Mo.Luusca.
Fenestella, sp. indet. Aviculopecten duplicatus? or
Crania Hamiltonie. A. scabridus ?
Spirifer mucronatus. Limoptera macroptera.
Spirifer granuliferus. Paracyclas lirata.
Spirifer medialis? Grammysia bisulcata.
Streptorhynchus Chemungensis. Orthoceras (impression).
Orthis, sp. indet. Nautilus or Goniatites (septal
Chonetes, sp. setigera ? lines too imperfectly preserved
for generic determination).
CRUSTACEA.
Phacops bufo,a complete specimen and several tail-pieces.
Homalonotus Dekayt, several well-preserved fragments unques-
tionably belonging to this species.
Crinoid stems or impressions belonging to several distinct
Species are common in the rock-masses. It may be noted that
Prof. I. C. White, during his survey of Pike and Monroe counties,
was unable to discover any traces of trilobites in the rocks of this
series. ‘“ Nota single specimen of a Trilobite was observed in all
this thickness of rock at the many localities where it is exposed
for observation within the district’ (Second Geological Survey of
Pennsylvania, Report of Progress, G 6, p. 112, 1881).
7
214 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
ON THE ANATOMY OF ANCYLUS FLUVIATILIS 0. F. Miiller AND
ANCYLUS LACUSTRIS Geoffroy.
BY BENJAMIN SHARP, M. D., PH. D.
This paper first was written in German, and served as an
inaugural dissertation for the Philosophical faculty at the Uni-
versity of Wurzburg, in Bavaria. In rewriting it I have merely
omitted a few unimportant details, and made one or two slight
changes.
INTRODUCTION.
The position of these little animals in the system of classifica-
tion was long a subject of dispute. At first they were placed by
Linneus! in the genus Patella, but in the same year (1767)
Geoffroy? formed an especial genus for them, which he called
Ancylus, on account of the resemblance of the shell to a Phygean
cap (A'yxvéos),
The specimens of fluviatilis, which I had for examination, were
obtained in the Main near Wurzburg, and in a branch of the same
near Gemtinden—the only place in which the other species could
be had was in a small pond near Aschaffenburg.
The work was carried on in the laboratory of Prof. C. Semper,
at Wurzburg, and I here take the opportunity of expressing my
sincere thanks to him for his kindly advice and assistance.
Ferussac placed this genus, in 1837, among the Pulmonata, to
which order it undoubtedly belongs.
Moquin-Tandon®* believed that Ancylus was amphibian in its
habits. I do not believe that the animal under natural and healthy
conditions ever approaches the surface of the water. He says:
“ Does the animal breathe free air or that air dissolved in water ?”
Ferussac ‘ said positively that the animal was compelled to come
to the surfate to breathe. L. Agassiz,® Depuy, and others, were
of the same opinion. To prove this, Moquin-Tandon® made the
following experiments :—
1 Linnezus, Syst. Nat., 1767.
2 Geoffroy, Trait. somm. d. Coquil fluv. et terres., etc., Paris, 1767.
3 Moquin-Tandon, Recher. anatomico-physiol. sur |’ Ancyle fluviatile
(Ancylus fluviatilis), Journal de Conchyliologie, Tome iii, 1852, p. 124.
4 Ferussac, Dict. class. d. Hist. Nat., Tome i, 1822.
5 L. Agassiz, Act. Helvit., 1841.
® Recher. anat. physiol. s. l’ Ancyle, ete., pp. 124-126.
_ PROC. ALN. S, PHILA: 1883, PLak
Ss)
<4
IS HOO Ss,
ae See *))
ee es a he ed
6.8568 S & .
- CW pi OE OP eg
e\
e
©
e
44
3;
e
«
©
e
3
z
as
2
2
3
SHARP ON ANCYLUS.
pa agern Ug is
; : - j AS an a\s a ? nk: |
a
A. 7 f 8, s
(a) Si 7 eee ett A fo m4
oh avai | estonr, SE «
5 fy + 2 i reat iis ‘Shes
a © qi # i ee Azula we teat
( onlay ghoney, pene
A} is “A at ; was
j. SFE ee :
—t ; i, at wi
ye ae
I vi ;
& > '
4 7
> ul
: ; oe
uf -: 5
a.
/ ss
¢&
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 215
Many animals were placed in a vessel of water, and the following
facts were observed :
1. That not all the animals found the need of coming to the
surface to breathe, and that many stayed at the bottom of the
vessel.
2. That the need of air did not seem very strong, as they came
slowly to the surface.
3. That certain individuals remained in the upper portion of
the fluid.
4. That many went only partially out of the water.
5. That others left the water entirely, but remained in the
neighborhood of it.
These and other facts show that they breathe air and are not
water animals. Further on he says :—
1. Seven animals were placed in tall champagne-glasses, which
were filled with water; in the middle of the glass was placed a
partition, so that the animals could not come to the surface; the
water, however, could freely circulate. The animals lived three
days, at which time they were taken out.
2. Three individuals were placed in 45 cu. mm. of well-water,
and these lived only eight hours.
3. Six Ancyli were placed: for three days in 25, 30 and 50
cu. mm. of river-water; all remained living and some deposited
eggs.
This last experiment seems to prove that they are not amphib-
ious.
I made essentially the same experiments with the same results,
and further found that when the Ancy.2 were placed in aquaria,
in which there was running water, they never came to the surface ;
if, however, the water was not fresh, they would invariably come
to the surface of the water. I think, therefore, that the apparent
amphibian habits are due to the fact that the water was not suffi-
ciently aérated. Probably the cause of such rapid death in the
case of the animals that were placed in the well-water, was the
presence in it of such a small percentage of air.
I will first take up the anatomy of beth species in general, and
describe the differences between them, and then consider the
special part, which consists in :—
1. Formation of the radula.
2. Observations on the nervous system.
3. The anatomy of the excretory organ.
216 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
GENERAL ANATOMY.
In the following description I will first consider the anatomy of
A, fluviatilis as a basis, for the anatomy of this is tolerably well
known from the papers of Carl Vogt! and Moquin-Tandon.? The
first paper is short and incomplete, containing at the same time
many mistakes, while the latter, unfortunately, is without plates.
On A. lacustris no paper has as yet appeared, as far as I know.
The shell of A. fluviatilis is much larger than that of A. lacus-
tris. In both species the form is that of a depressed cone and of
a dirty brown color. In A. fluviatilis it is said 4 that the shell is
wound to the left. I have never as yet seen a shell of A. fluvia-
tilis which was in the least unsymmetrical, for the apex of all the
specimens that I have examined lay in the median line, only rolled
a little backwards.
In A. lacustris, however, the apex of the shell is wound slightly
to the right, and this character has been considered sufficient to
place this form in a separate genus, that of Acroloxus (Beck,
1837), or Vellitia (Gray, 1840), which, however, is not generally
accepted.
The opening of the shell (apertura) is oval in both species; in
A, lacustris, however, it is a Hee longer oval than in A. fluvia-
tilis.
The shell contains such a quantity of conchyolin, that if it be
thrown into an acid and left there until all the carbonate of lime
be dissolved away, the organic framework of conchyolin remains
perfect and the form unchanged.
If a piece of this be placed under the microscope a large number
of the siliceous cases of diatomes are seen. This is easily
explained: the diatomes are found in large quantities on the
objects on which the Ancyli are found, and as they are so small,
they can easily pass between the mantle and the shell and then
become covered by a layer of mother-of-pearl or nacre which is
secreted by the external surface of the mantle and by which the
shell grows in thickness. This process of imbedding diatomes in
nature is similar to that effected artificially by the Chinese, when
they place their little leaden images between the mantle and the
' Bemerkungen tiber den Bau der Ancylus fluviutilis. Archiv fir Anat.
und Physiol. (Miller), 1841.
2 Recher. anat. physiol. s. l’ Ancyle, ete.
5 C, Claus, Grundziige d. Zoologie, Marburg, 1880-82, and others.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 217
shells of bivalves, and allow them to become coated with mother-
of-pearl.?
The mantle.—If the shell be carefully removed from the animal,
the form of the body is found to be like that of the shell, namely,
a depressed cone, and covered with a thin white membrane, the
mantle. The base of the mantle, or that part which comes in
contact with the aperture of the shell, is thickened and separated
from the body, so that a deep groove is found running around the
foot bounded externally by the internal surface of the mantle.
The deepest point of this groove is at that point where the mantle
and foot join. From this point, or the base of the groove
(looking at the animal from below), hangs the gill, between the
foot and the mantle, on the left side in A. fluviatilis, and on the
right in A. lacustris. The inferior portion of the external surface
of the mantle has a deposit of black pigment; this band of black
pigment is not present in A. lacustris.
Organ of locomotion.—The only organ of locomotion is the
foot, which is an oval muscular disk. The shape is like that of the
aperture of the shell to which it belongs. The foot is formed of
muscular fibres which run in four different directions, and between
which the lacunze or blood-spaces are found. One system of mus-
cular fibres passes from before backward (longitudinal fibres);
another, perpendicular to these, passes from side to side (transverse
fibres). The other two systems are continuations of the muscle
that binds the body to the shell. These latter fibres pass perpen-
dicularly from the shell, and entering the foot, spread out fan-like
into it, so that some of the fibres are almost horizontal and
others almost perpendicular to the sole of the foot ; these may be
called lateral fibres. The animal holds itself to objects on which
it creeps, by the foot, which‘acts like a sucker. If the animal be
disturbed it draws the shell tightly downwards so that the soft parts
are completely covered by the shell and thus protected. The
movement of Ancylus is very slow. It never swims, as does, for
example, Limnzus, on the surface of the water, as Gray and
! An interesting account of this process may be found in F, Hague,
Ueber d. natiirliche u. kiimstliche Bilduvg der Perlen; and C. Th. von
Siebold, Ueber d. Perlenbildung chinesischer Siisswasser-Muscheln, als
Zusatz z. d. vorhergehenden Aufsatz. Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., Bd. viii,
1857.
15
218 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
Turton! observed. Moquin-Tandon? states that he had never
observed the animal creeping or swimming on the surface of the
water.
The shell of the animal is fastened to the body by a muscle,
which, as already said, passes perpendicularly from the shell and
enters the foot obliquely, and with which it coalesces, forming with
the foot the sides and floor of the visceral cavity respectively.
In the figure (PI. X, fig. 1) we have a cross-section of the animal
about the middle, drawn with a camera lucida, and to which I
have added the lines s, which represent a cross-section of the shell.
The letters mc represent the musculus cochlearis, which enters
the sides of the foot; g m are the transverse fibres. The longi-
tudinal fibres are not represented, as they are transversely cut
and only appear as points.
In the musculus cochlearis of the left side in A. fluviatilis and
on the right of A. lacustris a cavity is found in which the heart
is situated. The walls of this cavity form the pericardium.
The gill.—In the space between the foot and the mantle in A.
Jluviatilis on the left side is found a broad, leaf-like fold of the
integument, the gill. This fold or gill reaches down as far as the
lower border of the mantle. In the figure (Pl. X, fig. 1) the gill
(4) is represented on the right side of the section, although really
on the left side of the animal, and we must imagine that we are
looking at tle animal from the front. The gill is one-third as
long as the whole animal and lies in the middle third of the
body. In the living animal it is of a lighter color than the sur-
rounding tissues and the surface of it is smooth. Although the
gill of A. lacustris is on the right side of the animal, its relative
position is the same as in A. fluviatilis. The space between the
foot and the mantle, into which the gill hangs, may be called the
branchial chamber.
I believe that the organ which Moquin-Tandon* speaks of as
the lobe auriforme is what I prefer to call the gill. It is physio-
logically one, as we will presently see.
The whole surface of the gill is covered with ciliated epithelium,
and the internal part is formed of cutis, consisting of loose
connective-tissue fibres which run in all directions and between
' Manual of Shells, ed. ii, 1840.
? Recher. anat. physiol. s. Ancyle, etc., p. 35.
* Recher. anat. physiol. s. l’Ancyle, ete., p. 12.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 219
which the blood-spaces (lacunz) are found. those on the upper
surface, which are directed backwards, while those on the under
surface are directed forwards. In fig. 2 (Pl. X), I have given a
diagramatical longitudinal section of the buccal mass and the
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 227
odontophore, in order to show the direction of the teeth on the
radula (7). The arrow (c) in tle same diagram shows the direction
in which the radula moves when the animal is rasping the food.
As regards the disappearance of the worn-out and useless teeth,
Semper says: ‘ There are only two ways possible, since the view
that each tooth continually grows is not to be considered at all.
Once we thought, as did Troschel, Claparéde and others, that the
radula gradually moved forward, and that the forward teeth that
were worn out were thus gradually replaced; or there must be a
periodical shedding of the radula. This latter view seems to me
the most natural.”!
Above it was shown that the epithelium of the radula had no
connection whatever with the formation of the radula. On the
other hand it was observed that the radula as well as the teeth, a,
b, c, d, etc. (PI. X, fig. 5), with the exception of the caps, grew
from behind, that is, from the cells of the matrix 1-5 (Pl. X,
fig. 5).
From this we see that the radula grows at the posterior end of
the odontophore and must gradually be shoved forward, and that
the teeth that are used up at the mouth are gradually being replaced
from behind. The view of a renewal of the radula by a periodical
shedding, as Semper thought most probable, is consequently
excluded. In many sagittal sections it is easy to see the anterior
part of the radula breaking away at the point, # (PI. X, fig. 2).
At this point separate teeth and parts of the radula could be seen,
and they would have been cast out at the mouth.
Trinchese? gives in his paper on Spurilla Neupolitana a short
notice on the development of the radula in this species. He
_ speaks of from five to seven cells which go to form the teeth, and
also the cells forming the layer which I have called the epithe-
1 «Hier sind nur zwei Falle méglich, da die Annahme, dass jeder Zahn
fortwihrend wachse, nicht weiter zu beriicksichtigen ist. Einmal kénnte
man nun annehmen, dass, wie es auch Troscl.el, Claparede u. A. thun,
die Reibmembran allmahlig vorriicke und dadurch sowohl die vordern
untauglichen Zahne ersetzt wiirden, als auch eine Grossenzunahme der
Zahne erméglicht sei, oder man miisste eine von Zeit zu Zeit stattfindende
Hautung annehmen ; die letzten Annahme scheint mir die natiirlichste.”’
Zum fein. Bau d, Molluskenzunge, p. 277.
2 Anat. e fisiol. della Spurilla Neapolitana. Estrat. d. Serie III, Tomo
IX, d. Mem. dell’ Acad. delle Scienze dell’ Instituto di Bologna, 2 Febbriao
1878.
228 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
lium of the radula. These cells do not form the basal membrane
directly. It is formed from the many-layered epithelium of the
radula. It is not formed, as one would suppose, by a cuticular
secretion of the cells, but at the cost of the cells themselves. The
upper layers of the epithelium of the radula coalesce, and thus
form the basal membrane. In this manner the epithelium gradu-
ally decreases in thickness as it passes forward. Trinchese says,
regarding the formation of the radula, that: ‘The superior part
of the body of each shell is divided into many small rods, which
are very small at first and which gradually lengthen as they pro-
ceed downwards. These small rods are the denticles. The inferior -
part of the cell, which takes no part in the formation of the tooth,
forms with the similar part of the neighboring cell, the tooth-mass
or the true body of the tooth. Finally the boundary between the
different cells disappears. The nuclei of the tooth-forming cells
which remain under the tooth undergo division and give origin to
avery compact layer of nuclei, which become more and more
pointed as the tooth is shoved forward, are gradually formed
in the matrix. When the teeth are so far protruded from the
sheath (odontophore), the inferior part of the tooth forms, by
means of the layer of nuclei,a very resisting cuticle. This cuticle
thickens as the tooth advances, while the nuclei or cell-layer
gradually diminish in thickness.” !
The little rods that he speaks of are not to be found in Helis
aperta. As the form of the tongue and the radula is as different
in Helix, and further as the tongue-papilla, in the true sense of
' «Ta parte superiore del corpo di ogni cellula, si divide in tanti piccoli
bastoncelli, i quali, molto costi in principio, si allungano man mano manzan-
dosi verso il nucleo il quali viene spinto in basso: questi bastoncelli sono
identini. La porzione inferiore della cellula che non prende parti alla
formazione dei dentini, concorre colla porzione omologa delie cellule vicine
a formare il corpo del dente. In fine il limite delle diverse cellule scom-
parisce ed il dente @ cosi formato. I nuclei delle cellule odontogene
rimasti sotto il dente, si segmentano e danno origine ad uno stratodi nuclei
molto spesso, il quale si va assottigliando a secunda che ildeute viene spinto
in avanti dagli altri chi si formans via via nella matrice. Quando i denti
sono per uscire dalla guaina, in comincia a formarsi sotte di ossi, per
l’ atturta dello strato nucleare, una cuticola molto resistente, la quale li
fissa solidamente sul margine della rotella. Questa cuticola, a seconda che
il dente si spinge in avanti, divene sempre pil’ spessa, mentre lo strato
sottostante si assottiglia e si esaurice.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 229
the term, is wanting in Spurilla, it is hardly to be supposed that
the formation of the radula is exactly the same.
The cells of the matrix lie, in his figure (Tab. VIII, fig. 25),
behind one another, and only the most anterior one comes in
contact with the tooth and takes part in its formation. As is
easily seen, these relations are very different from the state of
affairs in Helix.
Rucker,! who does not seem to have known of the paper by
Trinchese, calls these teeth the ontoginous teeth. He shows five
cells to be present, but not arranged in Helix pomatia as I have
found to be the case with H. aperta. His cell a takes the place
of my 4 and J. Over his cell d is formed the future tooth. Then
“the part of the cell that lies on cell d, the future hook, is raised
from its bed, and the tooth passes through the are of a quadrant
in order to assume the normal position.” ?
How or by what means the tooth is raised he does not say. I
believe, however, that, as I have shown, the death of cell 4 (Pl.
X, fig. 5), after the tooth is formed, is a much more plausible
explanation.
IJ.—OBSERVATIONS ON THE NERVOUS SYSTEM.
The nervous system of Ancylus fluviatilis was first described
by C. Vogt, in 1841, while that of A. lacuxtris, as far as I know,
has never yet been especially described. It is, however, formed
on the same plan as that of the former species; the difference in
the two being merely one of position. Vogt described the cesoph-
ageal ring in the following manner: The cesophageal ring con-
sists of two superior, two lateral, and one inferior ganglia.* This
description is not correct. The part was better described by
Moguin-Tandon? in the year 1852.
Mogquin-Tandon‘ found that the cesophageal ring consisted of
seven ganglia: two superior, which he called the cerebral ganglia
1 Ueber die Bildung der Radula bei Helix pomatia. Besond. Abdruck
aus d. xxii. Bericht d. Oberh. Ges. f. Natur- und Heilkunde, 1883.
2 Datin ‘‘hebt sich der Zelle d aufliegende Theil der Zahner, der
zukiisftige Haken desselben von seiner Unterlage ab, der Zahn beginnt
eine vierteldielung, um allmahlig aus der tibergekippten in die nomaler
Stellung tiberzugehen.’’ Ueb. d. Bildung d. Radula, etc., p. 217.
3 «Der Schlundring besteht aus zwei obern, zwei seitlichen und einem
untern Knoten.’’ Bemerk. u. d. Bau d. Ancylus, ete., p. 29.
+ Recher. anat. physiol. s. l’Ancyle, etc., p. 129, ef seg.
230 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
(g. cérébrotdes), and five inferior (g. sous-esophagiens). Of these
latter, two lie laterally (g. supérieurs), and two lie below the
cesophagus (g. antero-inferieurs.) The fifth is an odd one, and is
placed between the lateral and the inferior ganglion of the left
side, and was called the supplementary ganglion (g. supplemen-
taire).
The lateral ganglia are now generally known as the pleural or
visceral ganglia, and the inferior the pedal ganglia. In A. lacus-
tris the supplementary ganglion lies between the visceral and
pedal ganglion of the right side. The reason of this difference of
position of the supplementary ganglion is probably that in A.
fluviatilis the genitals, which are in part supplied by this gan-
glion, lie on the left side; while in the other form, where the
genitalssare on the right side, the supplementary ganglion is also
on that side.
Further, Moquin-Tandon ! speaks of two small ganglia, which
are joined by connectives? with the cerebral ganglia, and which
he calls the buccal ganglia.
According to Moquin-Tandon, then, the nervous system of
Ancylus consists of nine ganglia. There exist, however, other
ganglia, which Moquin-Tandon did not find. Two of these lie in
the tissue of the left mantle of A. fluviatilis and in the right of
A, lacustris. The other two form a pair, and lie in the cephalic
portion, at the base of the tentacles, near the position of the eyes.
First we will consider the two ganglia that are situated in the
substance of the mantle. They lie in the upper part of the same
between one of the windings of the kidney and the musculus
cochlearis. These two ganglia are best seen in a horizontal section.
They are very small, so that it would be hardly possible to
demonstrate their existence by dissection. They are connected
by a bundle of nerve-fibres ; besides this, there comes a bundle of
nerve-fibres from the body to the posterior of these two ganglia.
Although I was unable to demonstrate the connection of this
.
1 Recher. anat. physiol. s. ’ Ancyle, ete., p. 129, e¢ seq.
2T use the expression ‘connective,’ employed by Lacaze-Duthiers (Du
Systeme Nerveux d. Mollus. gastrop. pulmon. aquat. etc. Archiv. d.
Zoologie Exp. et Gén., Tome i, 1872), for those bundles of nerve-fibres
which join ganglia of the same side, in opposition to the term ‘‘ commis-
sure,’ which is only employed to denote those nerve-fibres that join ganglia
of opposite sides.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 231
pesterior ganglion with the esophageal ring, I have no doubt of
the existence of such a connection.
We will first consider the anterior and largest of these two
ganglia. From the form, position and structure I conclude that
this is the so-called ganglion olfactorium. The existence of this
ganglion was first pointed out by Lacaze-Duthiers ! in the Pulmo-
nata, but he did not suspect it to be the organ of smell. He sup-
posed it to be the ganglion that provided for respiration, and at
the same time regulated the large quantity of mucus which is
secreted in the region of the respiratory orifice, the moment the
animal is irritated at this point. Spengel,* in his researches on
this organ in the Prosobranchia, believed it to be the seat of smell,
and gave it the name of the ganglion olfactorium.
In Ancylus this ganglion lies on that side of the mantle which
forms the external wall of the branchial chamber, and almost at
the highest point of the chamber, namely, where the gill and
mantle join.
The ganglion consists of cells with larger nuclei which are so
large that they almost fill out the whole cell. These nuclei take
a dark color when stained in picro-carmine, and are filled with a
large number of fine granules. No nucleolus was to be seen. The
whole ganglion is enveloped in a fine tunica, made up of connec-
tive tissue, which is continuous with the tunica that covers the
bundle of nerve-fibres connecting the two ganglia.
The form of this ganglion olfactorium is in general spherical. At
that point where it comes in contact with the internal surface of
the mantle we find an invagination (Pl. X, fig. 6 if.), so that
the whole ganglion has a cup-like ferm. This invagination I call
the infundibulum, because it has the form of a funnel. The
walls of the infundibulum are lined with cylindrical, cilated
epithelium, which seems to be identical to that which covers the
inner surface of the mantle, save that the cells and cilia of the
infundibulum seem to be a little longer than those of the mantle.
The cells stand perpendicular to the internal surface of the
infundibulum, and are separated from the cells of the ganglia by
an almost imperceptible tunica of very fine connective tissue. I
was unable to determine positively whether there was direct nervous
1 Du Syst. New d. Moll. gast., ete.
*, Die Geruchsorgane und das Nervensystem der Mollusken. Zeitschr.
f. wiss. Zoologie, Bd. xxxv, 1881.
232 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
connection between the cells of the infundibulum and the ganglion
cells, although one undoubtedly exists.
The nerve which connects these two ganglia consists of parallel
fibres which are connected with the poles of the ganglion cells. It
takes little or no color with picro-carmine, and is quite pale when
compared with the surrounding tissues.
The posterior and smaller of these two ganglia I am inclined to
believe is the supra-intestinal ganglion, which, according to
Spengel,' lies in connection with the ganglion olfactorium. It is
about one-half the size of this latter ganglion, and lies in the
same plane with it, so that a horizontal section through one takes
in the other. On one side it lies in contact with the anterior wall
of the pericardium ; on the other it touches the internal portion of
the same part of the kidney which touches the internal portion of
the ganglion olfactorium.
This ganglion receives a branch from the body, which is the one
probably connecting it with the esophageal ring. It sends also a
branch posteriorly.
The form and structure of this ganglion are similar to that of
the ganglion olfactorium, save that there is no funnel-like invagina-
tion. This ganglion has all the points that characterize the supra-
intestinal ganglion: first, a branch which connects it with the
pleural or visceral ganglion; secondly, a branch that connects it
with the abdominal ganglion, and thirdly, a connection with the
ganglion olfactorium.
The tentacular ganglia.—Besides the ganglia already described
as belonging to the central nervous system, together with the
ganglion olfactorium, there is a pair of ganglia which do not
belong to the central nervous system proper. and may be con-
sidered as belonging to the peripheral nervous system. These
ganglia have already been pointed out by P. B. Sarasin,? as
existing in the fresh-water Pulmonata. Sarasin agrees with
Lacaze-Duthiers,? that this pair of ganglia are homologous to
those found in the end of the tentacles of Helix. They are situ-
ated behind the position of the eye, and in close contact with the
1D. Geruchsorg. u. d. Nervensyst. d. Moll., ete.
* Drei Sinnesorgaue und die Fussdriise einiger Gastropoden. Arbeit
aus dem Zool. Zootom. Instit. zu Wiirzburg, Bd. vi, 1883.
* Die Syst. Nery. d. Moll. gast., etc.
1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 233
epidermis. When the eyes are retracted (for they can be retracted
in these animals) they lie close to this pair of ganglia.
In A. fluviatilis the eyes and ganglia are seen in the same trans-
verse sections (Pl. X, fig. 8). This isnot the case in A. lacustris,
as the ganglia lie a little posterior to the retracted eyes. Each
ganglion of this pair lies at the base of a tentacle, and each is ovoid
in shape, the longer axis being antero-posteriorly situated. They
are covered with a fine tunica of connective tissue. The nerve
that supplies them comes from the cerebral ganglia and enters this
ganglion on its inner surface. The nerve-cells which make up the
ganglia are in every respect similar to those already described for
other ganglia. ;
The tissue of the ganglia is pierced by a bundle of muscular
fibres (Pl. X, fig. 7 rm), which comes from the buccal mass,
pierces each ganglion and is inserted in that part ef the epidermis
which is covered by the ganglion. This muscle was not observed
by Sarasin.' When this muscle contracts, the epidermis, together
with the ganglion, is drawn inward.
The figures 7 and 8 (Pl. X) represent two transverse sections
through the ganglion of the left side of A. fluviatilis. In fig. 7
we see this most anterior of the two sections representing the
retractor muscle. Fig. 8 shows the relation of the ganglion to
the eye. In these two sections we see that the ganglion has a
deep groove on its external surface, so that in fig. 7 we have a
figure somewhat resembling that of the ganglion olfactorium (PI.
X, fig. 6 Go).
This groove, f (Pl. X, fig. 7), is caused by the contraction of
the retractor muscle. This groove was always present in sections.
In the figure 7, the nerve (7) which comes from the cerebral
ganglion is seen entering the ganglion in question. At that point
where the ganglion comes in contact with the cells of the epider-
mis (p), they seem to be somewhat longer than those surrounding
this part. When the surface of this part is viewed from the exterior
a pale patch is seen, which is made up of these lengthened epi-
dermal cells. The external surface of these cells is covered with
cilia which are a trifle longer than those found on the adjoining
epithelium. Sarasin? considers this pair of ganglia as a special
organ of sense; I am inclined to believe that we have here an
' Drei Sinnesorgane, etc.
? Ueber drei Sinnesorgane, ete.
16
234 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
organ similar to the side line, or side organ, that has been found
in the annelides by Eisig! and Meyer.? The ganglion olfactorium
may be one of a pair which would represent another segment, the
mate of which has been lost by the disturbance of the bilateral
symmetry. This so-called ganglion olfactorium is paired in the
lowest Gastropoda,as Patella, Haliotis, etc., when the bilateral sym-
metry is not as disturbed as in the higher forms of Gastropoda.
The organ oy touch—Moqun-Tandon makes the following
observation: ‘ Ancylus does not possess an especial organ of touch.
The foot, which is large, flexible and capable of being exactly
.applied to solid bodies, and embraces them in part, it is true,
receives and transmits tract le impressions, but the animal rarely
uses it for this purpose.
‘ Blainville has proved that the tentacles of the Gastropoda
never serve as organs of touch, in spite of their sensibility; he
has merely confirmed the opinion of many earlier naturalists.
“This is not the case with the anterior part of the head, with
which the mollusk at times touches different bodies with the
appearance of smelling them. I have seen two individuals, which
were about to copulate, which had the air of feeling and caressing
themselves with the mouth.?”
Moguin-Tandon was wrong when he said that no especial organ
of touch was present in Ancylus, for I have found one without
any difficulty. It is probable that Moquin-Tandon was unable to
find it, as he did not make any sections of the animal. As would be
supposed from the citation, the organ lies in the anterior part of
1 Die Seitenorgare und becherférmige Organe der Capitelliden. Mit-
theil. a. d. Zool. Stat. zu Neapel, Bd. i, 1879.
2 Zur Anatomie und Histologie von Polyopthalmus pictus. Clap., Archiv
f. Microscop. Anat., Bd. xxi, 1882.
3 «¢T Ancyle ne posséede pas d’organe spécial pour le toucher active. fon
pied, qui est large, souple et susceptible de s’appliques exactement contre
les corps solids, méme de les embrasser en partie peut, il est vrai, recevoir
et transmettre de impressions tractiles mais l’animal l’emploie rarement a
cet usage.
‘‘Blainville 4 prouvé que les tentacles des gastrop des ne servaient jamais
4 exploration du tact, malgré leur sensibilité ; il n’a fait que confirmer
lopinion de plusieurs anciens naturalistes. 11 n’est pas de méme du
chaperon et du moufle, avec lesquel le Mollusque touche quelquefois les
divers corps et semble les flaiver j’ai ou doux individus disposé a
s’accoupler, qui avaient l’air de se palper et de se carresser avec la bouche.”
— Recher, anat. physiol. s. l’ Ancyle, ete, p. 151.
v
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 235
the upper lip, exactly in that part which, according to Moquin-
Tandon, was used for feeling.
The position and presence of this organ can best be demon-
strated in longitudinal sections of A. lacustris (Pl. X, fig. 9), as
in this species it is better developed than in A. fluviatilis.
This organ is made up of a certain number of specialized
epithelial cells, which are connected with the cerebral ganglion by
fine nerves; there are two organs which make a pair, and form a
patch on each side of the median line of the upper lip, and each
is connected with the cerebral ganglion of its own side.
The cells which make up this organ differ principally from the
surrounding epidermal cells in their great size (Pl. X, fig. 9 b-c).
These specialized cells are not all of the same size, those in the
centre of the patch being the longer; and as we approach the
periphery, they grow smaller and smaller, until they pass imper-
ceptibly into the surrounding epidermis. This can be seen in the
drawing (PI. X, fig. 9), which represents a longitudinal section
through the upper lip of A. lacustris.
The external or free surface of these cells is covered with long
cilia, which thus differ from the cilia of the surrounding epithe-
-lium. The nuclei of these cylindrical cells differ from those
found in the neighboring epithelium in form as well as in size.
When the object is colored in picro-carmine, the nuclei take a deep
color, and stand out sharply from the rest of the cell. Although
these nuclei are somewhat different among themselves, they are. in
general, fusiform. In this respect they differ from the regular,
oval-shaped nuclei of the epidermis. Some of these nuclei appear
bent, while others are straight. In fig. 9 (Pl. X) we see that
some of the nuclei are pointed only at one end, and others at the
other, while only one is pointed at both. In reality, all the nuclei
are pointed at both ends, and the reason that they are not so in
the drawing is that the nuclei have been cut in two, the knile not
happening to pass from one point to the other, but to have taken
an oblique course. In consequence of this, some represent the
one half, and others the other half, of the nucleus. The bending of
the nuclei is due, I believe, to action of the re-agents used in
preparing the specimen.
The substance of the nuclei is granular, as the other epidermal
nuclei, and I could not find the existence of a nucleolus.
The nervetendings, which enter the cells of this organ, are the
256 @ROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
terminal branches of that nerve which arises in the cerebral
ganglia, and are distributed to this region of the head. They
enter, as near as I could determine, the posterior end of the cell,
and become joined to the posterior end of the nucleus. The
opposite point of the nucleus approaches the free surface of the
cell, and probably is connected in some way witb the cilia (PI. X,
fig. 9@). In this figure, the muscular and connective-tissue fibres
are intentionally omitted, as it would be difficult to distinguish
the nerve-fibres, were they drawn in.
The otber organs of special sense in Ancylus are so little different
from those in other Pulmonata, that I do not consider it necessary
to give a description of them here.
TII].—TuHe ANATOMY OF THE EXCRETORY ORGAN.
As yet,no one has completely described the excretory organ of
Ancylus. This organ has only been known in part, and described
under various names. C. Vogt,’ in the year 1841, spoke of an
organ imbedded in the mantle which he called the “ sulphur-yellow
body ” (Schwefelgelber Korper), and supposed that the so-called
reticulated portion was the lung.
Moquin-Tandon also considered this organ an organ of respira-
tion, and said: “‘ The breathing organ of Ancylus is neither a tube
nor an external gill, it is an internal pouch. I am convinced of
this, after numerous dissections. This pouch is small, oblong,
straight and situated in the left side of the mollusk, toward the
border of the mantle, and in advance of the rectum.’’?
Blainyille* is of the same opinion, and considers that the orifice
of this respiratory organ is closed by an opercular appendage
(appendice operculaire). This appendage is what 1 have shown
to be the gill.
Moguin-Tandon adds that the orifice is very small. He further
speaks of a gland that surrounds the heart, concerning which
he says: “The pericardial gland surrounds the heart and the
breathing organ, as is the case with most Gastropoda; it occupies
1 Bemerk. ti. d. Bau d. Ancylus, ete., p. 28.
2 Lorgane respiratoire de ’ Ancyle n’est, ni un tube trachéiform, ni une
branchie externe ; c’es! ure poche intérieure ; je m’en suis assuré, apres
de nombreuses dissections, cette poche est petit, oblongue, etroit, et située
ala partie gauche du Mollusque vers le bord du manteau, en avant du
rectum. Recher. anat. physiol. s. l’Ancyle, etc, p. 123. *
3 Manuel de malacologie et de conchylogie. Paris, 1825, p. 504.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 237
the left and posterior part of the pulmobranchial pouch, and
extends transversely and expands behind the auricle and the
ventricle. Its color is yellowish, and opens without doubt at the
side of the respiratory orifice.”! He says further on: “ The peri-
cardial gland produces a very large amount of mucus, I have
never found calcareous granules in it; these I have only found in
the thick part of the mantle, principally near the margin; they
were very large,a little irregular and transparent.”? Although I
have diligently searched for the reticulated part described by C.
Vogt, I have been unable to find it. It appears to me that he
had reference to what I have called the sacular part of the kidney,
later to be considered, which lies close to the pericardium, the
walls of which have not a reticulated appearance, but are thrown
into longitudinal folds. C. Vogt regarded this part of the organ
as the lung, while Moquin-Tandon, on the other hand, called it the
pericardial gland.
When the animal is laid upon its back, and the mantle and foot
separated, an S-shaped yellow body is seen through the thin walls
of the mantle.
In A. fluviatilis this organ lies in the left, and in A. lacustris
in the right lobe of the mantle; this is the organ of excretion, or
the kidney. Were this organ to be dissected out and measured,
it would be found to be about twice the length of the animal to
which it belonged; thus in an animal measuring 7-4 mm., the
kidney was found to measure 14°4 mm.
In fig. 10 (Pl. X) I have endeavored to give a diagramatical
drawing of the course of the kidney. To the largest part I have
given the name of the sacular portion; it lies in contact with the
1 L’orifice respiratoire est trés petit et perce dans un epaississement de la
peu, un peu plus pale que la reste du tissue * * *. La glande pericar-
diale est accolée comme dans la plupart des Gastropodes, au cur et a
Vorgane de la respiration ; elle vccupe les parties glauches et posterieures
dela poche pulmobranche, et s’elend transversalement, en se renflent,
derriére l’oreillette et le ventricle. Sa coleur est jaunatre, s’ouvre sans
doute, a coté de l’orifice respiratoire. Recher. anat. physiol. s. 1’ Ancyle,
etc., p- 128:
2 La glande pericardiale produit une assez grande quantité de mucus.
Je n’y ai jamais trouvé de grains caleaires. J’en ai observé seulment
dans l’epaisseur du manteau particulierment vero sa marge; ils etaient
assez gros, un peu irreguliers et transparents. Recher. anat. physiol. s.
lPAncyle, etc., p. 128.
238 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
posterior wall of the pericardium. The folds that I have referred
to above are not represented here, as they do not affect the general
form of the organ. At the point 0’ the sacular portion passes into
the tubular portion. Os represents the opening of the organ
into the branchial chamber. The arrow is given to show the
position of the animal as regards the kidney, the arrow pointing
toward the head. The kidney is drawn as if the observer were
viewing it through the external wall of the branchial chamber.
The little canal (¢) which is seen in the anterior part of sacular
portion is the communication between the kidney and the peri-
cardium. The diagram (Pl. X, fig. 10a) is drawn from a complete
series of transverse sections, by first drawing each section and
then projecting it by measurement to surveyor’s paper.
The organ may be divided into two parts, which are in form
entirely different from one another. The first part—that is, that
part which lies next to the pericardium—lI call the pericardial or
sacular portion (Pl. X, fig. 10a); it is the largest and most active
portion of the kidney; it is flattened from the side, so that the
greatest diameter is perpendicular to the animal. The walls, as
above stated, are thrown into longitudinal folds, which are much
deeper at the pericardial end than at the end where this part joins
the others; at this point, in fact, it may be said not to exist, as
they gradually grow fainter until they disappear altogether. The
anterior end of this portion is very broad, and covers nearly the
whole posterior wall of the pericardium. This part, which runs
obliquely backwards and downwards, has an oval form on trans-
verse section which gradually becomes more circular as the folds
disappear and we approach the tubular portion. The length of
this first portion, in an average sized animal, is about 2°8 mm.;}!
the greatest diameter, 1:0 mm.; and breadth, 0°3 mm.
In the posterior wall of the pericardium is seen a small funnel-
shaped opening (Pl. X, fig. 3 inf), which is lined with long cilia;
this epening leads into a fine tube ; this tube lies in contact with
the internal wall of the sacular portion of the kidney for a short
distance, and then opens into it. Here we have, without doubt,
a direct communication between the pericardium and the kidney.
This small tube may be divided into two parts, histologically
different from one another,and the point where this division takes
1 All measurements are taken from an animal of average size, which
measured 7°4 mm. in length.
1883. ]- NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 239
place is where the rectum, which is on its way perpendicularly
through this part of the animal to the gill, comes in contact with
the tube. The anterior part of this canal I call the preerectal,
and the posterior portion the postrectal.
This little canal has nearly the same calibre throughout; the walls
of the prerectal part are composed of cylindrical epithelial cells,
which lie on a fine tunica propria, and on the free ends of which
are found cilia. The cilia are longest at the pericardial opening
of this tube. The lumen of the postrectal part is nearly the same
as that of the prerectal part; the walls of the former, however,
are somewhat thicker.
The internal surface of the excretory organ is also ciliated, and
consists of a layer of cylinder epithelium. In the walls are
found those concretions so characteristic of the gastropod kid-
‘ney. These concretions are not found in the walls all over the
kidney, but seem confined to a certain part. It is my opinion
that the concretions are identical to those small granulations
referred to by Moquin-Tandon (see p. 237) in the mucus of this
region.
The sacular portion of the kidney does not pass gradually into
the tubular portion, but at a sharp angle, as is seen in the diagram
(Pl. X, fig. 10), where a little blind sac is formed (Pl. X, fig.
10 z). The diameter of this part of the sacular portion is
0-2 mm.
The second part of the kidney, or the tubular portion, is
much longer than the pericardial or sacular portion, but has a
much smaller diameter than the latter, and is convoluted. At
the beginning it runs parallel with the inferior border of the
mantle, and bending at 7 (PI. X, fig. 10) it returns on its course;
at c’ (fig. 10), it makes another bend and passes for a short distance
forward again; then forming a slight curve it passes to its most
inferior position, and then running parallel with the lower border
of the mantle it opens at os, at a position about opposite the pos-
terior part of the gill. In the diagram (fig. 10) I have represented
the convolutions as if they: were all in one plane; this is, however,
not the case, as in a horizontal section we often see two convo-
lutions. )
In A. lacustris the kidney has essentially the same form, lying
in the right mantle, save that the folds of the sacular portion are
not so marked.
240 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
As to the disposition of the concretion, I can say that they are
found in the postrectal and sacular portions, thickly embedded in
the walls; the tubular portion, which may be looked upon as
the duct to the glandular or sacular portion, also has them in the
first part of its course, as far as o (PI. X, fig. 10); they then become
scattered and rarer until we get to c, when they have entirely
disappeared. The whole interior portion of the organ is ciliated.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE X.
Fic. 1. Transverse section, about the middle of A. fluviatilis ; s, shell ;
m, mantle; mec, musculus cochlearis ; F, foot; gm, transverse
muscular fibres ; Z, liver; mg, stomach ; H, albuminous gland ;
D, intestinal canal ; ; gill; exo, excretory organ or kidney.
Fie. 2. Diagram of buccal mass and odontophore ; m, mouth; }, curved
arrow showing direction the food takes to (oe) esophagus ; a,
anterior wall; c, arrow showing direction of movement of
radula when licking (for z, see text) ; Od, odontophore ; 7,
radula.
Fie. 3, Part of horizontal section of A. fluviatilis ; Inf, infundibulum ; I
and ct, tube connecting kidney (a) to pericardium (P); Hf,
heart ; bs, blood-space ; m, mantle; R, rectum; mec, musculus
cochlearis ; alb, albuminous gland; Go. parts of genital
organs,
Fic. 4a. Horizontal section of odontophore of A. fluviatilis.
Fic. 40. Transverse section of same.
Fie. 5, Posterior part of a longitudinal section of odontophore of Helix
aperta.
For explanation of the letters of the last three figures, see text.
All the figures, with the exception of fig. 2 and fig. 10 have been
drawn by means of a camera lucida
Fic. 6. ‘Transverse section of the ganglion olfactorium (Go) ; Inf, infun-
dibulum ; m, mantle ; d, kidney ; Bre, branchial chamber.
Fie. 7 and 8. Two transverse sections of the tentacular ganglion of left
side of A. fluviatilis ; n, nerve ; ¢, epidermis ; g, ganglion; p,
enlarged epidermal cells; f, groove ; ¢, cutis; rm, retractor
muscle ; au, eye.
Fig. 9. Longitudinal section of upper lip of A. lacustris. For a, see
text. 5
Fic. 10, Diagram of kidney of A. fluviatilis. For letters, see text.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 241
The following, received through the Mineralogical and Geo-
logical Section, was also ordered to be printed :—
NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY OF CHESTER VALLEY AND VICINITY.
BY THEO. D. RAND.
In a recent reply to criticisms by Dr. Frazer of statements in
regard to the serpentine ou‘crops, ete., described in Vol. C 6 of
the Second Geol. Survey of Pennsylvania, I stated that I would
exhibit before the Academy specimens from the outcrops in
question. Dr. Frazer stated (Am. Nat., Sept., 1883, p. 525): “At
the same time it must not be forgotten that what one observer
would regard as evidence of a serpentine outcrop, another would
not. * * * It would seem to be only thus that such wide
divergencies as are here noted are explicable.”
I have here specimens from the serpentine outcrops which I
had stated were overlooked in C 6, and specimens from two out-
crops represented in C 6 to be serpentine, which I questioned. I
think they speak for themselves, but if any member has any doubt
or question, I trust the matter may be so discussed as to elicit
the truth.
I desire also to callattention to certain statements in the survey
of Chester Co., C 4, recently published, statements with which
my observations do not agree.
1. The non-existence cf Potsdam sandstone, or a sandstone very
closely resembling Potsdam, south of Chester Valley.
C 4 says, pp. 34, 124: “ The quartzite failed altogether on the
southern side of the valley.” ‘ No Potsdam sandstone has been
detected anywhere along the southern edge of the limestone
area.”
I have here specimens from Samuel Tyson’s, on north flank of
South Valley Hill, near King of Prussia station, Chester Valley,
and from three localities in Cream Valley (between the South
Valley Hill and the Radnor syenitic gneiss range), one, on the
Brooks farm, about 100 yards west of the line dividing Delaware
county from Montgomery and 300 yards northeast of the south-
west corner of Upper Merion township; another, one-half mile
west of this, near and south of the limestone on Stacker’s place,
and the third the Pennsylvania Railroad cut northwest of Wayne
station, just north of the trap, in which cut Dr. Frazer, p. 283,
242 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
speaks of finding sandy gneiss! with a hard serpentine-like mineral.
T have also the eurite of Barren Hill for comparison.
It will be seen that the correspondence is exact—the micaceous
partings, the rhomboidal cleavage, the minute tourmalines—all
agree.
I have also a specimen of the trap of the Conshohocken dyke
which crosses this cut about 100 feet southeast of the eurite. I
could find no serpentine-like rock there, nor any other hard rock;
the rocks are much decomposed, but the gneiss of Rogers’ altered
primal is there unmistakably.
2. I have also specimens (loose in the soil) from immediately
south of the eastern end of the serpentine, stated, on p. 87, to be
bounded both south and north by taleose state. The rock is
Rogers’ altered primal.
3. On page 87 it is stated: “It is evident that even a synclinal
belt of serpentine 2000 feet wide, or even 400 feet wide, can mean
nothing else than a great thickness of the tale mica schist forma-
tion, metamorphdésed more or less completely into serpentine, and
a good cause for such alteration is present in an extensive out-
burst of trap close beyond.”
‘“‘ Everybody familiar with the surface of Delaware and Chester
counties knows how almost invariably its trap and serpentine
appear together.”
If this is true, how can it be explained that a few miles further
east, what seems to be admitted (p. 282) to be the same serpentine
belt is wholly within the gneisses of C 6 (Rogers’ altered primal),
over 1000 feet south of the trap, with gneiss, hornblende schist,
steatite and limestone intervening, and that the trap passes east-
ward for some five or six miles, at least, from Wayne station,
P. R. R., to a point far east of Conshohocken, through the hydro-
mica schists of the South Valley Hill to Bethel Hill without a
trace of serpentine. :
At what locality in Delaware county, among its numerous ser-
pentine outcrops, does trap, properly so-called, occur?
It does not appear at Lenni, Media, Blue Hill, Marple, New-
town, nor at any of the numerous outcrops of the Lafayette belt,
nor of that of the steatite belt on the south, nor of the Radnor
belt in Radnor. In Easttown they do appear together, but can
1 This quotation is erroneous ; in place of ‘‘sandy gneiss”’ it should be
‘‘a, decomposed friable white gneissoid rock.”’
rc
=
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 243
this possibly be construed to be more than that converging lines
must meet ?
4. P.84: “The southern edge of the South Valley Hill belt of tale
mica slates is defined upon the map by achain of dots and stripes
of two colors, representing outcrops of serpentine, and outcrops
of crystalline limestone. Were these outcrops ranged in more
than one line, the task of explaining their appearance would be
far easier. * * * It looks as if the serpentine might be a
subsequent modification of the limestone. No case is recorded
of the serpentine and crystalline limestone of our line being seen
in contact.” I do not dispute the last sentence, but the speci-
mens show a variety of rocks in Radnor between the serpentine
and limestone, which there occupy, as shown on my map, approxi-
matively parallel positions a thousand feet and more apart—con-
clusive evidence that in that part of the line at least they have no
possible connection.
The map in C 4 shows, as clearly as possible on so small a scale,
that the line of limestone outcrops is north of the line of serpen-
tine outcrops; all the limestone outcrops shown are west of the
west end of the serpentine outcrops.
There is some evidence that this serpentine belt is an altered
enstatite.
I show a specimen from near Devon Inn, Easttown township,
which seems almos: certainly altered enstatite; and specimens of
undoubted enstatite from the Lafayette belt, the serpentine of
which so strongly resembles that of the Radnor belt, both in
structure and accompanying minerals.
5. The statement, p. 282: ‘* The east end of this (the Easttown
and Williamstown serpentine belt) continues much further into
Montgomery county.”
This is certainly an error, caused, perhaps, by confusing this
belt with that north of it, as was done in C 6. This belt ceases
abruptiy on the land of Hon. D. J. Morell, in Radnor township,
Delaware county, where the contour suggests the possibility of a
fault. The lithological difference of the belts may be seen by the
specimens produced. The northerly belt begins on the land of
Brooke, about one-fourth mile northwest.of the easterly end of the
Radnor outcrop, east of Radnor station.
5. On p. 138, a Mr. Morely is quoted, without comment, as
stating that the Conshohocken trap follows the summit of Bethel
244 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1883.
Hill into Delaware county, terminating near the road leading
from the Lancaster turnpike to the King of Prussia.
In fact, it is nowhere near the summit, but on the south flank,
or at the foot, and so far from ending at the road mentioned, it
extends several miles to the westward, its outcrops almost con-
tinuous.
7. P. 140: “Near Mr. Hitner’s house, Marble Hall, there
occurs a thin bed of very ponderous rock, resembling closely a
white crystalline limestone. It contains, however, but a moderate
proportion of carbonate of lime, and consists chiefly of the car-
bonate of strontia.”” Whence there is deduced a bond of connec-
tion between the valley limestone and the No. 11 limestone of the
valleys of middle Pennsylvania.
Was carbonate of strontia ever found there? Is it not the
well-known sulphate of baryta from that locality mistaken for
carbonate of strontia ?
8. P. 282: “An old quarry close by the Spread Eagle hotel,
which is now filled with fragments of trap and rubbish, shows
serpentine along with the schistose matter, with a dip about
S. 35 E., and seemingly about 35°, etc.”
“This quarry is over the line, in Delaware county.”
This is an interesting contact. I regret that I have been unable
to find it; the only quarry in that vicinity that I can find is about
200 feet west of the Spread Eagle, on the north side of the Lan-
caster turnpike, nearly opposite Pugh’s store; but it contains no
serpentine, and is in Rogers’ altered primal quarried thence for
the turnpike. It was much filled up with trap and rubbish, but
has been recently opened again. Old residents assure me that it
is the only quarry in Delaware county in that vicinity.
9. P. 282: “As soon as one passes the creek north of Radnor
station * * * the measures assume an unctuous, schistose,
partly chloritic character.”
P. 284: “ Fragments of chloritic mica schist.”
P. 287: “ Willistown, broad conchoidal mica schist, containing
much chlorite and milk quartz.”
Yet Prof. Frazer contends rightly (Am. Nat., October, 1883,
p. 1021) that this region contains hydro-mica schists only; that
the expression “tale mica” is erroneous, as the rocks contain no
tale ; do they contain chlorite ?
Dr. Frazer says (Am. Nat., May, 1883, p. 524): ‘“ The observa-
tion of the intersection of the serpentine belt by the trap, which
EE Te
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 245
has a more northerly trend in Easttown, is interesting, but not new.”
My words were: “ A mile southeast of Berwyn, the latter can
be seen almost, if not quite, in contact with the serpentine, the
trap, however, being on the south of the serpentine. The same
is true south of Paoli, except that the trap appears to be on the
north side.” Prof. Rogers (p. 168) speaks of this trap as
“occurring along and outside the northern edge of the serpentine,
in a succession of narrow, elongated dykes, ranging more north-
east and southwest than the serpentine. These I have not
examined, but such structure agrees precisely with what I have
observed of the serpentine further east.”
This interesting occurrence is not upon the map in C 4; no
trap whatever is shown north of the large serpentine outcrop
south of Paoli.!
Dr. Frazer (J. Frank. Inst., October 1883) kindly compares my
criticism with those of the good old gentlemen who, during the
war, criticized the army officers, from a safe distance at their
comfortable breakfast tables. This is not fair; every observation
I have made has been made on the spot and on foot, and in proof
of this Dr. Frazer has not pointed outa single error of fact. Had
all the observations in C 6 and C 4 been similarly made, many
blunders like those of serpentine in the Bryn Mawr cut, in the
cut northwest of Wayne, and on the Gulf road north of Matsons’
Ford road, would not have appeared.
“But it is not a fact that Rogers’ altered primal is a well-
defined rock ; on the contrary, a more heterogeneous collection of
gneiss, mica schists, hydro-mica schists, chlorites, feldspar por-
phyries, clays and quartz slates than are found in the regions
which he colored as altered primal it would be difficult to collect
from the two hemispheres.’’—Dr. Frazer, J. F. I., October, 1883.
I referred to the rock described by Rogers. Is it not possible
that Dr. Frazer has included, in the above, adjacent rocks which
Rogers had no intention of including, as the scale of the map
precludes the possibility of accurate mapping; and the rocks men-
tioned by Dr. Frazer do lie adjacent; but the peculiar rock here
shown and so well described by Rogers, is, at least through Lower
Merion, Radnor and Easttown, very well defined indeed. Its
breadth nowhere exceeds 800 feet, 1 think, and this on Rogers’
‘In my teview, J. F. I., September, 1883, I inadvertently located this in
Easttown. It is really in Willistown.
246 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
map would be 5); of an inch; its outcrops are almost continuous,
and between, its existence in the fields is constant.
Dr. Frazer attempts a joke founded upon his impression of the
absence of an allusion to the serpentine in Radnor and Easttown,
in my criticism of C 4. It would have been well for him to have
read the paper again. He will find on page 33 an “allusion” to
the serpentine in Radnor; on page 34 a map of the outcrops in
Radnor and some of those in Easttown.
I did not describe the echelon structure of the serpentine out-
crops asa theory, as Dr. Frazer says, but, as a fact, the under-
ground structure I do not attempt to demonstrate. That our
observations agree within limits that do not affect the question, is
shown in the table given below.
The lines of strike are in part deduced from the dips given by
Dr. Frazer, but it may be well to quote from C 4, p. 218: ** The
serpentine * * * where exposed, it is so fractured and broken
as to make the determination of its dip very difficult or altogether
impossible. But its strike cannot unfrequently be pursued in
almost straight lines for miles.”
For this reason, in recording my observations, I preferred to
give the dip and strike separately—for the dip varies greatly, the
strike does not.
Strike Strike, F
Outcrops. onmap, Frazer, J. F.1.| Bi font iy. Strike, Rand. | Difference.
C4, | Oct., 83. aaa
/
1. 44 mile E.| Nearly N.70to85E. Nearly 0 to 20°
of Radnor, E. and W. ; KE. and \W.
station. |
]
3. 4 mile N.| N.70.K5 | N. 60,5, 10°
W. of | N..60:W: | 120° or 0°
Radnor | (2 N. 60 E. ?);
station.
6. S. W. of N. 70 E./+ N. 30 E.| | N.40 5. 10°
Old Eagle | :
station. |
ha NG Wie Of N.50 to 60 E.
and near,
Deyon
Inn.
9. Ivister, 8. N. 76 E.| N. 40 E. N. 40 E. N. 40 E. 0°
of Berwyn.
A line joining the outcrops 6 and 9o0n mapC 4is N. 83 E.
One joining the Radnor outcrops on map by Hopkins, N. 80 E.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 247
Outcrop 3 runs for nearly 1500 feet parallel, or nearly so, to a
lane. The bearing of this lane, by surveys recited in the deeds,
is N. 62° 40’ KE.
Now if the lines of strike given by Dr. Frazer be plotted on the
map, it will readily be seen that while a line about N. 83 E. will cross
all of them, the strike of all will cross this line at angles from 23°
to 43°, except the first. The strike of the outcrops, as given on
the map, is wrong,as shown by Dr. Frazer’s own figures; but in
spite of this the echelon structure is delineated in the two out-
crops south and southwest of Old Eagle station, the error—making
them two parallel outcrops—being due to the fact that the westerly
one is not over 400 feet long, the easterly not over 200, while on
the map each is made over 1000 feet long.
Mr. Hall remarks (Am. Nat., June, 1883, p. 647) that I do not
account for the absence of slates on the north side of the valley.
From the specimens exhibited it will be seen that there are in the
North Valley Hill slaty rocks with segregated quartz closely
resembling those of the South Valley Hill, though it is true that
as a whole the hills are not alike.
I have here specimens to illustrate the succession of rocks north
and south of the Radnor gneiss belt.
I would particularly call attention to the rocks immediately
south of the Radnor gneiss belt. Their resemblance to those on
the north is striking, and it seems worthy of further investigation
whether the belt of fine grained gneiss breaking into rhomboidal
fragments and connected with a white feldspathic rock, may not
be identical with the eurite and adjacent rocks on the north.
I have also two more specimens of the quartzite with supposed
fucoidal markings, one of which, from the Old Gulf road east of
Bryn Mawr, contains them unusually well defined.
248 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
NOVEMBER 6.
The President, Dr. Letpy, in the chair.
Forty-four persons present.
A paper, entitled “ On the Value of the ‘ Nearctic’ as one of the
Primary Zoological Regions. Replies to Criticisms by Mr. Alfred
Russel Wallace and Prof. Theodore Gill,” by Professor Angelo
Heilprin, was presented for publication.
On Visual Organs in Solen.—Dr. BENJAMIN SHARP called
attention to a remarkably primitive form of visual organ that he
had discovered in the siphon of Solen ensis and S. vagina (the
common “* razor-shell ’’).
His attention was directed to the probable possession of visual
organs by observing a number of these animals which were
exposed in large basins for sale at Naples. A shadow cast by
his hand caused the extended siphons of the specimens on which -
the shadow fell, instantly to retract. while those not in the shadow
remained extended. - Repeating this ex; eriment at the Zoological
Station at Naples, and being fully convinced that the retraction
was due to the shadow and not toa slight jar which might have
been the cause; he was led to examine “the siphon more closely,
and he also made a series of vertical sections for the purpose
of very minute study.
When the siphon of a large Solen is cut open and examined, a
number of fine blackish brown lines or fine grooves aré seen.
These are situated between and at the base of the short tentacular
processes of the external edge of the siphon. As many as fifty
of these little grooves were found to be present in some speci-
mens, and some of them were from 1 to 1°5 mm. in length.
When a vertical section is examined these pigmented grooves
are distinctly seen, and the cells of which they are composed are
very different from the ordinary epithelial cells which cover the
more pigmented parts. ‘These latter cells are ordinary columnar
epithelial cells with a large nucleus which is situated near the
tunica on which it rests. ‘The pigmented cells are from one-third
to one-half longer than those just described, and consist of three
distinet parts. The upper part, or that part farthest from the
tunica, appears perfectly transparent and takes up about one-ninth
or one-tenth of the total length of the cell; this part is not at all
affected with the coloring matter which was used in coloring the
whole. The second part of the cell is deeply pigmented and con-
sequently opaque; it is filled with a dark brown or almost black
granulated pigment; this takes up about one-half of the length of
the cell. Below this is the third part cf this cell, consisting of
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 249
a clear mass, which takes a slight tinge when colored; this is prob-
ably the most active part of the cell; in this is imbedded the large
oval nucleus. This nucleus is sharply demarcated and is filled
with a granulated matter which takes a dark color in borax car-
mine, as do, indeed, the nuclei of all the epidermal cells.
These retinal cells, if they may be so called, are similar to
those described by P. Fraisse in 1881 (Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool.,
Bd. xxv), in the very primitive eye of Patella cerulea, the
principal difference being that in Patella the transparent part at
the top of the cell seems to be a little more extensive. This eye
of Patella is open, being merely an invaginated part of the epider-
mis, and has no lense. In Haliotis tuberculata we find an open
eye also, but with the addition of a very primitive lense. The
next higher grade of eye seems to be that of Fissurella rosea, in
which the eye is closed and possesses also a lense; now in these
two lat‘er forms, where we find a lense present, the retinal cells do
not possess the transparent ends as we find in Patella and Solen,
but the pigment fills the upper part of the cell quite to the top.
This would indicate, he thinks, that the transparent part took the
place of a lense.
No special nerve-fibres could be detected passing to these pig-
mented grooves. Nerves passing to the eye of Patella were also
wanting, while, on the other hand, distinct veins were found
passing to the eye of Haliotis and Fissurella.
He further stated that this power of distinguishing a shadow
would be of great use to the animal in the struggle for existence,
The Solen lies buried perpendicularly in the sand and allows the
siphon to project a little above the surface. This projecting part
would, probably, frequently be bitten off by fishes, were it not for
the fact that the shadow of the enemy would give warning, so
that the siphon could be withdrawn in time to save it from
destruction.
Notes on Glaciers in Alaska.—Mr. THOMAS MEEIIAN remarked
that on his recent visit to Alaska he noted that the numerous
icebergs coursing down Glacier Bay, always pursued their swift
downward course towards the Pacific Ocean quite independently
of the rising or falling of the tide. On reflection it was evident
that this might be due to the greater density of the cold glacier
water pressing on towards the lighter water in the Japan Sea,
lich set its force against the Alaskan shores. It was, indeed,
incorrect to speak of a warm current flowing northwards in any
active sense. Warm water never flowed or circulated because it
was warm, but it flowed under the simple laws of gravitation—
the heavier body pushing the lighter out of its place, and the
lighter then being drawn backwards to the vacuum caused by the
movement of the weightier volume. The flow of a warm current
in the atmosphere or in the water must, therefore, be taken ina
passive and not in an active sense; and it was, therefore, to the
17. @
250 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
immense ice-fields of Alaska themselves that we have to look for
the singularly moderaté climate of southeastern Alaska, rather
than to the mere action of heated water alone. They furnish the
heavy power which draws the warm current to its shores. With
the disappearance of these huge glaciers, or the diversion of the
immense volume of cold water to another channel, the cold of this
portion of Alaska would probably be as intense as that experienced
along its northern coast. The «listinction was one of vast import-
ance, and he ventured an opinion that much of the disappointment
often experienced in Arctic navigation arose from overlooking
it, and in regarding the warm current as the active agent in cireu-
lation.
In examining the Davidson, the Muir, and other glaciers, it also
occurred to him that there were active agencies at work, over-
looked by those who had made _ specialties of glacial study.
Beneath the Muir glacier, which was said by various authorities
to be about four hundred miles long, a large volume of water was
flowing in a rapid torrent—this volume, on a carefully considered
guess, being about one hundred feet wide with an average depth
of four feet. According to information from a white man who had
long lived with the Indians of this section, this subglacial river
was flowing in about the same volume, summer and winter. The
mouth of this glacier hung over into the sea, and formed icebergs
in three diflerent modes. Sometimes the edge of the glacier would,
in its thinner sections, float over and be lifted off by the rise and
fall of the tide; at other times huge masses would break off by
their own weight; and at other times the upper edges, which, by
the action of running surfice water, would be worn into all sorts
of rough forms, would topple over, rubbing their faces against the
more solid ice, and making a sound which reverberated through
the ranves of hills like peals of artillery, and which could be
heard many miles away. There were thousands of smaller ice-
bergs floating down Glacier Bay, the most of these evidently
formed by the latter mode. It was not safe for the vessel on
which he made the visit to approach nearer than a quarter of a
mile to the face of this glacier, where it anchored for a day in
orier to make the examination; but it was near enough, especially
witb the aid of the ship’s boats and good field- classes, to make
excellent observations. So far as could be ascertained through
occasional deep fissures, no water came out from under the face < of
the glacier to the ocean. The mass of ice was apparently lying
flat on a bed of rock, the ice occupying a width of something less
than two miles, and. estimated to be about 300 feet thick on an
average of its whole width. ‘This would, of course, obstruct the
run of water directly to the ocean, and thus we had the lateral
flow which diverged from the glacier’s bed about four miles from
its mouth. The Davidson glacier ,in Pyramid Harbor, had retreated
from the ocean, and by comparing facts observed in tracing a
portion of its bed with: what was seen in connection with this
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 251
torrent from the Muir glacier, it was evident that during a glacier’s
existence the underflowing river might often become dammed, and
the torrent diverted, carrying glacial deposits to sections of country
long distances away from the track of the glacier, and through
portions of country over which glaciers had never Homeds And
there might be immense glacial deposits left by a glacier constantly
retreating, and after many subsequent years, by the diversion of
the glacial river, a new channel and new remains may be deposited
through the mass, even by another distant and distinct glacier.
This was actually the case in this instance. This stream had
torn its way through immense hills of glacial deposits, many
hundreds of feet deep, exposing to view the trunks, still standing
erect, of a buried forest. though not a stick of forest- orowth,
except a few alders and willows, could be seen anywhere in the
vicinity, as far as the eye coud: reach, and suggesting that the
original deposit was not made by the existing clacier, the waters
of which now tore their w ay through the huge hills.
The question would now arise as to the source of the water
supplying the subglacial river-bed. It would be well to carry
some ascertained facts along with us in this examination. An
iceberg of more than usual dimensions had got aground in
Glacier Bay, and, having one good, fair face, it was found by
careful soundings. that the vessel could be placed close alongside.
At seven and a half fathoms, we were able to hitch on to the ereat
block, the sides of which project ted far above our deck. The
surface of this berg exhibited, in a small way, all the features of
a tract of land: lakes, rapids, waterfalls, hills and valleys; in
some places, earth and stones. To-day the course of a water-
channel might be in one direction, till a falling piece of ice or earth
would block it up, whena source would be opened for a new direc-
tion, and the little streams, once started, would form in a short
space of time wide and d-ep chasms. A piece of rock, by its
dark color attracting the sun’s rays, would sink deep into the
berg, while earth, porous and non-conducting, would prevent
melting; and thus we would have mounds on the berg where the
surroundings, clear of earth, would be melted away. The action
of the sun on melting portions of the berg was interesting. The
thermometer was but 42°; yet on any side where the sun fell,
even at this low temperature, the little streams and rivulets were
coursing their way to the great ocean around. But on the
northern slopes, there were barely any streams, except such as
originated on the sunnier sides. In fact, it was demonstrated
that wherever the sun struck on ice, even at a low temperature,
the deposition of water occurred. What he had. carefully noted
on this iceberg he had before noted on high mountain peaks:
there would be always some melting from the face of a snow-
bank, no matter how low the temperature, where the sun shone
fairly on it, and the water would sink to the bottom of this mass.
On this iceberg there were clefts and rifts and wells furrowed by
252 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
the gathering together of melted water into small pools or lakes,
or over where dark stones had sunk by the agency of the sun’s
warmth; but in no case had the holes or cavities penetrated
wholly through the iceberg, except on its thinnest outer edges.
The temperature necessary for melting was reduced with the
depth, till at length there was not heat enough to melt further.
The facts all tended to show that very little water would
pass through a glacier by way of its surface. Some may pass
over to the sides, and get beneath in that way, but the outer
ledges of ice seemed to rest very firmly on the ground, as it neces-
sarily must from its arch-like form, owing to the river beneath
and the immense weight pressing on the edges of this arch; only
occasionally can water be admitted that way, and scarcely could
anywhere the volume so acquired be described as flowing from the
side of the main glacier. What becomes of the melting snow on
the snow-cap of the glacier, the continual and almost imper-
ceptible meltings under the sun’s influence at these heights? A
prevailing impression is that glacier-ice is but snow which has
become ice by the enormous pressure of so thick a body. If this
be so, water thawed out from the snow by the sun’s rays could
not percolate far below the surface of the snow, and there seems
no way left to account for the river beneath. If this be not so,
then the way would be clear. With no ice below the snow, with
the thermometer at the ground above the freezing-point, through
the natural warmth of the earth protected by the snow-cap from
escaping, the percolating water would descend to the surface of
the mountain-top, part entering to furnish fountain-heads for
springs and underground streams, running often hundreds of miles
away,and the balance running down under the ice-channel formed
by the glacier.
It seems such a fair assumption that this may be so, that it is
worth while to consider the evidence offered for the belief that
-glacier-ice is snow under the pressure of its own weight. Snow
has been artifically brought under pressure to ice, but such ice is
not translucent, as is ordinary crystallized ice. The ice of the
Alaska glaciers is remarkably clear, and, when in the proper
‘position against the atmosphere, presents the most lovely cerulean
tints imaginable. One of the speaker's pleasautest experiences
was a wandering among the wrecks of icebergs strewn all along
‘the shore, in Hoona or Bartlett Bay.!
No crystal could possibly be clearer than the fragments strewn
‘everywhere along the beach. The only difference observed
between this and the ordinary ice of every-day experience was
‘that, melting in the mouth, it would divide into pieces of the size
of peas before wholly uncongealed. Again, from the vessel
1 At page 187, Proceedings of the Academy, 1883, Hood’s Bay was
inadvertently used for Hoona Bay. Hood’s Bay is some hundred miles
:south of this point.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 253
anchored a quarter of a mile from the face of the Muir glacier
the portion to the southeast for a distance of perhaps a thousand
feet, as examined by the field-glass, was of a different character to
the rest of the face in having a milky white, marble-like look.
- The line of demarkation between this opaque and the transparent
ice was exactly defined. It was not possible to get nearer fora
more satisfactory examination, but the conclusion of all was that
this portion was compressed snow. At this point the ice-sea had
to draw in, through passing an intruding bluff of rocks, and the
lateral pressure must have been enormous between the bluff and
the solid ice. It would be the best possible opportunity for a
mass of snow, carried down from the mountain side, and floated
along on the margin of a wide glacier, to become ice if pressure
would ever do it. It cannot, of course, be positively stated that
this opaque section was compressed snow, in the absence of
actual handling, but there is little room for doubt that it was. It
was, at any rate, an opaque section, and wholly different from the
glacier-ice as generally seen. Again, from the amount of air-
cavities in snow, and the resistance these must offer to the self-
pressure of snow, and also from actual experience of deep snow-
drifts in ordinary mountain ranges, there is nothing to warrant a
belief, outside of an actual demonstration, that the pressure of any
depth of snow is of itself sufficient to turn it into glacier-ice.
If now we admit that above the glacial snow-line and under the
great snow-cap there may not be solid ice formed by compression,
but there may be a huge lake of water held back by the icy
breast-work at the snow’s edge, we may conceive of a method of
forming the glacial sea quite different from any already proposed.
The water must and will flow out from the edge of the snow-line
when the temperature is far below freezing-point, and form a
fringe of ice all along the line. How this is done can be readily
seen passing under the snow-sheds of a mountain railroad.
On the Denver and Rio Grande Railroad, passing over Marshall’s
Pass, 14,000 feet altitude, as the speaker did in May of the present
year, the melted snow passed as water through the mass to the
bottom, then passed down the mountain-side under the snow to the
snow-shed, where it formed real glaciers down the railroad—cutting
under the sheds to the railway track. The law must of necessity
be the same on a mountain-top in Alaska as on a mountain-top in
the Rocky Mountain region. Snow occurring after this icy deposit
was formed, would extend down the mountain over the ice, and
new layers of ice would be continually forming over the old layers,
or on their edges with the occasional retrocession of the snow.
A portion of the water at the snow-head will naturally course
under the ice, and form a channel beneath. This will increase in
width and depth with time. In the torrent which sprung out
from above the mouth of the Muir glacier myriads of stones,
some of them of many cubic feet in size, were borne along by the
muddy waters. The force of the water, as well as the added
254 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
force of the rolling stones against the roofs of the glaciers, must
have some influence on its descent, as also would the weight of
water under the snow forming the cap, pressing against it at the
highest point of the glacial departure. The roof of the glacier
above the torrent would possibly get worn away somewhat by the
friction of the torrent; but as ice is now known to be ductile, it
would bend down towards the water when any great hollowing
out occurred, and get aid in its downward flow. We may further
imagine tiat under such an explanation as this, the edges of the
glacier would have much more of excoriating power, than when
the whole mass is spread equally over a wide rocky bed.
In regard to the existence of the glaciers, Mr. Meehan observed
that in many instances there were evidences of rapid retreat.
Davidson’s glacier, at the head of Pyramid Harbor, near the
mouth of the Chilkat River, in about lat. 59°, had fallen back
several miles from the water in the bay. Having but little more
than half a day on shore at this point, an effort to reach the mouth
of the glacier failed through taking a “short cut” through a
forest of alder and spruce, the undergrowth of the spiny Pana
horrida being almostimpassable. But field-glass observation from
the vessel, together with the examination of the track of the
retreating ice, showed successive terraces of moraine material,
with succeeding generations of trees on them in the supposed
distance of three miles from the sea to the glacier’s mouth. Near
the glacier the trees appeared to be about twenty or twenty-five
years old; nearer the sea, from seventy-five to one hundred. But
here, as in the Muir glacier, there were evidences of frequent
advances and of retrocession in the glacial material. Trees which
from their size may have been from thirty to fifty years of age,
would have a deposit of twenty or thirty feet of material placed
around them, half burying them,and then again have it all cleared
away, leaving the dead trunks to tell the story.
The volume of water now flowing in the line vaeated by the
glacier, is not near equal to the work which has been done in
former times; and the less quantity with the retreat of the glacier
itself, while other glaciers not fifty miles away still continue their
connection with the water, shows that local causes may be at work
which may either retard or accelerate a glacier’s progress. As
already noted, the warmth of the atmosphere near a glacier’s mouth
will, in a great measure, depend on the volume of cold water pro-
jected into the ocean—the greater the volume, the more influence
on the warm current which must be drawn in to take its place;
and this is as true of the atmosphere as of the water. The heavy
cold body pushes the higher warmed air upwards, which has to
take the place of the air which rolls forward towards the lightened
spot. Hence the greater the volume of cold air departing. the
larger and stronger the current of lighter and warmer air which
returns to the source of motion, so the temperature is not low in
the vicinity of the glaciers. On the iceberg before described, the
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 255
thermometer indicated 42°; but a quarter of a mile from the
immense body forming the mouth of the Muir glacier, the tem-
perature was 60°. These warm currents, however, vary with the
drafts through the mountains. Within comparatively short dis-
tances, the temperature would vary from between 40° and 60° a
the time referred to. In the winter season the difference would
be the more remarkable, and hence a mountain or glacier torrent,
eutting out for itselfa new channel, and making a deep rift in a
mountain, would originate a new current—warmer of colder, as the
ease might be—which must have an influence on the progress or
decrease of the glacier itself. The operations of these changes in
the atmospheric currents were very evident in the vicinity of the
Davidson glacier. Sometimes through chasms in the mountains
near, the whole mass of timber on either side would be quite dead
after having made a successful stand for from twenty-five to fifty
years, by the work of some severe cold current, which, by some
local change, had found its way along the course. Near by, on
land no better, quite as steep, and in no way more favorable to the
growth of vegetation, the timber would be perfectly healthy, the
only difference being in the freedom from the atmospheric current
that had destroyed the others. In short, the age of the trees on
the successive terraces left by the waters along the line -of the
glacier’s retreat, showed how much had been done within a com-
paratively recent period, and other attending facts showed that
local causes, induced by the glacier itself, may rapidly retard or
accelerate its development at various periods in its existence.
In the retreat of the glaciers, in this part of Alaska, an alder,
Alnus viridis, was apparently the first arborescent plant to
establish itself. Large tracts of the drift would be wholly
covered by a dense, bushy growth. In time, however, many of
these would advance to the dimensions of large timber-trees,
surprising to those who might have only seen them as eight- or
ten-feet bushes in other parts of the United States In the woods
bordering on the Davidson glacier, the speaker saw Indians at
work making canoes (dug-outs) from the trunks of this alder.
Favorable Influence of Climate on Vegetation in Alaska.—In his
remarks on glaciers in Alaska, Mr. TaomMas MEEHAN observed that
on the tops of what are known as “ totem-poles” in some of the
Indian villages, trees of very large size would often be seen
growing. These poles are thick logs of hemlock or spruce, set
up before the doors of Indian lodges, carved all over with queer
characters representing living creatures of every description, and
which are supposed to be genealogies, or to tell of some famous
event in the family history. They are not erected by Indians
now, and it is difficult to get any connected accounts of what
they really tell. At the old village of Kaigan there are numbers
of poles erected, with no carving at all on them, among many
which are wholly covered, and these all had one or more
256 _ PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
trees of Abies Sitkensis growing on them. One tree must have
been about twenty years old, and was half as tall as the pole
on which it was growing. The pole may have been twenty feet
high. The roots had descended the whole length of the poles, and
had gone into the ground, from which the larger trees now derived
nourishment. In one case, the root had grown so large as to split
the thick pole on one side from the bottom to the top, and this root
projected, along the whole length to the ground, about two inches
beyond the outer circumference of the pole. Only in an atmos-
phere surcharged with moisture could a seed sprout on the top of
a pole, twenty feet from the ground, and continue for years to
grow almost or quite as well as if it were in the ground.
We may also understand by incidents like these how tree-life
endured so very long in this part of Alaska, and why rocky accliy-
ities, on which no vegetation at all could exist in the dry climate of
the eastern States, were here clothed with a luxuriant fresh growth,
so thick that it was almost impossible for one to make a journey
through it. Indians had very few trails; most of their journeys
were by canoes. At this village he also saw a bush of Lonicera
involucrata, which was of immense size, as compared with what he
had seen in Colorado and other places. This was at the back of
an Indian lodge and alongside of a pathway, cut against the
hill-side. The plant was growing on the bank and grew up
some ten or twelve feet, where it bent over, apparently of its
own accord, and rested on the roof of the lodge, its numerous
branches making a dense arbor under which the road passed.
The stems near the ground were, some of them, as thick as his
arm, and the whole plant was covered by very large black berries.
Stopping in admiration to look at and examine the specimen,
brought numbers of Indians to see what was the subject, who
smiled pleasantly on being made to understand that only the sight
of a huge bush had attracted the traveler. Subsequently another
specimen was noted in the woods on a plant of the native hem-
lock, Abies Mertensiana. In the woods the plant is somewhat
sarmentaceous. It could not climb a hemlock without assistance.
This old hemlock was bereft of branches to about twenty feet
high, but the Lonicera was above the lower branches, and had
journeyed along them to the extremities, beyond which it was
beautifully in fruit. It could only have been there by growing up
with the hemlock when that tree was young, and was probably of
about the same age. The Indian village of Kaigan is not properly
in Alaska, but just over the border in British Columbia, at the
southeastern point of Alaska, but the climatic conditions are
about the same.
The following was ordered to be printed :—
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 257
NOTES ON GLACIAL ACTION IN NORTHERN NEW YORK AND CANADA.
BY JOSEPH WILLCOX.
In a former communication I have noted some results from
glacial action in northern New York and Canada. I have recently
observed some other matters connected with the same action, in
that region, viz., in Lewis, Jefferson and St. Lawrence Counties
in New York, and in Canada, for a distance of one hundred and
twenty-five miles north of the St. Lawrence River.
In this territory all the original soil appears to have been
removed by glacial action, and that which now remains there has
been deposited by the receding glacier. It is thinly distributed,
seldom being many feet in depth; while, in many cases, the rocks
have no soil upon them. All the rocks are extensively eroded,
and those which are durable still remain smooth—both above the
ground and underneath—wherever I have seen the soil removed.
In the country south of the great terminal moraine, which
extends across our continent, the soil is usually deep, especially
in cur Southern States. The top of the rocks, under this deep
soil, is ordinarily in a state of disintegration; and the different
stages of transition from hard rock to soil may easily be observed.
Loose stones, on top of and in the soil, are more or less decom-
posed on their surface, relinquishing their substance slowly, as
new virgin soil, for the needs of vegetation. Where the country
has been extensively glaciated, this condition of the rocks and
stones does not exist, the soft portion of them having been
removed by attrition, and, since the glacial times, little disinte-
gration of the surface of the granite and Pottsdam sandstone has
occurred.
If the great ice sheet should have receded north speedily, by
rapid melting, less material would, of course, be deposited on the
ground, than in the case of a slow retrogression. In the former
case little would be deposited, in any locality, except what was
already on the ground, in the process of transportation.
Taking the country north of Philadelphia as illustrating prob-
ably the conditions prevailing elsewhere within the glaciated area,
I have observed that north of the great terminal moraine a large
258 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
amount of silt has been deposited, as moraine material, by the
receding glacier,as far north as Trenton Falls, in New York, but
not much farther. On the north side of the Mohawk Valley,
from Utica to Schenectady, vast deposits of glacial drift may be
seen. North of Trenton Falls the deposits appear to diminish
rapidly in quantity, so that I observed no large accumulations
near the St. Lawrence Rivey or north of it. The farther north I
proceeded the smaller the deposits appeared to be, including the
ordinary surface soil.
From the above facts I consider there are reasonable grounds
for suspecting that the glacier receded slowly from Pennsylvania
until its southern limit was not far north of the Mohawk River,
and then it was withdrawn more rapidly, with increasing speed,
as it proceeded north.
Some geologists consider that there was not a great amount of
glacial erosion accomplished upon the rocks in Pennsylvania, I
believe that the erosion proceeded with much greater effect in
Canada than in this State. While progressing from the north
the glacier would operate on the rocky surface of Canada during
along time before it would reach the latitude of Pennsylvania.
Also during its decline it would still continue its abrasion in
Canada long after it had retreated from our State.
I have observed, in northern New York and Canada, that where
the country is level it is often covered with Silurian limestones or
sandstones, but where it is hilly the Laurentian rocks usually
prevail. In the latter case the Silurian rocks may have formerly
existed and been removed, as they were more effectually exposed
to the glacial erosion.
Many sharp, angular stones are scattered over the ground in
Canada among the rounded boulders. These evidently have not
been transported far from the parent rock, but they are suggestive
of the fact that, even near the close of the glacier’s career, rocks
were still being torn into fragments. These fragments were
chiefly broken loose from the southwestern portions of the rocks.
As a shallow soil prevails in the district referred to, the trees
do not obtain a deep, substantial hold upon the ground; conse-
quently they are easily blown down by the storms, and the forests
are filled with prostrate trees, which make travel a difficult oper-
ation there. When the forests are cleared off, the ground is ina
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 259
very rough condition. A hole in the ground indicates the place
where a tree formerly stood, while a pile of earth alongside
denotes the place where the roots of the prostrated tree trans-
ported and deposited the soil that was in the hole. Large fields
may be seen, the surfaces of which are almost wholly broken up
into holes and piles of earth, by the prostration of trees.
260 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
NoOveEMBER 13.
The President, Dr. Lerpy, in the chair.
Twenty-nine persons present.
The following was ordered to be published :—
OBITUARY NOTICE OF CHARLES F. PARKER.
BY ISAAC C. MARTINDALE.
When a man has given to the service of the public good the
best years of his life, and that life perhaps shortened in conse-
quence of his devotion and faithfulness to known duties, it
should rest with some survivor to so place upon the historic
page this record, that perchance some disconsolate and weary
follower, ready to faint by the way, “seeing may take heart
again.” For such a life is a conspicuous mark on the highway
of honest endeavor, and a beacon light ever before the devoted
inquirer after truth.
. Hence I have assumed to place herein a notice of the life and
services of Charles F. Parker, late Curator-in-charge of this
Academy.
His parents resided in Philadelphia, where he was born on the
9th day of November, 1820. His mother dying when he was but
an infant, he was deprived of a mother’s love to stimulate and
encourage him in his undertakings.
His father, being in humble circumstances, was able to give
him but a limited education. Charles, as soon as he was old
enough to be of any service, was apprenticed to bookbinding ;
his father having long been engaged in that business.
He remained in Philadelphia until about the age of 22 years,
when he went to Boston and engaged in the same business.
After residing there about two years he married Martha Kellom,
and in 1851 left Boston and moved to Leominster, where he
opened a book-store, and carried on bookbinding on his own
account. This business enterprise, not being so successful as he
had hoped, was abandoned in 1853, and he removed to Camden,
New Jersey. where he resided during the remainder of his life.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 261
About two years after the death of his mother, his father
married again, and when the father died in 1835, his widow con-
tinued to carry on the bookbinding, and Charles became a partner
and assumed the management of the business, subsequently .
conducting the work on his own account.
As a business man he was extremely conscientious in having
his work performed at the exact time that had been agreed upon;
and he attained an enviable reputation as a neat workman—to
such an extent, that services in his business which required the
utmost care and nicety were sure to be sent to him to be per-
formed, and he would not undertake any kind of work that was
expected to be done in a cheap or hurried manner. Having the
oversight and employment of others for many years, his just
treatment of them always gave him the choice of the best work-
men, and those who were, satisfactory remained year after year
in his employ.
During the earlier part of his life he did not manifest any
especial interest in natural history; yet for a long time he was a
companion of C. S. Rafinesque, the well-known naturalist, who
boarded in the same house. This was during the latter part of
the life of Rafinesque, when he was engaged in the manufacture
of medicines, which he contended were for the relief of “all the
ills that flesh is heir to.” The writer has repeatedly heard
narrated some of the incidents in the life of this naturalist which
occurred during those years, and which seemed to have made a
lasting impression on the mind of our friend C. F. Parker; so
much so that I am led to believe the love for natural science,
which developed in the later years of his life, was from some of
the seed then sown. One of these incidents, so characteristic of
the eccentric Rafinesque, may be mentioned here: Charles was
quite fond of remaining in bed at a later hour in the morning
than usual when he was not expected to be at his place of busi-
ness, and often entertained himself by singing some favorite
tune; on one such occasion Rafinesque heard the usual melodious
sounds, and went to the room door, which he quickly opened,
exclaiming,
‘* He who sings in bed instead of sleeping,
And whistles at the table instead of eating,
Is either crazy or soon will be.”’
Having thus relieved his mind, he went away to his own quiet
262 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
musings, which he did not seek to brighten by such displays of
levity or cheer.
Very soon after making Camden his home, Charles became
interested in conchology, althouzh he had never seen a collection
of shells, nor known anything of their scientific arrangement or
method of study; neither was he acquainted with any one at
work in that department of natural history. His attention also
became directed towards insects, especially butterflies and beetles,
and learning that as. society had been formed for their study, he
applied for membership in the Entomological Society of Phila-
delphia, and was elected November 11, 1861.
This brought him in contact with men of science, and gave
him an opportunity to examine books and specimens that he had
never known of before, opening a new life and infusing a zeal
which increased with advancing years.
The study of conchology and entomology opened the way for
other branches of natural history; and having become a frequent
visitor at this Academy, he was brought into intimate relations
with several of its members who were pursuing the study of
botany and making collections of plants in the immediate neigh-
borhood of Philadelphia. He soon became interested with them
in their pursuits, and took up the same study with especial
zeal. Withal, he never neglected his business, nor failed to keep
his appointments and engagements therein. He was elected to
membership in the Academy on the 29th of August, 1865, and
forthwith entered heartily into work, for it will be remembered
that at this time the collections were not well arranged, owing
to the limited space occupied, and the want of means to secure
the services of competent workmen; so that almost all of the
labor performed was voluntary and gratuitous,
His earliest labors in the Academy were directed to the con-
chological collection, and for seven years he devoted a large
portion of the time that could be spared from his business to its
systematic arrangement, preparing and mounting during that
period about one hundred thousand specimens, in a style which,
for neatness and adaptability for scientific study, has not been
excelled. This labor, perhaps the greatest volunteer work ever
done in the Academy, was only finished a short time before it
became necessary to pack the Academy’s museum for removal to
the present building; he immediately engaged in this labor, and
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 263
had already devoted much time to it, when it became apparent to
his fellow-members that the Academy would be greatly benefited
by employing him permanently for a compensation. In 1874 he
was elected one of the Curators, and on solicitation was induced
to partially give up his business as a bookbinder and accept the
meagre amount which the Society could afford to pay him,
giving in return the greater part of his time to its work. The
entire museum was removed under his direction and arranged in
eases in this building in a very short period—the actual removal
being accomplished in about a month, the unpacking and display
in the cases in about five months. He has been annually re-elected
one of the Curators of the Academy at successive elections,
invariably receiving the full number of votes cast, however many
candidates were in nomination, thus showing the value and appre-
ciation of his services.
Although he continued his interest in the study of conchology
and entomology, and made quite extensive collections in both of
these departments, he seemed to have taken an especial fondness
for the study of botany, which he never afterward allowed to
falter. He was one of the first to discover that the ballast
deposits in and around Philadelphia and Camden were prolific in
introduced plants, and his knowledge of conchology sometimes
enabled him to determine the part of the world from which those
deposits came, as occasionally fragments of shells were found
therein.
In one of his journeyings to the swamps of Cape May County
he met Coe F. Austin, the noted cryptogramic botanist, who died
at Closter, N. J., a few years ago, and who at that time was
engaged in the study of the flora of New Jersey. There at once
sprang up a real friendship between them, which increased as
time advanced, terminating only when Austin died. The interest,
however, which had been created to endeavor to complete a list
of the plants of New Jersey was not allowed to abate; and for
several years past, in connection with other botanists, the work
has been approaching completion to such an extent that a
preliminary catalogue has been compiled by N. L. Britton, and
printed under the auspices of the Geological Survey of New
Jersey, in which the name of C. F. Parker frequently appears.
Probably no botanist has made more frequent visits to the pine
barrens and swamps of that State, nor collected so extensively
264 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
of her flora, as he did; the same ready tact displayed in the work
of his hands everywhere has been especially noticeable in the prep-
aration of his herbarium specimens; they are at once character-
istic and good,so much so that exchanges were desired from him
by the noted botanists of the country, and to-day his specimens
enrich many private collections and herbariums of institutions of
the United States and Europe. The collection of New Jersey,
plants which he has left is one of the finest and most perfect that
exists, and of itself is a monument of patience and skill of which
any one might feel proud.
The annual reports of the officers of the Academy, of late
years, show somewhat of the service he has rendered. The
mounting of specimens presented, and their arrangement, has
been one of great labor, requiring skill, patience and care. The
neatness displayed, so characteristic of the man, has made the
collections of the Academy of inestimable value to the scientific
world and an ornament to the institution itself. Since occupying
its present building, between thirty and forty thousand additional
specimens of shells have been received, all of which have been
mounted by him, and nearly all outside of the hours in which he
was employed by the Academy, and without compensation. He
was one of the founders of the Conchological Section and of the
Botanical Section, and was active in their proceedings.
It has well been said he was a born naturalist ; he had a quick
eye and good judgment in perceiving and estimating specific
characters, and an excellent memory. His knowledge of con-
chology was probably almost as extensive as his acquirements in
botany, although he was, perhaps, more widely known in the
latter department. What he knew he was always ready to impart
to others, and the many naturalists who have consulted the col-
lections of the Academy during his curatorship invariably received
from him valuable and generous aid.
The service which he gave to this Academy, the self-sacrificing
devotion to its interests ever manifested by him, proved at last
to be the weapon of his own destruction. In the early part of
the present year his health rapidly gave way,so that he was
obliged to refrain from continuous work. The Council of the
Academy, mindful of his eminent services, unanimously granted
him leave of absence for the summer months, in order that rest
might, if possible, restore his wasted energies and give back
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 265
to the Academy his invaluable services; but too late! The
disease gradually assumed a more serious character, and at last
paralysis of the brain set in, which terminated his life on the
seventh day of September, 1883, in the sixty-third year of his age.
My acquaintance with him, extending back nearly a quarter of
a century, has given me full opportunity to know his character
-and judge of his worth. Had he been favored with good oppor-
tunities for school education in early years, he doubtless would
have ranked among the eminent scientists of the day; yet the
record which he has left of overcoming the many obstacles of
life, of his rigid adherence to right, his extremely conscientious
desire to be found faithful in all his undertakings, and the work
of his hands in all the departments in which he found engage-
ment, have given him a record and a name which must ever
remain; whilst the memory of his many social qualities well
known to me serves to make up the triplicate of naturalist,
companion, and friend.
NOVEMBER 20.
The President, Dr. Lemmy, in the chair.
Twenty-nine persons present.
The following were presented for publication :—
“Notes on American Fishes preserved in the Museums at
Berlin, London, Paris and Copenhagen,” by David S. Jordan.
“The Occident Ant in Dakota,” by Rev. H. C. McCook.
“Staining with Hematoxylon,’ by Chas. L. Mitchell, M. D.
The death of John L. LeConte, M. D.,a member, was announced.
The following was ordered to be printed :—
18
266 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
ON THE VALUE OF THE ‘“‘NEARCTIC”’ AS ONE OF THE PRIMARY ZOOLOG-
ICAL REGIONS. REPLIES TO CRITICISMS BY MR. ALFRED RUSSEL
WALLACE AND PROF. THEODORE GILL.
BY PROFESSOR ANGELO HEILPRIN.
_ The subjoined criticism by Mr. Alfred Russel Wallace on my
paper entitled ‘‘On the Value of the ‘ Nearctic’ as one of the
Primary Zoological Regions,” published in the Proceedings of
the Academy for December, 1882, and my reply thereto, appear
in Nature under dates of March 22 and April 26 of this year :—
‘In the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of
Philadelphia (December, 1882), Prof. Angelo Heilprin has an
article under the above title in which he seeks to show that the
Nearctie and Palearctic should form one region, for which he
proposes the somewhat awkward name ‘ Triarctic Region,’ or the
region of the three northern continents. The reasons for this
proposal are, that in the chief vertebrate classes the proportion
of peculiar forms is less in both the Nearctic and Palearctic than
in any of the other regions; while if these two regions are com-
bined, they will, together, have an amount of peculiarity greater
than some of the tropical regions.
“This may be quite true without leading to the conclusion
argued for. The best division of the earth into zoological regions
is a question not to be settled by looking at it from one point of
view alone; and Prof. Heilprin entirely omits two considerations
—peculiarity due to the absence of widespread groups, and
geographical individuality. The absence of the families of hedge-
hogs, swine and dormice, and of the genera Meles, Equus, Bos,
Gazella, Mus, Cricetus, Meriones, Dipus and Hystrix, among
mammals; and of the important families of fly-catchers and
starlings, the extreme rarity of larks, the scarcity of warblers,
and the absence of such widespread genera as Acrocephalus,
Hypolais, Ruticilla, Saricola, Accentor, Garrulus, Fringilla,
Emberiza, Motaci la, Yunx, Cuculus, Caprimulgus, Perdiz,
Coturnix,and all the true pheasants,among birds, many of which
groups may almost be said to characterize the Old World as
compared with the New, must surely be allowed to have great
weight in determining this question.
“The geographical individuality of the two regions is of no
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 267
less importance, and if we once quit these well-marked and most
natural primary divisions we shall, I believe, open up questions
as regards the remaining regions which it will not be easy to set
atrest. There runs through Prof. Heilprin’s paper a tacit assump-
tion that there should be an equivalence, if not an absolute
equality, in the zoological characteristics and peculiarities of all
the regions. But even after these two are united, there will
remain discrepancies of almost equal amount among the rest,
since in some groups the Neotropical, in others the Australian,
far exceed all other regions in their specialty. The temperate
and cold parts of the globe are necessarily less marked by highly
peculiar groups than the tropical areas, because they have been
recently subjected to great extremes of climate, and have thus
not been able to preserve so many ancient and specialized forms
as the more uniformly warm areas. But, taking this fact into
account, it seems to me that the individuality of the Nearctic
and Palearctic regions is very well marked, and much greater
than could have been anticipated; and I do not think that natur-
alists in general will be induced to give them up by any such
arguments as are here brought forward.
“ALFRED R. WALLACE.”
Reply to the preceding :-—
“ Permit me to make a few remarks relative to Mr. Wallace’s
criticism (Nature, vol. xxvii, p. 482) of my paper on ‘ The Value
of the Nearctic as one of the Primary Zoological Regions.’
Briefly stated, it is maintained in the early portion of this paper
(1) that the Nearctic! and Palearctic faunas taken individually
exhibit, in comparison with the other regional faunas (at least
the Neotropical, Ethiopian and Australian), a marked absence
of positive distinguishing characters, a deficiency which in the
mammalia extends to families, genera, and species, and one
which, in the case of the Nearctic region, also equally (or nearly
so) distinguishes the reptilian and amphibian faunas; (2) that
this deficiency is principally due to the circumstance that many
groups of animals which would otherwise be peculiar to, or very
characteristic of, one or other of the regions, are prevented from
1Tn the paper under consideration, I have given what appear to me satis-
factory reasons for detaching certain portions of the Southwestern United
States from the Nearctic (my Triarctic), and uniting them with the
Neotropical region.
268 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AUADEMY OF [1883.
being such by reason of their being held in common by the two
regions; and (3) that the Nearctic and Palearctic faunas taken
collectively are more clearly defined from any or all of the other
faunas than either the Nearctic or Palearctic taken individually.
‘“‘ In reference to these points, Mr. Wallace, while not denying
the facts, remarks: ‘The best division of the earth into zoo-
logical regions is a question not to be settled by looking at it
from one point of view alone; and Prof. Heilprin entirely omits
two considerations—peculiarity due to the absence of widespread
groups, and geographical individuality.’ Numerous families and
genera from the classes of mammals and birds are then cited as
being entirely wanting in the western hemisphere, and which—
in many cases almost sufficient to ‘characterize the Old World
as compared with the New ’— must surely be allowed to have
great weight in determining this question.’ No one can deny
that the absence from a given region of certain widespread
groups of animals is a factor of very considerable importance in
determining the zoological relationship of that region, and one
that is not likely to be overlooked by any fair-minded investi-
gator of the subject. But the value of this negative character
afforded by the absence of certain animal groups as distinguish-
ing a given fauna, is in great measure proportional to the extent
of the positive character—that furnished by the presence of
peculiar groups- and indeed may be said to be entirely depen-
dent on it. No region can be said to be satisfactorily distin-
guished from another without its possessing both positive and
negative distinguishing characters. Mr. Wallace has in his
several publications laid considerable stress upon the negative
features of the Nearctic fauna as separating it from the Pale.
arctic or from any other, but he has not, it appears to me, suffi-
ciently emphasized the great lack, when compared to other
Jaunas, of the positive element, the consideration of which is the
point aimed at in the first portion of my paper, and which has
led to the conclusions already stated—that only by uniting the
Nearctic and Palearctic regions do we produce a collective
fauna which is broadly distinguished by both positive and nega-
tive characters from that of any other region. If, as Mr.
Wallace seems to argue, the absence from North America of
the ‘families of hedgehogs, swine and dormice, and of the
genera Meles, Equus, Bos, Gazella, Mus, Cricetus, Meriones,
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 269
Dipus and Hystrix,’ be sufficient, as far as the mammalian fauna
is concerned, to separate that region from the Palearctic, could
not on nearly equally strong grounds a separation be effected in
the Palearctic region itself? Thus, if we were to consider the
western division of the Palearctic region, or what corresponds
to the continent of Europe of geographers, as constituting an
independent region of its own, it would be distinguished from
the remainder of what now belongs to the Palearctic region by
negative characters probably fully as important as those indicated
by Mr. Wallace as separating the Nearctic from the Palearctic
region. The European mammalian fauna would be wholly
deficient, or nearly so, in the genera Equus, Moschus, Camelus,
Poephagus, Gazella, Oryx, Addox, Saiga, Ovis, Lagomys, Tamias,
in several of the larger Felidx, as the tiger and leopard, and in
a host of other forms.
IRC DBILS scopes scappeenesccine soeese an cose ce sen enacaueninare=saae recieve iene 698 17
Printing and Stationery ......<..0.0.0....ccececene-neseecererenssse= 85 61
Gar Sea neds eave emcodud eoeade ss arrrave-s oh cen oenns Sia eoaeane kamen 58 75
rele brensscussanceccewetoecerscenenecreorce tesserae ecaesane maa esmerae 31 13
Plates and BugravivgGs...........2.2.sccceccccecccce sessescoscsecseose 109 50
Water Rents for 1883....... eee ccngaeetee oebeme see eesac cera etaee 26 15
ROStAG Occccecenceermta recs anne sacra iaens sep ee sepecne cas iuanase mason 127 55
(CE boc canaccdcacnpogobnondoomocBetancanstnceeBA Scondchognascscds conssacd 616 70
(Bes Jo SOC aC ROP CUO CPCI Oa OCR aE nc Peer See EOC SOE ae DoD oAL Der Duce sacs 120 67
Miseellancous):..cs.2-c see eoscss 0s s-n2catecacesess maser: -cemcseseancees 457 06
Newspaper BGpOnisscses. sce rc ace ccemscacmeemerinaserisiesaeee en tenaae 86 00
Insurance...... sBoibaeds ste ceceedcs sass dstces cence hisbriceeesseooseeeneses 30 00
IG Sea ags ne sco0ed 2 ae Saceranscen cba ce ad cos cadcco cone conaDde Jacrnennc se bond 7 44
SD BY 8:05 aoe ese own seen nny ae = eres cmeg ae erect sean ee pace 18 10
WAN Colton eoascsnmen es saewasioae scree Peete ne seen see ee anceeianca aaseaste as 23 50
(O(a pe Bosceec epee uocnie sac Sacco HL cHoroed ac ado aacnotsaocueachonocnudn 23 €0
A. Heilprin, Lectures on Palaontology.........s.0eseseereeree 136 (0
H. C. Lewis ue SOMIMANETA Opty cees-ve scent con-eiacsneteee 189 00
GUTS OMNIS CUD pecan secceveaacesescesssnenes neem cssemene
Life Memberships transferred to this account.............2.-sessseeneeeeee
Interestion [nivestments:...5s+-.-c-onstcccecstocmecseseaneesenseesceenscet nana ates
Transferred to General ACCOUNL...........cccccevcccccccscscceerce $ 1382 50
Investment in Bond and Mortgage at 4 per cent. Interest... 13(0 00
To-vBalance for Investment soccictoccscc-ocuteotecl vorcicensescdss cen cdee
(1883.
$7622.77
$226 59
500 00
$1932 50
$1432 50
BARTON FUND. (For Printing and Illustrating Publications.)
JESSUP FUND. (For Support of Students.)
Balance, last:Statement. o 5... cosas kes os cds seaew cane occa Oo epee foo nese
interest, on Investments: ...... : . William C. Henszey.
Librarian, . : . Edward J. Nolan, M. D.
Curators, 2 x . Joseph Leidy, M. D.,
Jacob Binder,
W.S. W. Ruschenberger, M. D.,
Angelo Heilprin.
Councillors to serve three George Y. Shoemaker,
years, . ae . Aubrey H. Smith,
William L. Mactier,
George A. Koenig, Ph. D.
Finance Committee, . Isaac C. Martindale,
Clarence S. Bement,
Aubrey H. Smith,
S. Fisher Corlies,
George Y. Shoemaker.
338 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
ELECTIONS DURING 1883.
MEMBERS.
January 80.—John B. Deaver, M. D., G. Howard Parker,
Clarence R. Claghorn, F. A. Genth, Jr., Jacob Wortman, H. T.
Cresson, William L. Springs, Emily G. Hunt.
February 27.—Walter Rogers Furness.
April 24.—Daniel E. Hughes, M. D., Edwin 8. Balch.
May 29.—N. Archer Randolph, M. D., J. Reed Conrad, M. D.,
Spencer Trotter, M. D.
August 28.—Charles Peabody.
September 25.—Henry F. Claghorn, Emanuele Fronani.
October 30.—S. Mason McOCollin, Francis A. Cunningham.
November 27.—Mrs. William M. Ellicott, George L. Knowles,
Ferdinand McCann, Lewis E. Levy, J. Alexander Savage.
CORRESPONDENTS.
May 29.—Arnould Locard, of Lyons; Frederick W. Hutton, of
Christchurch, N. Z.; C. E. Beddome, of Hobart Town, Tasmania.
October 30.—Eugene A. Rau, of Bethlehem, Pa.
November 27.—Marchese di Monterosato, of Palermo; E. Marie,
of Paris; H. J. Carter, of Burleigh-Salterton, England.
1383. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 339
> ADDITIONS TO THE MUSEUM.
December 1, 1882, to December 1, 1883.
ArcH©oLocy, ANTIQUITIES, IMPLEMENTS, ETC.—H. Skinner. Fragment of
terra-cotta head from Mexico.
H. C. Lewis. Paleolithic implements from the glacial gravels at Trenton,
N. J., collected by C. C. Abbott.
W.S. Jones. Two Indian carved images from Alaska.
T. D. Rand. Spanish water-jar from Barcelona; 2 Peruvian water-jugs;
Catawba Indian pottery (1 piece); fragments of pottery from Lancaster
County, Pa
T. R. Peale. Breech-clout, Oahu, Sandwich Islands.
J. M. Willcox. Two Indian implements from Brevard County, Florida.
Specimen of Wedgewood ware, designed by J. Flaxman, of London.
Mammatia (recent and fossil.)—J. Leidy. Molar tooth of Equus major (?),
found near Keenville, N. Y.
J. Swartzle Jaw fragments of Platygonus vetus Leidy, type of species from
Mifflin County, Pa.
Mr. Magee. Felis concolor, from Colorado.
J. Jeanes. Two skulls, and the greater portion of the skeleton of Platygonus
compressus, from northern New York.
J. Wortman. Mus decumanus (disarticulated skeleton).
J.C. Willson. Mus musculus (skeleton).
Zoological Society of Philadelphia. Capra hircus (incomplete skeleton); Vulpes
littoralis ; Felis pardalis (skull) ; Eumatopius Stelleri (skull).
Birps.—T. ©. Craig. Cape pigeon (Daption Capensis), from Cape Horn, 8. A.
A. F. Gentry. Skeleton of parrot (Chrysotis albifrons), from Cuba, W. I.
Zoological Society of Philadelphia. Vulturine Guinea fowl (Nuwmida vulturina),
Africa ; Buteo borealis (skeleton).
REPTILES AND AMPHIBIANS (recent and fossil).—O. C. Marsh. Cast of Ptero-
dactyl (Ramphorhynchus phyllurus), from Hichstidt, Bavaria.
M. Smiley. Tooth of Crocodilus fastigiatus, from the Eocene of Virginia.
J. L. Wortman. SHyla versicolor, Tropidonotus leberis.
H. C. McCook. Horned frog (Phrynosoma coronata), from California.
Fisnes (recent and fossil).—E. Zeitler. Box fish (Diodon sp).
S. Trotter. Skull of Prionotus.
A. Wenrich. Fossil fish (Diplomystus analis), from Wyoming Territory.
M.S Quay. Tarpum (Megalops thrissoides), from Florida.
N. Spang. Pharyngeal bone and teeth of Mylocyprinus robustus, from the Post-
pliocene of Idaho.
ArticutaTes (Crustaceans, insects, arachnids, and myriapods, recent and
fossil).—J. Jeanes. Cambarus primexvus, from the Eocene of Wyoming
Territory; shrimp (yer spinipes); 5 Libellule and 2 Hemiptera, from the
lithographic slate of Solenhofen, Bavaria.
J. Harley. Selostoma grandis, hemipterous insect.
J. Ford. Crab (Gelasimus pugilator), 3 specimens, from Atlantic City, N. J.
T. Meehan. Goose barnacle (Lepas anatifa), on sea-weed, from Killinos
Island, Alaska.
T. L. Casey. 187 specimens of unidentified Coleoptera, from Wellington and
Cape Town, S. Africa.
Mottusca (recent).—John Ford. Bulimus Patasensis (Patas, Peru); Cyprea
helvola (no locality); Turbinella scolymus (locality?) ; two species of marine
shells; Crepidula glauca (Cape May, N. J.).
340 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1883.
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge. Achatinella simularis (Waimea),
Pease collection.
S. Clessin. 20 species of land shells, from Eastern Europe.
A. E. Bush. 17 species of marine and fresh-water shelis, from California.
W. D. Hartman. Helix Mozambicensis (near Lake Nyassa, Africa); 1 species
of land shell.
A. Montandon. 64 species of land and fresh-water shells, from the Carpathian
Mountains of Moldavia, and from Bucharest, Wallachia.
A. Locard. 225 species of land and fresh-water shells (1600 specimens), from
France.
F,G. Sanborn. 2 species of marine shells, from Martinique.
W. W. Calkins. Conus testudinarius, from the West Indies.
C.R. Orcutt. 3 species of marine shells, from California, and Lower California;
10 species of marine shells, from San Diego, (al; 4 species of marine shells.
W. Bell. Trophon liratus, T. crispus, T. Geversianus, and Pecten, species, from
Santa Cruz River, Patagonia. j
G. H. Parker. 10 species of marine shells, from near Galveston, Texas; 6
species of marine shells, from near Galveston, Texas; 2 species of marine
shells.
Mrs. A. E. Bush. Helix, from San Pedro, Cal.; 13 species of marine shells.
F. R. Latchford. 2 species of fresh-water shells, from Ottawa, Can.
F. W. Hutton. 9 species of marine shells, from New Zealand.
A. Garrett. 84 species of land shells, from the Society Islands.
A. A. Hinkley. Unio camptodon, Washington Co., Ill.
R. E.C. Stevens. 3 species of marine shells, from the Gulf of California and
Japan ; 2 species of fresh-water shells.
M. L. Leach. 11 species of land and fresh-water shells.
T. Bland. 6 species of land and marine shells.
T. R. Peale. 1 species of marine shell.
G, W. Tryon, Jr. 8 species of marine shells.
J. Willcox. 6 species of fresh-water shells.
C. Headly. 6 species of land and fresh-water shells.
B. H. Wright. 1 species of fresh-water shell.
L. H. Streng. 1 species of fresh-water shell.
E. Marie. 81 species of marine, land, and fresh-water shells, from New Cale-
donia; 28 species of land, marine, and fresh-water shells, from New
Caledonia: 151 species of land, marine, and fresh-water shells, from New
Caledonia, and the Islands Mayotte, Anjouan, and Nossi-Bé.
M. L. Leach. 6 species of land and fresh-water shells, from Michigan.
P. C. Tucker. 4 species of marine shells, from Texas.
B. Sharp. Semperian preparations of Limax cineroniger and Cyclostoma elegans.
Conchological Section, A. N.S. 2 species of Triguetra (Santarem, Brazil); 63
species of land, marine, and fresh-water shells, new to the collection; 33
species of land and fresh-water shells from the islands of Nossi-Bé and
Mayotte, collected by E. Marie; 102 species of land, marine, and fresh-
water shells; 215 species of land, marine, and fresh-water shells, from
Mauritius, collected by M. V. Robillard.
Mottuvsca (fossil.)—W. Bell. Ostrea Patagonica, Turritella Patagonica, Cardita
Patagonica, Tellinoides oblonga, Venus meridionalis, Dosinia sp., Lucina sp.—
Probably Eocene of Patagonia (Santa Cruz River).
J. Leidy.’ Ortheceras sp. From the Carboniferous of Fayetteville, Arkansas.
J.D. Conley. Nucula Randalli, from the Hamilton group of Madison Co., N. Y.
J. T. Rothrock. Miocene Coquina (with Pecten Madisonius, P, Jeffersonius,
Crepidula, Balanus, ete.), from Jamestown Island, James River, Va., and
from the James River, S. of Point of Shoals Lighthouse.
Pp. C. Tucker. Two species of probably Post-pliocene shells, from Galveston
Bay, Texas.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 34]
Worms, Ecu1noveRMs, C@LENTRRATES AND SponceEs (recent and fossil).—C. R.
Orcutt. 3 species of Serpule.
J. Jeanes. 4 sponges, from Florida.
J. Leidy. Spongilla lacustris, from the Schuylkill River, Philadelphia.
E. Potts. Spongilla lacustroides, from W. Branch of Chester Creek, Del. Co., Pa.
J. L. Carry. Leptogorgia virgulata (locality ?).
J.T Rothrock. Columnaria sexradiata, from the Miocene of James River, Va.
C. Morris. Tubularia indivisa, from Atlantic City, N. J.
Borany (recent).--Wm. M. Canby. 403 species plants from Europe, Syria,
Madeira, South A‘rica, North Afriea and Australia; 30 species collected by
himself in Montana, in August, 1882, of which 9 were new to the Her-
barium; flowers of Rhododendron Vaseyi, from plant brought from Jackson
Co., N. C.; roots and stem of Dryas Drummondii Hk., from sand-bars of
Blackfoot R., Montana.
Dr. Asa Gray, Cambridge Herbarium. 435 species collected by Cosson and
others in Europe, Western Asia and N. Africa (Religuize Mailleane) ; 77 spe-
cies from the Province of Minas Geraes, Brazil; 24 species of Cyperacez, col-
lected by Dr. Schweinfurth in tropical Africa; 40 species from China, Feejee
Islands, Ecuador, etc. (from Kew Herbarium) ; 234 species of plants collected
by Havard, Palmer, Schaffner and others, in the northern provinces of
Mexico and in western Texas ; 29 species of Rosa, from Herb. of J. G. Baker,
European or eultivated at Kew Garden; 48 species of Arctic plants, collected
in Lapland, ete., by C Flahault and others, in 1878 and 187+; 102 species
plants from Morocco and Algeria; 60 species Cuban plants, mostly collected
by Rugel in 1849.
Dr. Sereno Watson, of Cambridge. 69 species collected by him in 1880 in
Montana, Idaho and Washington Territories.
Baron F. von Miiller, of Melbourne, Australia. 52 species of rare Australian
lants.
FL. Scribner, of Philadelphia. Diplachne wscida Seribn. (new). Sporobolus
depauperatus, Arizona, and Festuca rubra L., var. grandiflora Heckel, Sweden.
Geo. W. Holstein, of Belvidere, N. J. 35 species plants from Mitchell Co.,
Texas.
Thomas Meehan. 7 species Cactacez, mostly from the western regions of the
U. S.; specimens of PYorsythia suspensa Wahl., and F. viridissima Lindl., from
seeds of same parent, showing them to be forms of one species; Hesperalie
yuccefolia, cult. at Augusta, Ga.; Bletia aphylla Nutt, Austin, Texas; Proto-
coccus nivalis (Red Snow), collected on summits of Sierra Neyada, California,
by Dr. Harkness, of San Francisco; Lewisia rediviva Pursh, Nevada; Proto-
myces vitico/a, Ellis, n. sp. of fungus on roots of grapevine, Chestnut Hill.
John H. Redfield. 255 species plants collected in Western States and Territo-
ries by Pringle, Parish Bros, Brandegee, etc.; 551 species plants collected
in northern provinces of Mexico and on the Texan border, by Parry and
Palmer.
Wm. Bell, through Charles E. Smith. 80 species plants from Santa Cruz R.,
Patagonia, collected on Transit of Venus Expedition.
Wm. H. Dougherty. Fruit of Vanilla planifolia, Mexico.
J. Donnell Smith, of Baltimore. 21 species ferns collected in Jamaica, by J.
Hart, mostly new to the Herbarium.
Aubrey H. Smith. Three species of Californian plants new to the Herbarium,
collected by John Eaton Leconte.
Thos. Bland, of N.Y. Capsule and seeds of 5 species West Indian plants.
Isaac Burk. 22 species of introduced plants, mostly from ballast ground,
Phila., and Helianthus giganteus L., var., from Cape May.
Chas. Miller, Rumex Berlanderi, Arizona; fruit of wild Vanilla, Mexico.
Dr. W. 8S. W. Ruschenberger. Wood of the Tomalo, from Simoa.
Isaac C. Martindale. Ell's's 10th Century of N. American Fungi; Dalea Ordiz
Gray, a new species from Arizona; part of the trunk of a white birch
branching into two limbs, afterwards reuniting into one, .
342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AUVADEMY OF [1883.
Amer. Phil. Society. Specimens of Selaginella lepidophylla, from Mexico.
Prof. Jos. P. Lesley. Grains of wheat and barley, found germinating in a
block of ice.
J. A. MeNiel, of Binghampton, N. Y. Capsule of Sand-box tree (Hura crepitans),
from Panama, 8. A
Dr. John W. Eckfeldt. 51 species of Scandinavian Lichens, named—most of
them new to the Academy’s collection,
Thos. Meehan and John H. Redfield. 148 species plants collected in Arizona
by H. H. Rusby, in 1883.
Prof. H. Carvill Lewis. Radical leaves of Argyroxiphium Sandvicense, etc.,
from Sandwich Islands.
J. G. Lemmon, Oakland, California. Tagetes Lemmoni Gr., a new species from
Arizona.
Col. Robert W. Furnas, Brownville, Neb. Wood of Maclura aurantiaca, taken
from far below the surface of the ground, supposed to have been buried 200
years, and estimated from its annual rings to be from a tree 300 years old.
Also, wood of Salix cordata, var. vestita.
Borany (fossil).—J. Jeanes. Populus latior, var. rotundata, P. latior, var. cordi-
folia, Acer trilobatum, Cinnamomum Scheuchzeri, Salix tenera, Podogonium
Lyelhanum, P. Knorii, and Carpolithus pruniformis, from the Molasse of
Oeningen.
W. Bell. Silicified wood, from the Eocene (?) of Patagonia (Los Missiones).
MineraAts.—Joseph Leidy. Axinite, Bethlehem, Pa.; Argentiferous Wavellite,
Leadville, Col.; Limonite, pseudomorph after Gryphea, Mullica Hill, N. J.;
Lepidolite, Auburn. Me.; Quartz with Pyrophyllite, Hot Springs, Ark. ;
Cookeite with Rubellite and Quartz, Mt. Mica, Me.; Muscovite, Chester Co.,
Pa.; Muscovite with Biotite crystals, Macon Co., N. C.; Tourmaline in
Muscovite, Mt. Mica, Me.; Green-black Tourmaline in Museéovite, Mt.
Mica, Me.; Serpentine with crystals of Chrysotile, Easton, Pa.; Green
Tourmaline with nodule of Achroite, Paris, Me.; Rose Tourmaline, Mt.
Mica, Me.; Rubellite, Mt. Mica, Me.; Heliotrope, India; Green Tourmaline
with Lepidolite, Auburn, Me.; Rhodophyllite, Texas, Pa.; Kaolinite, Summit
Hill, Pa.; Muscovite, showing 30 rays, Canada; Muscovite with hexagonal
markings, Georgia; Homogeneous anthracite, and anthracite presenting a
fused appearance, found in association with quartz crystals, in cavities of
the calciferous Sandstone, Herkimer Co., N. Y.; Rubellite, and Rubellite
passing into Indicolite, Mt. Mica, Me.; Green Tourmaline passing into
fibrous Rubellite, Hebron, Me.; Allophane, Polk Co., Tenn.
W. H. Jones. Garnets, from Stikine River, Alaska.
Theodore D. Rand. Quartzite with (organic?) markings, Radnor, Pa.;
Asbestos and Serpentine, Radnor Station, Pa.; Chrysotile, Radnor Station,
Pa.
H. T. Cresson. Feldspar crystal, Leiperville, Pa.
C.S: Bement. Cinnabar, New Almaden, Cal.; Cinnabar and Metacinna-
barite, Lake Co., Cal.; Pyrites, I. Elba and Freiberg, Saxony; Hematite,
Elba and Mt. Vesuvius; Bournonite, Przibram, Bohemia; Spinel, Orange
Co., N. Y.; Quartz, pseudomorph after Barite, Roxbury, Conn.; Green
Pyroxene, St. Lawrence Co., N. Y.; Beryl, Quartz, Albite, and Orthoclase,
Elba; Garnets in gneissose granite, Avondale, Pa.; Orthoclase, St. Lawrence
Co., N. Y.; Orthoclase with Quartz, Ural Mts.; Orthoclase with Quartz,
Lomnitz, Silesia; Tourmaline, McComb Co., N. Y.; Sphene, St. Lawrence
Co., N. Y.; Wavellite, Hot Springs, Ark.; Apatite, Renfrew, Ontario ;
Plagionite, Wolfsberg, Harz Mts.; Crocidolite, Griqua Terr., S. Africa;
Cancrinite, Litchfield, Conn.; Barite, Felsébinya, Hungary; Anglesite,
Sardinia; Strontianite, Hamm, Westphalia.
A. E. Foote. Heulandite on Zoisite, Chabazite with Leidyite, Chabazite, from
Leiper’s Quarry, Del. Co., Pa.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 345
H. Skinner. Native Tellurium, Boulder Co., Col. ; Massive Menaccanite, Fair-
mount Park, Phila. ; Water-worn rock simulating Indian implement, Athens,
a.; Native Tellurium, Boulder Co., Col ; Columbite, Greenland.
Joseph Jeanes. Pyrite (twin crystal), with Hematite, from Elba; Hematite
crystals, Caoradi, Tayetsch Thal, Switzerland; Stibnite, Japan; Celestine,
from Egypt, Girgenti, and Put-in-Bay, Lake Erie.
H. Burgin. Argentiferous Arsenopyrite, Continental Divide, Col. ; Schirmerite,
Summit Co., Col.; Pyrargyrite, Argentiferous Tetrahedrite, Kelso Mt., Col. ;
Fluorite, iridescent Quartz, White Beryl, Garnet in Albite, Microlite in Albite,
Allanite in Albite, Microcline, Muscovite, Pink Muscovite in Albite, Albite,
Orthoclase, Kaolinite, Columbite in Albite, and Monazite in Albite, all from
Amelia Co, Va.; Vanadiferous Wulfenite, Phoenixville, Pa.; Ankerite,
Chester Co., Pa.
M. E. Newbold. Amber, from the greensand of Vincentown, N. J.
W. H. H. Bates. Hornblende, from South Windsor, Me.
S. R. Calhoun, Chalcedony geode, containing water, from the Rio ‘Salto,
Uruguay.
J.M. Hartman. Octahedral crystal of Cuprite, France.
W.P. Miller. Wulfenite, from Arizona.
J. Binder. Chalcopyrite, Mt. Desert I., Me.
C. R. Gaul. Mesolite and Calcite, from Fritz’s Island, near Reading, Pa,
F. V. Hayden. Viandite, Yellowstone National Park.
Purchased. Corundum, Iredell Co., N.C.; Variolite, Tyrol; Variolite pebble,
Durance, France; Margerite and Emery, Chester, Mass.
In Exchange. Phosphorescent Limestone, Utah.
344 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883
ADDITIONS TO LIBRARY.
1883.
Abich, Hermann. Geologische Forschungen in den Kaukasischen Liindern. I
and II Th. aud atlas. Jos. Jeanes.
Albrecht, Paul. Sur les 4 os intermaxillaires le Bec-de-Lievre.
Das os intermedium tarsi der Saugethiere.
Sur le crane remarquable d'une idiot de 21 ans.
Sur la valeur morphologique de l articulation mandibulaire du cartilage de
Meckel. The Author.
Ancey, F.C. Observations sur quelques Macularia.
Catalogue des mollusques marins du Cap Pinéde pres de Marseille.
Sur la fauue conchyliologique terrestre du pays des Somalis. The Author.
Anderson, John. Catalogue of Mammalia in the Indian Museum, Calcutta.
Pts A:
Catalogue and hand-book of the archeological collections in the Indian
Museum. Part 1, 1883. The Trustees.
Archiy. der naturw. Landesdurchforschung von Bohmen. IV, 4,6; V, 1.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Ashburner, Chas. A. Theanthracite coal beds of Pennsylvania. H.C. Lewis.
Astor Library, 34th annual report, 1882. The Trustees.
Baillon, M. H. Dictionnaire botanique, 15e fase. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Barrois, Ch. Recherches sur les terrains anciens des Asturies et de la Galice.
Text and plates. Dr. F. V. Hayden.
Bartram’s Garden, three photographs of scenes in. J. H. Redfield.
Beales-Rissley Collection, W. Elliot Woodward’s 60th sale. Ancient imple-
ments and ornaments, October 31, 1883.
Bellardi, L. Molluschi dei Terreni terziari del Piemonte e della Liguria. Pt.
2, 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Bentham G. et J. D. Hooker. Genera plantarum. III and III, 2.
I. V. Williamsun Fund.
Berg, Carlos. Doce heteromeros nuevos de la fauna Argentina.
Miscellanea lepidopterologica. Buenos Aires, 1883.
Analecta lepidopterologica, 1882. The Author.
Berkeley, Rev. M. J. Description of new species of fungi, collected in the
vicinity of Cincinnati by Thos. G. Lea. David L. James.
Blackwall, John. Researches in zoology. 2d Ed., 1878. Jos. Jeanes.
Bland, T. Description of two new species of zonites from Tennessee.
The Author.
Board of Agriculture, State of North Carolina. Report of the Session, 1883.
8. G. Worth.
Bocage, J. V. Barboza du. Ornithologie d’Angola. 2me Partie. Lisbonne,
1881 The Author.
Boissier, Ed. Flora Orientalis. V, 1. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Borre, A. Preudhomme de. Sur un travail récent de M. 8. H. Scudder con-
cernant les myriopodes du terrain houiller.
Analyse et résumé d’un mémoire de M. le Dr. G. H. Horn on the genera of
Carabide with special reference to the fauna of boreal America.
Sur deux variétés de Carabiques observées en Belgique. The Author.
Boulenger, G. A. Catalogue of the batrachia gradientia, S. caudata and
batrachia apoda in the collection of the British Museum. 2d. Ed.
The Trustees.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 345
Bourguignot, J. R. Lettres malacologique a MM. Brusina d’Agram et Kobelt
de Francfort. The Author.
Description du nouveau genre Gallandia, 1880.
Recensement des Vivipara du systéme Européen, 1880.
Description de diverses espéces de Coelestele et de Paladilhia decouvertes
en Espagne par le Dr. G. Servain, 1880. Jos. Jeanes.
Brauer, F. Offenes Schreiben als Antwort auf Herrn Baron Osten-Sacken’s
‘Critical Review”? meiner Arbeit iiber die Notacanthen, 1883.
The Author.
Brefeld, O. Botanische Untersuchungen iiber Hefenpilze. V H.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Brinton, Daniel G. Recent European contributions to the study of American
Archeology. The Author.
British Museum. Catalogue of the birdsin the. Vols. 7 and 8, 1883.
The Trustees.
Bronn’s Klassen und Ordnungen des Thier-Reichs. ler Bd., Protozoa, neue
Bearbeitet von Dr. O. Biitschli, 1-19 Lief. ; 5er Bd., 11 Abth., 9-11 Lief.;
6er Bd., IIT Abth., 35-40 Lief.; V Abth., 26 Lief. Wilson Fund.
Brongniart, Chas. Les Gregariniens.
Notices scientifiques. Conferences faites devant la ‘‘ Société scientifique de
la jeunesse.” F. V. Hayden.
Brooklyn Library. 25tk annual report of the Board of Directors, March 29,
1883, and Bulletia No. 17. » The Directors.
Briihl, C. B. Zootomie aller Thierklassen. Atlas, Lief. 26, 27.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Buckton, Geo. B. Monograph of the British Aphides. Vol. IV.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Bucquoy, E., Ph. Dautzenberg and G. Dollfuss. Les mollusques marins du
Roussillon. Fasc. 3 and 4. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Bureau of Education. Circulars of Information. No. 2, 1882-1883.
National pedagogic congress of Spain.
Natural science in secondary schools.
Instruction in moral and civil government. Department of the Interior.
Bureau of Ethnology. First annual report. 1881. Smithsonian Institution.
Bureau of Statistics. Treasury Department. Quarterly report. June 30,
and Sept. 30, 1883. The Department.
Cabral, F. A. de V. Pereira. Estudo de depositos superficaes da Bacia do
Douro.
Caligny, Anatole de. Recherches théoriques et experimentales sur les oscil-
lations de ’eau. le et 2e partie. The Author.
Cardim, Fernao. Do principio e origem dos indios do Brazil e de seus costumes,
adoracao e ceremonias. 1881. O. A. Derby.
Carr, Lucien. The mounds of the Mississippi Valley, historically considered.
Carns, J. V. Ueber die Leptocephaliden. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Caspari, H. Beitrige zur Kenntniss des Hautgewebes der Cacteen. 1883.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Catalogue of the officers and students of Yale College. 1882-1883.
é The Corporation.
Cheesman, L. M. Ueber den Einfluss der mechanischen Harte auf die mag-
netischen Eigenschaften des Stahles und des Eisens. 1882.
University of Wiirzburg.
Chief of Bureau of Statistics, Treasury Department. Quarterly report, March
31, 1883. Treasury Department.
Chief of Engineers, U.S.A. Annual report. Parts I, I, III, 1882.
‘Engineer Department, U.S. A.
‘Chief of Ordnance. Report of. 1882. War Department.
Chief Signal Officer. Annualreportsofthe. For 1880-1881. War Department.
23
346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
Choffat, Paul. Etude stratigraphique et paléontologique des terrains juras-
siques du Portugal. Ilre Livr., 1880. Geological Survey of Portugal.
City Hospital, Boston. 19th report of the trustees of. 1882-83. The Authors.
Clessin, S. Zwei neue siideuropiische Species.
Die tertiiren Binnenconchylien yon Undorf.
Was ist Art, was Varietit?
Bemerkungen liber die deutschen Arten des Genus Planorbis Guett.
Les Pisidiums de la faune profonde des lacs Suisse.
Studien iiber die Helix-Gruppe Fruticicola Hld.
Helix arbustorum und ihre Varietiten. The Author.
Cole, A. C. Studies in microscopical science. Vol. I, 1&83.
The Biological and Microscopical Section.
Colonial Museum and Geological Survey Department. Report of geological
explorations during 1881. Geological Survey of New Zealand,
Commissioner of Agriculture. Report for the year 1882.
Department of Agriculture.
Commission zur wissenschaftlichen Untersuchung der deutschen Meere.
VII—XI Jahrg., 1 Abth., 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Comstock, C. B. Professional papers of the Corps of Engineers, U. S. A.
No. 24.
Report upon the primary triangulation of the U. S. Lake Survey.
Engineer Department, U.S. A.
Cooper, E. Forest culture and Eucalyptus trees. 1876. F. yon Mueller.
Cope, E. D. The genus Phenacodus,
Paleontological Bulletin, No. 36.
On the mutual relation of the Bunotherian mammalia.
The structure and appearance of the Laramie Dinosaurian.
On the characters of the skull in Hadrosaurus and on some vertebrata from
the Permian of Illinois.
On the extinct dogs of North America. The Author.
Coppi, Francesco. Osservazioni malacologiche circa la Nassa semistriata e N.
costulata del Brocchi. The Author.
Costa, F. A. Pereira da. Monumentos prehistoricos. Descripcio de algunas
do]Jmins ou autras de Portugal 1868.
Commissao geologico de Portugal. Molluscos fosseis Gasteropodes dos
depositos terciarios de Portugal. lo & 20 Caderno, 1867. The Author.
Do existencia do homem em epochas remotas no Valle do Tejo. Premeiro
opusculo. Geological Survey of Portugul.
Coues, E. Check list of North American birds. 1882. Jos. Jeanes.
Cox, J.C. Onthe edible oysters found on the Australian and neighboring
coasts. The Author.
Dames, W., and E, Kayser. Palzontologische Abhandlungen. I, 1, 2.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Davaine, C. Traité des entozoaires et des maladies vermineuses. 1877.
Jos. Jeanes.
De Candolle, A. Origine des planies cultivés. 1883. I.V Williamson Fund.
De Candolle, A. and C. Monographie phanerogamarum. IV. Wilson Fund.
Delgado, J. F. Nery. Communicagdes da Seccféo dos trabalhos geologicos. I.
Consideragoes Acerca dos estudos geologicos em Portugal.
Contributions a la flore fossile du Portugal. 1881.
Relatorio e outros documentos relativos 4 Commissao scientifica desem-
penhada em differentes cidades da Italia, Allemanha e Franga. 1882.
Terrenos paleozoicos de Portugal. Sobre a existencia de terreno siluriano
no Baixo Alemtejo. Geological Survey of Portugal.
Department of Agriculture. Special report. Nos. 52-57, 59-65. _
Chemical Division, Bulletin No 1. Div. of Statisties, 2.
Division of Entomology, Bulletin Nos. 1 and 2. 1883.
Division of Statistics, n. s., report No. 1. 1888. The Department.
. 1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ~ BAT
Department of Mines, Nova Scotia. Report for the year 1882.
Department of Mines.
Deschanel, A. Privat. Elementary treatise on natural philosophy. 6th Ed.
1883. I, V. Williamson Fund.
Director of the Mint. Annual report of the. 1880, 1881, 1882.
Horatio C. Burchard.
Dollo, M. L. Troisiéme note sur les Dinosauriens de Bernissart. The Author.
Domeyko, Ignacio. Mineralojia. 3a Ed., 1879. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Drasche, R. v. Fragmente zu einer Geologie der Insel Luzon. 1878.
Jos. Jeanes,
‘Drouet. H. Unionids de la Russie d’ Europe. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Duméril, Aug. Histoire naturelle des poissons. Two vols. in three and plates.
1 and 2 Livr. Jos. Jeanes.
Dupont, E. Terrain deyonien de |’ Entre-Sambre-et-Meuse. Les Iles Coral-
liennes de Roly et de Philippeyville. The Author.
E. Dupont and M. Mourlon. Musée royale d’histoire naturelle de Belgique.
Service de la carte geologique du Royaume explication de la feuille de
Ciney. Geological Survey of Belgium.
Dutton, Clarence. United States Geological Survey. Tertiary history of the
Grand Caiion District, with Atlas. Department of the Interior.
Elliot, D. G. A monograph of the Bucerotidz or Family of the Hornbills.
Part 10. Wilson Fund.
Elsas, A. Ueber erzwungene Schwingungen weicher Fiden, 1881. -
University of Wiirzburg.
Encyclopedia Britannica. XV. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Encyklopedie der Naturwissenschaften. ler Abth., 31, 32 and 34 Lief.; 2e
' Abth., 8-16 and 33 Lief.
Erichson. Naturgeschichte der Insekten Deutschlands. ler Abth. Coleoptera,
VI, 2e Lief., Bg., 18-23, 1882, Wilson Fund.
Ernst, A Resumen del curso de zoologica. I, 1882. The Author.
Etheridge, Kobert. A catalogue of Australian fossils, 1878. Jos. Jeanes.
Eudes-Deslongchamps. Le Jura Normand. 2d Livr. Monog. IV, fis. 6-8,
Pls. 3, 7,15; Monog. VI, fis. 5-10. Pls. II, 5, 6, 7, 9, 11, 1878.
Jos. Jeanes.
Expedition zur physikalisch-chemischen und biologischen Untersuchungen der
Nordsee im Sommer 1872. Berlin, 1875. Jos. Jeanes.
Eyferth, B. Die einfachsten Lebenformen systematische Naturgeschichte der
mikroskopischen Siisswasserbewohner, 1878. Jos. Jeanes.
Eyton, T. C. A history of the oyster and the oyster fisheries.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel. V—VII, 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Falb, R. Grundziige zu einer Theorie der Erdleben und Vulkanausbriiche. 2e
Ausg., 1880. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Felix, J. Sammlung palzontologischer Abhandlungen. I, 1. Die fossilen
Holzer westindiens, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Fernandez, L. Coleccion de documentos para la historia de Costa Rica.
The Author.
Ficalho, Conde de. Flora dos Lusiados, 1880. Academy of Science of Lisbon.
Financial reform almanack for 1883. Cobden Club.
Fischer, Paul. Manuel de Conchyliologie. Fasc. 5 and atlas. The Author.
Forestry Bulletin, No. 23-25. Department of the Interior.
Fouqué, F. et Michel Levy. Synthése des minéraux et des roches, 1882.
Jos. Jeanes.
Frazer, Persifor. Cleopatra’s Needle; mineralogical and chemical examina-
tion of the rock of the Obelisk.
The iron ores of the middle James River in Amherst and Neison Counties,
Virginia. The Author.
348 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
Free Public Library, Museum and Walker Art Gallery of the City of Liverpool.
13th annual report. The Trustees.
Friedlinder, R. and Sohn. Bibliotheca historico-naturalis et mathematica.
Lager-catalog., 1883. The Publishers.
Friele, H. Den Norske Nordhav-Expedition, 1876-1878. VIII. Zoologie,
Mollusea. J. Buccinide, 1882. The Author.
Gallo, A. N. Monografia sulle culture ortensi della Sicilia, 1880.
Agricultural Society of Sicily.
Geological Survey of Illinois” A. H. Worthen, Director. Vol. 7, Geology and
Paleontology. Geology, by A. H. Worthen. Palzontology, by A. H.
_Worthen, Orestes St. John and S. A. Miller, with an addenda by Chas.
Wachsmuth and W. H. Barris. May, 1883. The Survey.
Geological Survey of India. Memoirs. Paleontologia Indica, Ser. X, Vol.
2, Pts. 1, 2,3 and.5; Ser. XIV, Vol. 1, Pt. 3. Memoirs, 8mo.. XIX,1;
XXII.
Records, XV, 1, 2 and 8. The Survey.
Geological Survey of Newfoundland. Report of Progress. 1881. The Survey.
Geological Survey of New Jersey. Annual Report, 1882. The Survey.
Geology of Wisconsin. Survey of 1873-1879. Vols. 1-4 and folio atlas.
The Survey.
German Hospital of the City of Philadelphia. 23d annual report. The Trustees.
Goppert, H. R. Ueber das gefrieren Erfrieren der Pflanzen und Schutzmittel
dagegen, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Gomes, B. A. Vegetaes fosseis. Primeiro opuscolo. Flora fossil do terreno
carbonifero, 1865. Geological Survey of Portugal.
Graaf, W.de. Sur la construction des organes genitaux des Phalangiens, 1882.
Jos. Jeanes.
Gray, Asa. Contributions to North American botany, 1883. The Author.
Greeley, A. W. Professional papers of the Signal Service, No. 2.
Isothermal Lines of the United States. War Department.
Gregorio, Ant. de. Moderne nomenclature des Coquilles. 1883. The Author.
Gross, V. Les Protohelvétes, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Griiber, Wenzel. Beobachtungen aus der menschlichen und vergleichenden
_ Anatomie. 3 Hefte. I. V. Williamson Fuad.
Giinther, A. C. L.G@. An introduction to the study of fishes.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Guimaraes, A.R.P. Description d’un nouveau poisson de l’interieur d’ Angola.
The Author.
Guthrie, Malcolm. On Mr. Spencer’s unification of knowledge. The Author.
Guyot, Arnold. Physical geography, New York. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Biographical memoir of Louis Agassiz. The Author.
Guppy, K. J. L. The Trinidad official and commercial register and almanack
for 1882 and 1883. The Author.
Haeckel, Ernst. Anthropogenie. se Aufl., 1877. Jos. Jeanes.
Hale, P. M. The woods and timbers of North Carolina. S. @. Worth.
Hall, James. Geological Survey of New York. Paleontology, VI,1. Lamel-
libranchiata.
Bryozoans of the Upper Helderberg and Hamilton Groups. The Author.
Hallock, Wm. Ueber galvanische Polarisation und das Smee’sche Element,
1882. University of Wurzburg.
Hand-book of the State of North Carolina. Raleigh, 1883. . S. G. Worth.
Hartmann, R. Diemenschenihnlichen Affen und ihre organisation im Vergleich
zur Menschlichen, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Harkness, H. W. Footprints found at the Carson State prison. The Author.
Hauer, Franz R. v. Die Geologie und ihre Anwendung auf die Kenntniss die
Bodenschaffenheit der Oesterr.-Ungar. Monarchie. ve Aufl., 1878.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 349
Hayden, F. V. 12th annual report of the United States Geological and
Geographical Survey of the Territories. Parts 1, 2 and maps, 1883.
Department of the Interior.
Hayden, F. V., and A. R. C. Selwyn. Stanford’s compendium of geography
and travel. North America. 1883. F. V. Hayden.
Hawaii. Sixteen photographs of the recent flow from Monna-Loa, a volcano
of the Island of. Dr. Francis W. Wetmore.
Hébert, M. Observations sur la position stratigraphique des couches a Tere-
bratula janitor, Am. transitorius, etc., d’aprés des trayaux récents.
Sur le groupement des couches les plus anciennes de la série strati-
graphique, 4 l'occasion du projet de carte geologique internationale de
Y Europe.
Gisement des couches marines de Sinceny (Aisne).
Sur le position des sables de Sinceny.
Sur le groupe nummulitique du Midi de la France.
Le terrain crétacé des Pyrénées. The Author.
Heckmann, J. Ueber die Einwirkung von Dinitrobenzol auf Natracetessi-
gester. 1582. University of Wiirzburg.
Heer, Oswald. Flora fossilis arctica. VI, 2, VII, 2. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Hermann, L. Handbuch der Physiologie. V, 2er Th., 2 L.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Hertwig, Richard. Der Organismus der Radiolarien. 1879. Jos. Jeanes.
Hicks, Henry. On the metamorphic and overlying rocks in parts of Ross and
Inverness Shires. The Author.
Hidalgo, J.G. Moluscos marinos de Espaiia, Portugal y las Baleares. Ent.
17. Nov., 1882. The Author.
Higgins, Henry H. Notes by a field-naturalist in the western tropics. 1877.
Jos. Jeanes.
Hildebrandsson, H. Hildebrand. Samling af bemirkelsedager, tecken, marken,
ordsprik och skrock rérande viderleken. The Author.
Hill, Franklin C. On the antenna of Melée. The Author.
Hincks, Thos. A history of the British marine polyzoa. 2vols. 1880.
Jos. Jeanes.
Hinde, G. J. On annelid remains from the silurian strata of the Isle of
Gotland. 1882. The Author.
Hoernes, R. Die Erdbeben-Theorie Rudolf Falb’s. 1881. Jos. Jeanes.
Hoffer, Eduard. Die Hummeln Steiermarks. 1&2 H. Jos. Jeanes.
Hooker, J. D. The flora of British India. Parts IX and X.
Hooker, Wm. Jackson. Botanical miscellany. 3 vols , 1831. John H. Redfield.
Hopley, Catherine C. Snakes: Curiosities and wonders of serpentlife. 1882.
: I. V. Williamson Fund.
Hovey, HoraceC. Celebrated American caverns. 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Humboldt, A. v. Views of nature. London, 1878. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Hungarian Government. Fourteen statistical pamphlets.
Hungarian Academy of Sciences.
Hutton, F. W. Note on the structure of Struthiolaria papulosa. The Author.
Catalogues of the New Zealand diptera, orthoptera, hymenoptera. 1881.
Geological Survey of New Zealand.
Ignatius, K. E. F. Exposition Universelle de 1878 a Paris.
Le Grand-Duché de Finlande. Notice Statistique, 1878. The Author.
Index-Catalogue of the library of the Surgeon-General’s office, U. S. A.
Authors and subjects. Vol. 1V. 1883. War Department.
Inspector der Fischereien, Finnland. An die Ackerbau-Expedition im k. Senat
fiir Finnland d. 20 Jan. 1883 abgegebene Gutachten, in wiefern es
geeignet wire in Finnland kiinstliche Fischzucht einzufiihren.
A. J. Malmgren.
Issel, Arturo. Istruzione pratiche per Vostricultura e la mitilicultura.
I. V.. Williamson Fund.
James, Jos. F. A revision of the genus Clematis of the United States. The Author.
350 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
Jan, G. Iconographie generale des Ophidiens. Vol. 2, Index, ete.
Wilson Fund.
Jeffreys, J. Gwyn. On the mollusca procured during the cruise of H. M.S.
‘¢Triton,’’ between the Hebrides and Faroes in 1882.
On the mollusca procured during the ‘‘ Lightning’’ and ‘‘ Poreupine”’
expeditions, 1868-70.
Black Sea mollusca. The Author.
Jolis, Aug. le. Note sur le Myosotis sparsifiora de la flore de la Normandie.
The Author.
Jones, Jos. Investigations, chemical and physiological, relative to certain
American vertebrata. The Author.
Judd, John W. Volcanoes: What they are and what they teach.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Just, L. Botanischer Jahresbericht. 6er Jahrg., 2te Abth., 4und 5 H.;
Ter Jahrg., 2te Abth., 2 und 3 H. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Kemeny, Gabor and Geza Howarth. Jelentes,az orszigos Phylloxera-kisérleti
Allom4s, 1881-ik évi Mikédésér6él, 1 Hvfolyam, 1881.
Hungarian Acad. of Sciences.
Kennel, J. Ueber Ctenodailus pardalis, 1882. The Author.
Kent, W. Saville. A manual of the Infusoria. 2 vols. text and one of atlas.
1881-82. Jos. Jeanes.
Kinahan, G. H. Manual of geology of Ireland. 1878. Jos, Jeanes.
Kleinenberg, N. Hydra. 1872. Jos. Jeanes.
Kobell, F. v. Geschichte der Mineralogie, von 1850-1860. Miinchen, 1864.
Jos. Jeanes.
Kobelt, W. Iconographie der schalentragenden europiiischen Meerescon-
chylien. H. 1. f. V. Williamson Fund.
Catalog der im europiiischen Faunengebiet lebenden Binnenconchylien.
2te Aufl. 1881. Jos. Jeanes.
K6lliker, A. Zur Entwicklung des Auges und Geruchsorganes menschlicher
Embryonen. 1883. The University of Zurich.
Koninck, L. G. De. Notice sur la famille des Bellerophontide. The Author.
Krazer, A. Theorie der zweifach unendlichen Thetareihem auf grund der
Riemann’schen Thetaformel. 1. Th., 1881. University of Wiirzburg.
Kunz, Geo. F. American gems and precious stones. 1885. The Author.
Lacoe, R. D. List of palezeozoic fossil insects of the U. States. The Author.
Lang, Heinr. Otto. Grundriss der Gesteinskunde. 1877. Jos. Jeanes.
Lanessan, J. L., Dr. Manuel d’histoire naturelle médicale. 3 vols., 1882,
Jos. Jeanes,
Lapparent, A. de. Traite de Geologie, VII, VIII. Jos. Jeanes.
Lasaulx, A. v. Elemente der Petrographie. 1875. Jos. Jeanes.
Latchford, F. R. Notes on Ottawa Unionide. The Author.
Lawes, Sir J. B. Memorandum of the origin, plan and results of the field and
other experiments conducted on the farm and in the laboratory of Sir
John Bennet Lawes. 1883. The Author.
Lawrence, Geo. N. Description of a new species of Swift of the genus
Chaetura.
Descriptions of two new species of birds from Yucatan of the families
Columbidz and Formicariide.
Description of a new species of bird of the family Cypselide.
Description of a new species of bird of the family Turdide.
Description of a new species of Icterus from the West Indies.
Description of a new sub-species of Loxigilla from the island of St. Chris-
topher. West Indies. The Author.
Le Conte, John L., and Geo. H. Horn. Classification of the Coleoptera of
North America. 188%. The Author.
Lee, John G. Homicide and suicide in Philadelphia during 1871 to 1881
incl. The Author.
1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 351
Lewis, H. Carvill. Mineralogical notes, 1882.
A summary of progress in Mineralogy in 1882.
On some enclosures in Muscovite, 1882.
The great ice age in Pennsylvania.
The great terminal moraine across Pennsylvania.
Map of the terminal moraine.
The geology of Philadelphia. January 12, 1882. The Author.
Library Company of Philadelphia. Bulletin, January, 1883. The Trustees.
Librarian of Congress. Annual report, 1882. The Author.
Liversidge, Archibald. The minerals of New South Wales, 2d Ed.
Royal Society of New South Wales.
Locard, A. Contributions 4 la faune malacologique Francaise, I-VI, 1881-1882.
Catalogue des mollusques vivants terrestres et aquatiqués du Départment
de l Ain, 1881.
Prodrome de Malacologie Francaise. Catalogue général des mollusques
, Vivants de France, 1882.
Etudes sur les variations malacologique d’aprés la faune vivante et fossile
de la partie centrale du Bassin du Rhone. 2 vols., 1881.
Recherches paléontologiques sur les depots tertiaires a Milne-Edwardsia
et Vivipara du Pliocéne inférieur du Department de l Ain, 1883.
Malacologie des Lacs de Tiberiade d’ Antioche et d’Homs, 1883.
Description d’une espéce nouvelle de mollusque appartenant au genre
Paulia. The Author.
Lowne, B. Thompson. Descriptive catalogue of the teratological series in the
museum of the Royal College of Surgeons of England. Jos. Jeanes.
Lyman, Theo. Report of the scientific results of the voyage of H. M. S. Chal-
lenger. Zoology, V, 14. Report on the Ophiuroidea. The Author,
M’ Alpine, D. The botanical atlas, 1883, 2 vols. Jos. Jeanes.
McCook, H.C. The mode of recognition among ants, 1878.
Toilet habits of ants, 1878.
The Basilica spider and her snare, 1878.
Mound-making ants of the Alleghenies, 1878.
Supplementary note on the aeronautic flight of spiders, 1878.
Cutting or Parasol ant, Atta fervens Say, 1879.
Note on the adoption of an ant-queen, 1879. Mode of depositing ant-
eggs.
Note on the marriage-flights of Lasius flayus and Myrmica lobricornis,
1879.
Pairing of spiders, Linyphia marginata, 1879. Note on mound-making
ants, 1879.
Combats and nidifieation of the Pavement ant, 1879.
On the mandibles of ants and nests of Tarantula, 1879.
The snare of ray-spider, 1881.
The honey ants of the Garden of the Gods, 1881,
Note on the intelligence of the American Turret spider.
Snare of orb-weaving spiders, 1882. The Author.
Marion, A. F. Observations sur le Draceena goldieana, 1882.
Applications du sulphure de carbone au traitement des vignes phylloxérées,
1882.
Draguages au large de Marseille. B, 1879. The Author.
Marrat, F. P. The naturalization of the estuary of the Mersey. The Author.
Martens, E. vy. Description of two species of land-shells from Porto Rico,
Wiol: T. Bland
Conchologische Mittheilungen. II, 5 and 4.
Die Weich-und-Schaltiere gemeinfasslich dargestellt, 1883.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Martini und Chemnitz. Systematisches Conchylien Cabinet. 318e—524e Lief.
Wilson Fund.
352 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
Masters, Maxwell T. On the Passiflorez collected by M. Edouard André in
Ecuador and New Granada, The Author.
Maye, Gustav. Die europiischen Arten der gallenbewohnenden Cynipiden,
1882. Jos. Jeanes.
Medical and Surgical History of the War of the Rebellion. Part 3, Vol. 2;
Surgical History, 2d issue. War Department.
Meehan, Thomas. Variations in Nature, 1883. The Author.
Mercantile Library Association of the City of New York. 62d annual report,
1883. The Director.
Mercantile Library Company of Philadelphia. 60th annual report, January,
1883. r The Directors.
Mercantile Library Association of San Francisco. 30th annual report.
The Association.
Metzges,G. Ueber die Einwirkung von Schwefelsiiure auf Methyl- und #thyl-
Alkohol, 1881. University of Wiirzburg.
Miller, A. S. The American paleozoic fossils. 2d Ed., 1883.
I. V. Williamsen Fund.
Milne, Edwards. Rapport sur les travaux de la Commission chargée par M.
le Ministre del’ Instruction publique d@’étudier la faune sous-marine dans
les grandes profondeurs de la Mediterranée et de l’océan Atlantique.
A. F. Marion.
Mission scientifique au Mexique et dans ,l’Amerique Centrale. Recherches
zoologiques. 3me partie, Zesection Etudes sur les batraciens par M.
Brocchi, Livr. 2 and 8. Etudes sur les reptiles et les batraciens, par
MM. Auguste Duméril et Bocourt, Livr., 8.
Moebius, K., F. Richter und E. von Martens. Beitriige zur Meeresfauna der
Insel Mauritius und der Seychellen, 1880. Jos. Jeanes.
Moeller. Jos. Anatomie der Baumrinden, 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Mohn, H. Den Norske Nordhavs-Expedition, 1875-1878. X. Meteorologi,
1883. Norwegian Government.
Molescott, Jac. Untersuchungen zur Naturlehre des Menschen und der Thiere.
XIII, 2 and 3. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Morris, G. H. Beitrag zur Geschichte der Destillations-producte des Colopho-
niums, 1882. University of Wurzburg.
Mortillet, Gabriel de. Le prehistorique antiquité de !homme, 1883.
Jos. Jeanes.
Mott, F. T. The fruits of all countries, 1883. Dr. F. V. Hayden.
Miiller, Ferd. v. Lecture on the flora of Australia, 1882.
Fragmenta phytographie Australie. XI and XII, pp. 1-26.
Eucalyptographia, 2d, 5th and 6th Decade, 1879-80.
Index perfectus ad Caroli Linnzi species Plantarum, nempe earum primam
editionem (Anno 1753), 1880. The Author.
Miiller, H. The fertilization of flowers, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Nares, Capt. G. S. Narrative of a voyage to the polar sea during 1875-6, in
H. M. Ships ‘‘Alert’’ and ‘‘Discovery.”’ 2 Vols., 4th Ed., 1878.
Jos. Jeanes.
Natural Bridge, Virginia. Two photographs of the. Mr. S. F. Corlies.
Naturw. Landesdurchforschung von Béhmen. Archivyder. V, 2.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Naumann, Carl Fiedr. Elemente der Mineralogie. lle Aufl. von Dr. Ferd.
Zirkel. Jos. Jeanes.
Netto, L. Apercu sur la théorie de l’évolution, 1883. The Author.
Newberry, J.S. Geological Survey of Ohio. Report, Vols. 3 and 4. The Author.
New South Wales. Australian Museum. Report of Trustees for 1882.
The Director.
New South Wales. Department of mines. Annual report of. 1880.
Royal Society of N. S. W.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 353
Newton, Alf. A history of British birds. 4th Ed., Pt. 15. ed, acme Fund.
Newton, John. The fortifications of to-day. 1883. Engineer Dept., U.S.A
New York State Library. 62d, 63d and 64th annual reports,
Regents of the University.
New York State Museum of Natural History. 3lst annual report. 1878.
Regents of the University.
New Zealand. Colonial Museum and Geological Survey of. 17th annual
report. 1882. ‘ The Directors.
Nordenskiold, A. E. Vega-Expeditionens Vetenskaplig& Iakttagelser bear-
betade af Deltagare i Resan och Andra Forskare utgifna af A. E.
Nordenskiold. Foérsta Bd., 1882.
Vegas Fard Kring Asien och Europa. I and II. Jos. Jeanes.
Norner, C. Die Kratzmilbe der Hiihner.
Syringophilus bipectinatus.
Beitrag zur Behandlung mikroskopischer Priparate.
Analges minor eine neue Milbe im Innern der Federspulen der Hiihner.
Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Milbenfamilie der Dermaleichiden. 1883.
The Author.
Norske Nordhavs-Expedition. 1876-78, VI—IX. 1882.
The Norwegian Government.
Norwegische Commission der europiiischen Gradmessung, Publication der.
Geodatische Arbeiten, H. 1-3. Vandstandsobservationer, H. 1.
The Commission.
Ochsenius, Karl. Die Region der Schott’s in Nordafrika und das Sahara-
Meer. I—VII.
Die Bildung von Steinsalzflétzen. The Author.
Opening ceremonies of the New York and Brooklyn Bridge, May 24, 1885.
Packard. A. S. On the classification of the Linnean Order of Orthoptera and
Neuroptera.
A revision of the Lysiopetalids, a family of Chilognath Myriapoda, with
a notice of the genus Cambala.
Repugnatorial pores in the Lysiopetalide.
A new species of Polydesmus with eyes. The Author.
Paetel, Fr. Catalogue der Conchylien-Sammlung. 1883. The Author.
Pagenstecher, H. Alex. Allgemeine Zoologie oder Grundgesetze des thierischen
Baus und Lebens. ler—4er Th. 1875-81. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Paget, James. Descriptive catalogue of the pathological specimens contained
in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons of England. 2d Ed.,
by Sir James Paget, with the assistance of James Frederic Goodhart,
M. D., and Alban H. G. Doran. Vol. 2, 1883. The Councilof the Colfege:
Paléontologie Francaise. lyre Ser. Av. Invert. Terrain Jurassique. Livr. 32,
54-64. Terrain Crétace. 1. 29. Wilson Fund.
Paleontograpica. 29er Bd., 2e-6e Lief. Suppl. II, 4te Abth., Text und Atlas.
Suppl III, L. 10-11. Wilson Fund.
Parrish, S. B., and W. F. Supplementary list of the plants of Southern
California. The Author.
Paulucci, M. Nuova stazione della Clausilia lucensis. 1877.
Etude critique sur quelques Hyalina de Sardaigne et description d’une
nouvelle espéce. 1879.
Molluschi fluviatili Italiani inviati come saggio alla Esposizione inter-
nazionale della Pesca in Berlino. 1880.
Osservazioni critiche sopra le specie del genere Struthiolaria Lamarck.
1877. Ancora del genere Struthiolaria Lam. 2° Articolo. 1877.
Description d’une Murex fossile du terrain tertiaire subapennin de la
Vallée de 1’ Elsa.
Fauna Italiana. Communicazioni malacologiche. Art. 1-7, 1877-1880.
Materiaux pour servir a l’étude de la faune malacologique terrestre et
fluviatile de Italie et de ses Iles. 1878, The Author.
304 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
Peale, Chas. Wilson. Manuscript lectures on natural history. 1797. Probably
the first ox the subject delivered in the U. States. Titian R. Peale.
Penecke, K. Alphonse. Beitriige zur Kenntniss der Fauna der slavonischen
Paludinenschichten. Dr. F. V. Hayden.
Péres de la Compagnie. Mémoires concernant l’histoire naturelle de l’ Empire
Chinois. ler & 2er Cah. Jos. Jeanes.
Perrier, Ed. Anatomie et physiologie animales. 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Peschel, Oscar. Physische Erdkunde, nach den hinterlassenen Manuscripten
Oscar Pescel’s, selbststiindig bearbeitet und herausgegeben von Gustav
Leipoldt. ler und 2er Bd 1879-80. i. V. Williamson Fund.
Phillips, Henry, Jr. A brief account of the more important public collections
of American Archeology in the United States. The Author.
Plateau, Félix. Recherches expérimentales sur les movements respiratoire
des insectes. The Author.
Poole, Wm. Fred’k An index to periodical literature. 1. V. Williamson Fund.
Potonié, H. Floristische Beobachtungen aus der Priegnitz,
Ueber den Ersatz erfrohrener Friihlingstriebe durch accessorische und
andere Sprosse.
Das Skelet der Pflanzen. 1882.
Ueber die Zusammensetzung der Leitbiindel bei den Gefiasskryptogamen.
Ueber die Beziehung zwischen dem Spaltéffnungssystem und dem Stereom
bei den Blattstielen der Filicineen.
Ueber das Verhiltniss der Morphologie zur Physiologie.
Der k. botanische Garten und das k. botanische Museum in Berlin.
The Author.
Pouchet, G. Des terminaisons vasculaires dans la rate des Sélaciens.
Sur levolution des Peridinéens et les particularités d’organisation que
les rapprochent des noctiluques. The Author.
Poulsen, C. M. Bornholms Land-og Ferskvands-Bliéddyr. 1874. The Author.
Powell, J. W. Second annual report of the U. S. Geological Survey. 1882.
Department of the Interior.
First annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the Secretary of the
Smithsonian Institution, 1879-80. Smithsonian Institution.
Provancter, L. Petite faune entomologique du Canada. II, 1883.
The Author.
Purgold, A. Die Meteoriten des k. mineralogischen Museum in Dresden.
The Author.
Purves, J.C. Sur les dépots fluvio-marins d’Age Sénonier. The Author.
Putnam, F. W. Notes on copper implements from Mexico.
Tron from the Ohio mounds The Author.
Quenstedt, F. A. Die Ammoniten des schwiibischen Jura.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Die Schépfung der Erde und ihre Bewohner. 1882. Jos. Jeanes.
Ramos, D. José. Historia del Uredo cocivoro. 1882. The Author.
Ramsay, A.C. The physical geology and geography of Great Britain. 5th
ed. 1878. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Regel, E. Descriptiones plantarum novarum et minus cognitarum. Fasc. 8
and Suppl. 1883. The Author.
Regents of the University of the State of New York. 92d, 93d and 94th
annual reports. The Authors.
Reichenbach, H. G. Xenia Orchidacea. IIT, 3. Wilson Fund,
Reinsch, P, F. Ueber parasitische Algen ‘ihnliche Pflanzen in der Russischen
Blatterkohle und iiber die Natur der Pflanzen welche diese Kohle zusam-
mensetzen.
Notiz iiber die neuerdings in dem Polarkreise entdeckten Steinkohlenflitze.
Ein neuer algoider Typus in der Stigmarienkohle von Kurakino (Russland).
The Author.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 355
Remelé, Adolf. Untersuchungen iiber die versteinerungsfiihrenden Diluvial-
geschichte des norddeutscher Flachlands mit besonderer Beriicksich-
tigung der Mark Brandenburg. IStiick, 1853. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Renault, M. B. Cours de botanique fossile. lre-3me An., 1881-83.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Considerations sur les rapports des lepidodendrons, des sigillaires et des
stigmaria, 1883. The Author.
Report upon the practice in Europe with the heavy Armstrong, Woolwich and
Krupp Rified Guns. Submitted by the Board of Engineers for Fortifi-
cations, 1883. War Department.
Report upon the statistics of production of the precious metals in the United
States, 1881. Horatio C. Burchard.
Reusch, H. H. Die fossilen fiihrenden krystallinischen Schiefer von Bergen
in Norwegen, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Revyoil, G. Fauna et flore des Pays Comalis, 1882. Jos. Jeanes.
Rhees, William J. Catalogue of publications of the Smithsonian Institution
(1846-1882), with an alphabetical index of articles, 1882.
The Institution.
Ribeiro, Carlos. Estudos geelogicos. Descripgao de Solo quaternario das
Bacias hydrographicas de Tejo e Sado.
Noticia de algumas estacoes e monumentos prehistoricos. 2 parts.
Descripcao de algunas silex a quartzites Lascados.
Relatorio acerca de sexta reuniao do Congresso de Anthropologia e de
archeologia prehistorico verificada na Cidade de Bruxelles no mez de
Agosto de 1872. The Author.
Richards, Thos. New South Wales in 1881. Royal Society of N. S. W.
Reichtofen, F. Freiherrn v. China. 4er Bd. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Rivero, E. de and Juan Tschudi. Diego de Antiquedades Peruanas. Atlas,
1851 Executor of Wm. 8. Vaux.
Royal Geological Society of Cornwall. Catalogue of the Library, 1882.
The Society.
Roca, Gen. D. Julio A. Informe official de la Comision Cientifica agregada al
Estado Mayor General de la Expedicion al Rio Negro (Patagonia)
realizada en los messes de April, Mayo y Junio de 1879. Ent. III,
Geologia, 1882. Dr. F. V. Hayden.
Roemer, Ferd. lLethza geognostica. 1 Th. Lethza paleozoica. Textband,
2e Lief,, 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Romanes, Geo. J. The scientific evidences of organic evolution. 1882.
Animal intelligence. 2d Ed., 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Roscoe, Henry E. Lessons in elementary chemistry. Inorganic and organic,
1881. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Rossmissler’s Iconographie der europiischen land- und siisswasser-Mollusken.
Nef leand <2: Wilson Fund.
Royal Society. Catalogue of the scientific books in the library of the. 1883.
The Society.
Runkel, F. Ueber Alpha-Athylidenvalerolacton, 1882.
University of Wiirzburg.
Rutot, A. Les alluvions modernes dans la moyenne Belgique.
Les phenoménes de la sédimentation marine. The Author.
Ryder, J. A. On the mode of fixation of the fry of the oyster.
Summary of recent progress in our knowledge of the culture, growth and
anatomy of the oyster. The Author.
Saccardo, P. A. Sylloge fungorum omnium hucusque cognitorum. JI and II.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Salomon, C. Nomenclator der Gefasskryptogamen. 1883.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Sampson, F. A. Notes on the distribution of shells. Art. III. The Author.
356 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
Schomburgh, R. South Australia. Report on the progress and conditions of
the Botanic Garden and Government Plantation during the year 1882.
The Author.
Schibbye, Gustav. Zur Geschichte der Dehydracetsiiure, 1882.
University of Wiirzburg.
Schiodte, J. C. Zoologia Danica, 3die Hefte.
Schneider, Anton. Zoologische Beitrage. I, 1,1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Schoebel, C. L’ame humaine au point de vue de la science ethnographique,
2d Ed., 1879. The Author.
Schwartz, K. Ebbeund Fluth, 1881. Jos Jeanes.
Scott, D. H. Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der gegliederten Milchréhren der
Pfianzen, 1881. University of Wiirzburg.
Scudder, Samuel H The tertiary lake-basin at Florissant,Colorado. The Author.
The pine moth of Nantucket, Retina frustrana. The Author.
Secard, H. Elements de zoologie, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, reports, A?; C+; C®; D3, Vol. 1;
Atlas to D8, Vols. land 2; D®; I‘; T2. The Commissioners.
Progress of the survey of the anthracite coal fields.
Memorandum for the information of the legislature.
Report of the Board of Commissioners to the Legislature, January 1, 1883.
H. C. Lewis.
Seebohm, H. A history of British birds. Parts 1 and 2.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Selenka, E. Studien iiber Entwickelungsgeschichte der Thiere. les H.,
1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Semper, C. Reisen im Archipel der Philippien, 2er Th., 3er Bd.; 6H., 4er
Bd.; le Abth,, le Hilfte. Wilson Fund.
Servain, George. Histoire malacologique du Lac Balaton en Hongrie, 1881.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Shaler, N.S.,and W. M. Davis, Illustrations of the earth’s surface. Glaciers.
1881. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Shepard, Charles Upham. On Aerolites. Catalogue of meteoric collection.
The Author.
Sheridan, P. H. Report of an exploration of parts of Wyoming, Idaho and
Montana, in August and September, 1882. The Author.
Shufelct, R. W. Contributions to the anatomy of birds. The Author.
Smithsonian Institution. List of foreign correspondents, corrected to January,
1882. Additions and corrections to same to January, 1883.
Annual report of the Board of Regents for the year 1881.
Miscellaneous collections, Vols. 22-27. The Institution.
Soler, Sebastian Vidal y. Inspeccion general de Montes. Comission de la
Flora forestal. Resefia de la flora del Archipelago Filipino. The Author.
Soret, J. L., et E. Sarasin. Sur la polarisation rotatoire du quartz. 1882.
I. V. Williamson Fund,
South African Museum, report of the Trustees, 1882. The Curator,
Sowerby, G. B. Thesaurus conchyliorum, Pts. 39 and 40. Wilson Fund.
State Librarian of Iowa, biennial report, July 1, 1883. The Author.
State School of Mines, Golden, Colorado, catalogue of the, 1882-83.
The Trustees.
Statistische Mittheilungen iiber den Civilstand der Stadt Frankfurt a. M. im
Jahre 1882.
Stearns, R. E.C. On the history and distribution of fresh-water mussels.
Verification of the habitat of Conrad’s Mytilus bifurcatus. The Author.
Stearns, W. A., and E. Coues. New England bird life. Parts I and II.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Stewart, Balfour. Lesson in elementary physics, 1878. I. V. Williamson Fund,
Stevenson, W. C., Jr. Ellis North American Fungi. Alphabetical Index.
Centuries I—X. The Author.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 357
Suess, E. Das Antlitz der Erde. le. Abth. 18853. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Surgeon General of the Navy, sanitary and statistical report of the, for the
years 1880 and 1881. Navy Department.
Svenonius, F. V. Bidragtill Norrbottens Geologi. Geological Survey of Sweden.
Sveriges Geologiska Undersokning. Ser. Aa, No’s 70, 80, 81, 82, 85, 85, 86;
Ser. Bb. 1, 2; Ser. C. 45-52. Sjunde Hiftet. Bladen 19, 20 and 21.
Ramnis, ‘‘ Wargarda”’ och “ Ulricehamn.”’ 7 sheets.
Geological Survey of Sweden.
Thomson, C. O. The modern polytechnic school, 1883. The Author.
Tischner, Aug. The sun changes its position in space, therefore it cannot be
regarded as being ‘‘in a condition of rest.” The Author.
Tonks, Edmund. General index to Latin names and synonyms of the plants
depicted in the first hundred and seven volumes of Curtis’s Botanical
Magazine, 1883. Thos. Meehan, through the Botanical Section.
Trouessart, E. L. Catalogue systematique, synonymique et geographique des
mammifeéres vivants et fossils. 38 Nos. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Tschermak, G. Lehrbuch der Mineralogie. 1 and 2 Lief., 1881.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Tryon, Geo. W., Jr. Manual of conchology. Pts. 17-20.
Structural and systematic conchology. I, II, 1883. The Author.
United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, report of the superintendent of the,
showing the progress of the work during the fiscal years ending with
June, 1880 and 1881. Treasury Department.
United States Fish Commission. Bulletin of the, Vol. II, 1882.
The Commission.
United States Geological and Geographical Survey of the Territories, 1878.
2 vols. and atlas, 1883. Department of the Interior.
University of Kiel. Fifteen theses, 1881-82. The University.
University of Louvain. Thirteen theses, 1881-82. The University.
University of Pennsylvania, annual reports of the Provost and Treasurer,
Oct. 1, 18838. The Trustees.
University of Wiirzburg. Fifteen theses. The University.
Veth, P. J. Midden-Sumatra, 1877-1879. Four vols. in seven, and atlas, folio.
Jos. Jeanes.
Vogt, C. Lecons sur les animaux utiles, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Vogt und Specht. Die Saugetiere in Wort und Bild. Lief.1-20. Jos. Jeanes.
Vogt, C., und Emil Yong. Traité d’anatomie comparée pratique. Ire and 2e.
Thy. J. V. Williamson Fund.
Wachsmuth, Chas. On a new genus and species of Blastoids. Descriptions
of some new Blastoids from the Hamilton Group. The Author.
Wachsmuth, Chas., and F. Springer. Remarks on Glyptocrinus and Reteo-
crinus, two genera of Silurian Crinoids. The Authors.
Wainwright, Samuel. Scientific sophisms, 1883. Rey. H. C. McCook.
War Department Library, alphabetical catalogue, 1882. The Department.
Warren, Charles. Answer to inquiries about the United States Bureau of
Education, 1883. Department of the Interior.
Warren, Maj.-Gen. @. K. Findings of the Court of Inquiry in the case of.
The War Department.
Watson, Rey. R. Boog Mollusca of H. M. S. “Challenger”? Expedition.
Pts. 15 and 16. The Author.
Watson, Sereno. Contributions to American botany, XI, 1883. The Author.
Weismann, Aug. Die Entstellung der Sexualzellen bei den Hydromedusen.
Text and atlas. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Westerlund, Carl Agardh. Monographia Clausiliarum in regione paleoarctica
viventium. 1878. Jos. Jeanes.
Westwood and Satchell. Biblotheca piscatoria. 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Wesleyan University. Eleventh arnual report of the curator of the museum.
Tke Author.
398 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
White, Chas. A. Review of the non-marine fossil mollusca of North America.
1883. The Author.
White, F. Buchanan. Some thoughts on the distribution of British Butterflies.
Observations sur larmure génitale de plusieurs espéces francaises de
Zygaenide.
List of Hemiptera collected in the Amazons by Prof. J. W. H. Trail, M. A.,
in the years 1875-1875, with descriptions of the new species.
Descriptions of New Hemiptera. I.
The mountain Lepidoptera of Britain, their distribution and its causes.
Zoology of the Voyage of H. M. S. Challenger. Part XIX. Report on
the Pelagic Hemiptera.
On the male genital armature of European Rhopalocera.
On the botany of the ‘-Jardin”’ of Mont Blanc. Notice of two messes
new to science. The Authors.
White, Rev. W. F. Antsandtheir ways. London,n.d. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Whitehouse, F. Cope. Is Fingal’s Cave artificial ? The Author.
Williams, Alb., Jr. Department of the Interior. U. S. Geological Survey.
Mineral Resources of the United States. Department of the Interior.
Windeyer, Justice. Commemorative address on the celebration of the 50th
anniversary of the Sidney Mechanics’ School of Arts, March 22, 1883.
The Author.
Wollaston, T. Vernon. ‘Testacea Atlantica. 1878. Jos. Jeanes.
Woman’s Medical College of Pennsylvania. 34th annual announcement.
The College.
Yarrel, Wm. A history of British birds. 4th Ed., by Alfred Newton. Parts
16 and 17, I. V. Williamson Fund.
Yellowstone National Park. 1883. F. V. Hayden.
Zincken, C.F. Die geologischen Horizonte der fossilen Kohlen. 1883.
1. V. Williamson Fund.
Zittel. Handbuch der Palzontologie. I, 2 Abth., 2 Lief.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Zoological Record. XVIII, 1881. Wilson Fund.
JOURNALS AND PERIODICALS.
Amsterdam. K.Akademie van Wettenschappen. Verslagen en Mededeelingen,
Afd. Letterkunde, 2e Reeks, 11 Deel, Naamen-en Zaakregister, I-XII.
Afd. Naturkunde, 2e Reeks, 17 Deel.
Jaarboek, 1881.
Processen-Verbal, Afd. Nat. Mei 1881—Apr. 1882.
Verhandlungen. Afd. Nat. Deel 22. Afd Letterk., Deel 15. The Society.
Angers. Société d’études scientifiques. 1l1me and 12me Années. The Society.
Auxerre. Société des Science historiques et naturelles de Yonne. Bulletin,
Vol. 36me. Tables analytiques, 1867-78. The Society.
Baltimore. American Chemical Journal, IV, 5—V, 5. The Editor.
American Journal of Mathematics, pure and applied, V, 1—VI, 2.
The Editor.
Johns Hopkins University. Report, 7th year. The President.
Peabody Institute. 16th annual report. The Trustees.
Basel. Schweizerische paliontologische Gesellschaft, IX. The Society.
Batavia. Natuurkundig- Vereen in Nederlandsch Indie. Natuurkundig
Tijdschrift, 8e Ser. Deel 2. The Society.
Belfast. Naturalists’ Field Club. Annual report, Ser. 2, Vol. II. Part 2.
The Society.
Natural History and Philosophical Society. Proceedings, 1881-82, 1882-83.
The Society.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 359
Berlin. Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte, 47er Jahr., 6; 48er Jahrg., 4—49er
Jahr., 4. The Editor.
Botanischer Jahresbericht (Just), Ter Jahr., le Abth., 2 H.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Deutsche botanische Gesellschaft, Statutes und Reglement, 1883.
The Society.
Deutsche geologische Gesellschaft. Zeitschrift, XXXIV, 2—XXXV, 1.
The Society.
Entomologische Verein. Deutscher entomologische Zeitschrift. 27er
Jahr., 1; 2. The Society.
Entomologischer Verein in Berlin. Berliner entomologische Zeitschrift.
Zier Bde, Lace The Society.
Garten-Zeitung (Wittmack), 1882, 1-12. The Editor.
Gesellschaft Naturforschende Freunde. Sitzungs-Berichte, 1882.
; The Society.
Jabrbucher fiir wissenschaftliche Botanik (Pringsheim), XIV, 2.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
K. Preussischen Akademie der Wissenschaften. Abhandlungen, mathe-
matische, 1882; physikalische, 1882.
Monatsbericht, 1836, 1854, 1855, 1856 and December, 1877.
Sitzungsberichte, 1882, XXXIX-LIV—1883, I-XXXVII. The Society.
Der Naturforscher, XV, 27-XVI, 39. The Editor.
Naturz Novitates, 1882, No. 21—1883, No. 19. The Publishers.
Zeitschrift fiir die gesammten Naturwissenschaften, LV, LVI, 1, 2.
The Editor.
Bern. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen, 1030-1063. The Society.
Besangon. Académie des Sciences, beiles-lettres et arts, 1882. The Society.
Beziers. Société d’ étude des sciences naturelles. Bulletin, 5e année.
The Society.
Bistritz. Gewerbeschule. Jahresbericht. Ser. The Director.
Bonn. Archiy fiir mikroskopische Anatomie, XXII, 1-XXIII, 1.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Naturhistorische Verein. Verhandlungen, Supplement, 39er Jahrg. 2es H.
The Society.
Bordeaux. Académie nationale des sciences, belles-lettres et arts. Actes, 3e
Ser., 42e An. The Society.
Société des sciences physique et naturelles. Mémoires, 2e Ser. 1V, 3—
V, 2. The Society.
Boston. American Academy of arts and sciences. Proceedings, XVIII.
j The Society.
American monthly microscepical journal. III, 12—IV,11. The Editor.
Scientific and literary gossip, I, 2. The Editor.
Science record, II, 1. The Editor.
Society of natural history. Proceedings, XXI, p. 433—XXII, p. 224;
also, XXI, Part 4and XXII, Part 1. The Society.
Zoolcgical Society. Quarterly journal, I, 3—II, 4. The Society.
Braunschweig. Archiv fiir Anthropologie, XIV, 3, 4. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Bremen. Naturwissenschaftliche Verein. Abbandlungen, VIII, 1. The Society.
Briinn. Naturforscheuden Verein. Verbandlungen, XX.
Bericht der Meteorologischen Commission, 1881. The Society.
- Bruxelles. Académie royale des sciences, des lettres et des beaux-arts de
Belgique. Bulletin, année, VI, 7 and 8. The Society.
Société Belge de microscopie. Bulletin, 25 Noy., 1883—Vol. IX, II.
The Society.
Société entomologique de Belgique. Compte-Rendu, Ser. III, Ne. 29, 37.
The Society.
Société malacologique. Annales XIV, XVI. Proces-Verbaux, 5 Feb.—
2 Juil, 1882. The Society.
360 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
Buda-Pest. Gazette de Hongrie, II, 34—IV, 28. Hungarian National Museum.
M. T. Akademia, III. Osgt4ly4nak Kiilon Kiadvanya, 1881, 1, 2; 1882, 3.
Ungarische Revue, 1882. 4H. 7-10. The Society.
Ungarischen National-Museum. Naturhistorische Heft. Bd. I-VI.
The Director.
Buenos Aires. Sociedad Cientifica Argentina. Anales XV, 1-6—XVI, 1-4.
The Society.
Caen. Académie Nationale des sciences, arts et belles-lettres. Mémoires, 1882.
The Society.
Société Linnéenne de Normandie. Bulletin, 3e Ser., Vols. 5 and 6.
The Society.
Calcutta. Asiatic Society of Bengal. Proceedings, 1802, No. 1; 1883, No. 6.
Journal. Vol. 50, extra number to Part 1; Vol. 51, Pt. 2, Nos. 2-4;
Volpe eet elee Nos elses. The Society.
Another copy. Isaac Lea.
Stray Feathers, X, 4, 5. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Cambridge. Appalachian Mountain Club. Appalachia, III, 2. The Club.
Entomological Club, Annual reports, 1882. The Club.
Harvard University. Library Bulletin, Nos. 24-26. The Trustees.
Museum of Comparative Zoology. Memoirs, VIII, 2; IX, 1.
Report, 188-81; 1881-82.
Bulletin, VII, 9,10; X, 2-6; XI, 1, 2. The Director.
Nuttall Ornithological Club. Bulletin, VIII, 1-4. The Club.
Peabody Museum of American Archeology and Ethnology. Annual
report, 15th. The Director.
Science, Nos. 1-42 I. V. Williamson Fund.
Cassel. Malakozoologische Blatter, VI, 1-5. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Verein fiir Naturkunde. Bericht, 29er, 30er. The Society.
Catania. Accademia Gioenia di Scienze Naturali. Atti, 8a Ser., T. 16.
The Society.
Cherbourg. Société nationale des sciences naturelles. Memoires, T. 23.
The Society.
Chicago. American Antiquarian, V, 1-3. The Editor.
American Chemical Review, III, 2. The Editor.
Christiania. Archiv for Mathematik og Naturvidenskab, VII, 2—VIII, 2.
The Editor.
Cincinnati. Ohio Mechanics’ Institute. Scientific Proceedings, I, 4—II, 2.
The Institute.
The Paleontologist, No. 7. The Editor.
Society of Natural History. Journal VI, 1-3. The Society.
Zoological Society, 9th annual report. The Society.
Congres internationai des Orientalistes. Compte-rendu. T. 3me.
Smithsonian Inst.
Copenhagen. K. D. Videnskabernes Selskab. Oversigt, 1882, No. 2; 1883,
NOI:
Skrifter, 6me Ser., I, 6; II, 3. The Society.
Naturhistoriske Forening. Videnskabelige Meddelelser, 1882, I.
y The Society.
Société Royale des Antiquaires du Nord. Mémoires, n. s., 1882-83-84.
Tillaeg, 1881. The Society.
Crawfordville. Botanical Gazette, VII, 12—VIIT, 11. The Editor. |
Danzig. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Schriften, n. f., V. 4. The Society.
Davenport. Academy of Sciences. Proceedings, III, 3. The Sociecy.
Dijon. Académie des Sciences, Arts et Belles-lettres. Mémoires, An.
1881-82. The Society.
Dorpat. Naturforscher Gesellschaft. Sitzungsberichte, VI, 2.
Archiv fiir die Naturkunde Liv.-Ehst-und Kurlands, le Ser., IX, 1, 2;
2e Ser., VIII, 4. The Society.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 361
Dresden. K. Leop. Carol.-Deutschen Academie der Naturforscher. Nova
Acta, Vols. 42 and 43.
Leopoldina. H. 17. The Society.
K. Mineralogisch-geologische und prehistorische Museum. Mitthie-
lungen. 5 H. The Director.
Neaturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft Isis, 1882, Juli; 1883, Juni.
The Society.
Dublin. Royal Irish Academy. Proceedings, Science, III, 9, 10; Polite
Literature, II, 4.
Transactions, Science, XXVIII, 11-138; Polite Literature, XXVII, 5,
The Society.
Edinburgh. Botanical Society. Transactions and Proceedings, XIV, 3.
The Society.
Geological Society, Transactions, IV, 2. The Society.
Physical Society, Proceedings, 1881-82. The Society. -
Scottish Naturalist, n. s. Nos. 1 and 2.
Florence. Nuovo Giornale Botanico Italiano. Caruel, XIV, 1—XYV, 4.
The Editor.
R. Acsademia Petrarca di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti in Arezzo. Adunanza
solenne in onore di Guido Menaco; di Andrea Cesalpino; Studi di
Guido Monaco; a Guido Monaco Aretino; Musica e Civilta Tosi.
The Society.
Frankfurt a. M. Aerztliche Verein. Jahresbericht, XXVI.
Deutschen Malakozoologische Gesellschaft. Jahrbucher, X, 1-4
Nachrichtsblatt, 188z, No. 11; 1883, Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8. The Society.
Senckenbergischen Naturforschenden Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen, XIII.
1 and 2,
Bericht, 1881-82: The Society.
Gand. Archives de Biologie. Van Beneden und Van Bambeke. III, 3—IV,
Ue Hee Williamson Fund.
Genoa. Societa di Letture e Conversazioni Scientifiche, Giornale VI, 9—VII,
10 The Society.
Giessen. Jahresbericht iiber die Fortschritte der Chemie, Fittica. 1881.
Nos. 1--4. The Editor.
Oberhessische Gesellschaft fiir Natur- und Heilkunde. 22er Bericht.
Glasgow. Geological Society. Transactions, VII, 1. The Society.
Natural History Society. Proceedings, V, 1. The Society.
Philosophical Society. Proceedings, XIII, 2. The Society.
Gottingen. K. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Nachrichten, 1882.
The Society.
Gotha. Dr. A. Petermann’s Mittheilungen aus Justus Perthes’ geographischer
Anstalt, 1869-1875; 1876, 1-6; 1877, 7-12; 1878-1882; 1883, 1-10.
Erganzungsheft, 52-73. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Graz. Verein der Aerzte in Steiermark. Mittheilungen, 1882. The Society.
Naturwissenschaftliche Verein fiir Steiermark. Mittheilungen, 1882.
The Society.
Halifax. Nova Scotian Institute of Natural Sciences. Proceedings and Trans-
actions, IV, 4. The Society.
Halle. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen, XVI, 1.
Bericht, 1882. The Society.
Hamburg. Naturwissenschaftliche Verein. Abhandlungen, VII, 2.
Verhandlungen, n. f., VI. The Society.
Hannover. Naturhistorische Gesellschaft. Jahresbericht 31 & 32. The Society.
Harlem, Musée Teyler. Archives, 2e Ser., 3e Partie. The Director.
Société Hollandaise des Sciences. Archives, XVII, 3—XVIII, 1.
The Society.
Heidelberg. Naturhistorisch-medicinische Verein. Verhandlungen, n. f.,
II, 2. The Society.
24
362 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
Helsingfors. Finska Vetenskaps-Societeten. Ofversigt, XXIV.
Bidrag, 37, 38.
Acta, XII. The Society.
Hermannstadt. Siebenburgische Verein fiir Naturwissenschaften. Verhand-
lungen und Mittheilungen, XXXII. The Society.
Jena. Medicinisch-naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft. Zeitschrift XVI, n.
f., 1-3.
Sitzungsberichte, 1882. The Society.
Kansas City. Kansas City Review, VI, 8—VII, 7. The Editor.
Kiel. Universitit. Schriften, Bd 28er. The University.
Klagenfurt. Landesmuseum. Carinthia, 1885, 1-7. The Director.
Konigsberg. Physikalisch-dkonomische Gesellschaft. Schriften, XXIII, 1, 2.
The Society.
Lausanne. Société Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles. Bulletin, No. 88.
- The Society.
Leeds. Philosophical and Literary Society. Annual Report, 1882-83.
The Society.
Leiden. Nederlandische Dierkundige Vereeniging. Tijdschrift, Deel VI, 1;
Supplement, Deel I, 1. The Society.
Leipzig. Archiv fiir Anatomieund Physiologie. Anatomische Abtheilungen,
1882, 4-6 H.; 1883, 1-3 RB. Physiologische Abtheilungen, 1852, 5 & 6
H.; 1883, 1-3 H. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Botanischer Jahrbiicher. Engler. III, 5—IV, 5. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Fiirstlich Jablonowski’schen Gesellschaft. Jahresbericht, 1882.
The Society.
Jahresberichte. iiber die Fortschritte der Anatomie und Physiologie.
Hoffmann und Schwalbe, X, 2 Abth.; XI, 1 & 2 Abth., 1 H.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Jahrbiicher fiir wissenschaftliche Botanik, XIII, 4; XIV, 1.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Journal fiir Ornithologie, XXX, 4—XXXI, 3. I. V. Williamson Fund.
K. Siichsischen Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Abhandlungen, XII,
7 & 8.
Bericht iiber die Verhandlungen, 1881. The Society.
Morphologische Jahrbuch, VIII, 3—IX, 1. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Sitzungsberichte, 1882. The Society.
Zeitschrift fiir Krystallographie und Mineralogie. Groth. VII, 4—VIII,
3. I. V. Williamson Fund,
Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. XXXVII, 4—XXXIX, 1.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Zoologischer Anzeiger. Nos 125-152. The Editor.
Zoologische Station zu Neapel. Mittheilungen, IV, 1-3.
Zoologischer Jahresbericht, I—IV. The Director.
Lisbon. Academia Real das Sciencias. Journal de Sciencias mathematicas
phys. e nat. V, 24-32
Sessao publica, 1880.
Memorias. Classe des Sciencias mathemat. phys. et nat. n. s. V, 2;
Wi, 2. The Society.
Associacao dos Engenheiros Civis Portuguezas. Revista de Obras publicas
e minas, Nos. 154-164. The Society.
London. Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 1882, No. 61—1883,
No. 71. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Astronomical Register, Nos. 240-251. I. V. Williamson Fund.
British Association for the Advancement of Science. Report, 52d meeting.
The Association.
Chemical Society. Journal, Nos. 241-252. The Society.
Curtis’s Botanical Magazine, Nos. 1149-1161. I. V. Williamson Fund.
The Electrician. X, 1—XII, 1. The Editor.
Entomological Society. Transactions. 1888, I, II, III. The Society.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 363
The Gardener’s Chronicle, Nos. 464-516. The Editor.
Geological Magazine, Nos. 222-233. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Geological Society. Quarterly Journal, Nos. 152-155 and Lists.
The Society.
Hardwicke’s Science Gossip. Nos. 216-227. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Ibis. 5th ser., 1-4, and Supplement. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Journal of Anatomy and Physiology. XVII, 2—XVIII, 1.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Journal of Botany, British and Foreign. Nos. 240-251.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Journal of Conchology. III, 10—IV, 3. The Editor.
Journal of Physiology. Michael Foster. IV, 1-3, and Supplement.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Journal of Science. 3d Ser., No. 108-119. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Knowledge. Nos. 53-104. The Editor.
Linnean Society, Journal, Botany, Nos. 122-129; Zoology, Nos. 95-100.
Transactions, 2d ser. Zoology, II, 6-8; Botany, II, 2-5.
Lists, 1881 and 1882.
Proceedings, March, 1883. The Society.
London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosphical Magazine, 1882, No. 90—
1883, No. 101. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Mineralogical Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Mineralogical
Magazine and Journal, Nos. 23 and 24. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Nature. Nos. 682-733. The Editor.
Notes and Queries. No. 39. The Editor.
Quarterly Journal Microscopical Science, n. s., No. 89—5th ser. No. 92.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Journal, XIV, 4—
XV, 3. The Society.
Royal Geographical Society. Proceedings, IV, 10—V,10. The Society.
Royal Institution of Great Britain. Proceedings, IX, 4—X, 1, and
Lists. The Society.
Royal Microscopical Society. Journal, 2d ser., II, 6—III, 5. The Society.
Same, I, 3; II, 1. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Royal Society. Proceedings, Nos. 221-226.
Philosophical Transactions, Vol. 173, Nos. 2-4; Vol. 174, No. 1.
Catalogue of Library, II. The Society.
Scientific Roll, Nos. 10, 11. The Editor.
Society of Arts. Journal, Vol. 30. The Society.
Society for Physical Research. Proceedings, I, 2, 3. The Society.
Triibner’s American and Oriental Literary Record, Nos. 177-190.
The Publishers.
Zoological Society. Proceedings, 1881, No. 4; 1882, Nos. 38, 4;. 1883,
Nos. 1 and 2.
Transactions, Vol. X, 2; XI, 7 and 8.
List of Fellows, 1883. The Society.
The Zoologist. Nos. 72-83. I. V. Williamson Fund.
London, Can. The Canadian Entomologist. XIV, 10—XV, 9. The Editor.
Louisville. Polytechnic Society of Kentucky. Reports and Proceedings,
April 16, 1883. ‘The Society.
Louvain. Université Catholique. Annuaire, 47e Année.
Fourteen Theses. The University.
Lund. University. Acta, XV, XVI.
Accessions-Katalog, 1879-1881. The University.
Lyon. Académie des Sciences, Belles-Lettres et Arts. Mémoires, Classe des
Sciences. XXV. Classe des Lettres, XX. The Society.
Société d’Agriculture, Histoire Naturelle et Arts utiles. Annales, 5me
ser. III, IV. The Society.
Société Linnéenne. Annales, n. s. XXVIII, XXIX. The Society.
364 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
Madison. Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters. Transactions,
' The Society.
Madrid. Memorial of Engineers. An. 37, No. 22—An. 38, No. 23.
Melbourne. Royal Society of Victoria. Transactions and Proceedings, II—
XVIII. The Society.
Metz. Academie. Mémoires, 1879-80. The Society.
Société d'histoire naturelle. Bulletin, me Cahier, 2e Partie. The Society.
Mexico. Ministerio de Fomento. Anales, VI. The Ministry.
Museo nacional. Anales, III, 1-4. The Director.
Revista Cientifica Mexicana, Nos. 23-25. The Editor.
Sociedad Mexicana de Historia Natural. La Naturaleza, VI, 4-16.
The Society.
Milan. R. Istituto Lombardo di Scienze e Lettere. Rendiconti. Ser. II, Vols.
13 and 14.
Memorie, XIV, 3.
Programma, 1882. The Society.
Regio Istituto technico superiore. Programma 1869-70, 1872-73, 1875-76,
1882-83, 1883-84. The Institute.
Montreal. The Canadian Naturalist, n.s., 1V, 2; X, 7 and 8. The Editor.
Numismatic and Antiquarian Society, Canadian Antiquarian, XI, 2.
The Society.
Moscow. Société Impériale des Naturalistes. Bulletin, 1881, No. 3—1883,
No. 1. Tables Generale 1829-1881.
Nouveaux Mémoires, XIV, 2. The Society.
Miinchen. Gesellschaft fiir Anthropologie, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte.
Beitrige zur Anthropologie und Urgeschichte Bayerns. V, 1, 2.
The Society.
K. B. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Sitzungsberichte, 1882, Nos. 2-5
The Society.
K. Sternwart. Beobachtungen, 1882. The Director.
Nancy. Société des Sciences. Bulletin, ser. 2, III, 13, 14. The Society.
Naples. R. Accademia delle Scienze Fisische e Mathematiche, Atti, VII—
1X.
Rendiconti, Anni XV—XXI. The Society.
L’ Esplorazione, I, 1 The Editor,
R. Istituto d’ Incoraggiamento alle Scienze Naturali, economiche e techno-
logiche. Atti, 2a Ser., I, III, V—VIII; 3e Ser., I.
Relazione, 1872, 1873, 1880. The Society.
Neubrandenburg. Verein der Freunde der Naturgeschichte in Mecklenburg.
Archiv, 35er und 36er Jahrg. The Society.
New Haven. The American Journal of Science. 1882, No. 144—1883, No.
155. The Editor.
New York. Academy of Sciences. Transactions, I, 5—II, 2. The Society.
American Bookseller, XIV, 5. The Publisher.
American Geographical Society. Bulletin, 1882, No. 2—1883, No. 2.
The Society.
American Journal of Microscopy, VI, 10-12. The Editor.
American Monthly Microscopical Journal, IV, 1-2. The Editor.
American Museum of Natural History. 14th Annual report, Bulletin
No. 4. The Director.
Forest and Stream. XIX, No. 18—XXI, No. 17. The Editor.
Journal of the Telegraph, XV, 353, 354. The Editor.
Library Journal, V1, 11—VIII, 8. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Linnean Society. Transactions, I. The Society.
New York Medical Journal, XXXVI, No. 6. Weekly Issue, XXXVII,
1-21. The Editor.
Popular Science Monthly, Jan.—Dec., 1883. The Editor.
Torrey Botanical Club. Bulletin, IX, 12—X, 9. The Society.
1883. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 365
Offenbach am Main. Verein fiir Naturkunde. 22er und 23er Bericht.
The Society...
Orleans. Société d’Agriculture, Sciences, Belles-Lettres et Arts. Memoires,
2e ser., XXIII, 3, 4. The Society.
Palermo. II Naturalista Siciliano, I[, 12—III, 2. The Editor.
Societ& di Acclimazione ed Agricoltura in Sicilia. Giornale ed Atti XXII,
1—XXII, 8.
Memoria Scientifica premiata per concorso dal Congresso Agrario nel
1875. The Society.
Societ& di Scienze Naturali et economiche. Giornale, XV. The Society.
Paris. Annales des Mines, 8me ser., I, 4—III, 2. Table des Matiéres de la
Vile serie. Minister of Public Works.
Annales des Sciences Géologiques, XIV, 1. The Editor.
Annales des Sciences Naturelles. Zoologie et Paléontologie, XIV, 1—
XV, 4. Botanique, XIV, 4—XVI, 5. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Archives de Zoologie experimentale et generale, 1882, No. 4—1883, No. 2.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Ecole polytechnique. Journal, 5le et 52e Cah. The Director.
Institution ethnographique. Annuaire, 1878.
Comptes-Rendu des Séances, 1876-77. Smithsonian Institution.
Journal de Conchyliologie, XXII, 3—XXIII, 2. The Editor.
Journal de Micrographie, 7me An., Nos. 1, 2, 7-9. The Editor.
Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle. Nouvelle Archives, 2e sér., V, 1.
The Museum.
Le Naturaliste, Nos. 22—45. The Editor.
Revue d@’Ethnographie, II, 1-4. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Revue Geographique internationale, Nos. 92-95. The Editor.
Revue Internationale des Sciences, 1882, No. 11—1883, No. 8. The Editor.
Revue Scientifique de la France et de |’Etranger, 3e ser., 2e An., No. 21—
8e An., No. 20. The Editor.
Société d’Acclimatation. Bulletin, IX, 10—X, 9. The Society.
Société Americaine de France. Annuaire, 1682. The Society.
Société des Antiquaires de Picardie. Memoires, VII.
Bulletins, XIV, 1880-82. The Society.
Société Botanique de France. Bulletin, Revue Bibl. E. Session Extraor-
dinaire, Fontainbleu. The Society.
Société Entomologique de France Annales, 6me Ser. I and II.
The Society.
Société Ethnegraphique. Actes 1875, 1877.
Annuaire, 1876. Smithsonian Institution.
Société Geologique de France. Bulletin, VIII, 7; X, 3-6; XI, 1-3, 5, 6.
The Society.
Société Minéralogique de France. Bulletin, V, 8—VI, 6. The Society.
Société nationale d’ Agriculture de France. Bulletin, An., 1882, No. 10—
1883, No. 7. The Society.
Société Scientifique de la Jeunesse. T.,II-IV. F. V. Hayden.
Société Zoologique. Bulletin, T., 111; 2e An., 6e Partie; 4e An., 5e and
6e; 5e An., 3e and 4e; 7e An., 2e, 4e; 5e, 5e bis and 6e; 8e An., le-3e.
The Society.
Philadelphia. Academy of Natural Sciences. Proceedings, 1882, I1I—1883, I.
Amateur Naturalist, I, 5, 6. The Editor.
The American, I, 7. The Editor.
American Journal of Medical Sciences. Jan —Mct., 1883. The Editor.
American Journal of Pharmacy. Dec., 1882—Noy., 1883. The Editor.
American Naturalist, XVI, 12—XVII, 11. The Editor.
American Pharmaceutical Association. Proceedings, 30th annual meeting.
The Society.
American Philosophical Society. Proceedings, Nos. 112 and 113.
Transactions, XVI, 1, The Society.
366 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.
College of Pharmacy. Alumni Association, 19th annual report.
The Society.
The Dental Cosmos, XXIV, 12—XXV. 11. The Editor.
Engineers’ Club. Proceedings, III, 3, 4; List of Members. Vhe Club.
Franklin Institute. Journal, Nos. 685-696. The Society.
The Gardener’s Monthly, Dec., 1882—Nov., 1883. The Editor.
Historical Society of Pennsylvania. Pennsylvania Magazine of History
and Biography, VI, 3—VII. 3. The Society.
Library Company of Philadelphia. Bulletin, July. The Directors.
Literary Era, I, 1-11. The Publishers.
Medical News and Abstract, No. 468. The Editor.
Medical Register, I, 11: II, 1, 3-5. ‘the Editor.
Mercantile Library Bulletin, I, 2-4. The Directors.
Naturalists’ Leisure Hour, Nov., 1882—July, 1883. The Publisher.
Wagner Free Institute of Science. Announcement, 1883. The Institute.
Zoological Society, 11th annual report. The Society.
Pisa Societa Malacologica Italiana. Bullettino, V—VIII. The Society.
Societa Toscana di Scienze Naturali. Atti, Adunanza del Nov. 2, 1882.
Memorie, V, 2. : The Society.
Port of Spain. Scientific Association of Trinidad. Proceedings, Part 12.
The Society.
Poughkeepsie. Vassar Brothers’ Institute. Transactions, I. The Institute.
Prag, K. B. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Sitzungsberichte, 1881.
Jahresbericht, 1881, 1882.
Abhandlungen, 6e Folge, XI. The Society.
Princeton. E.M. Museum of Geology and Archeology of the College of New
Jersey. Bulletin, No. 3.
First annual report, 1882. The Curator.
Quebec. Literary and Historical Society. Sessions of 1882—83. The Society.
Regensburg. K. B. Botanische Gesellschaft. Flora, n. r., 40er Jahrg.
The Society.
Zoologisch-mineralogische Verein. Correspondenz-Blatt, 36er Jahrg.
The Society.
Riga. Naturforscher-Verein. Correspondenzblatt, 25er Jahrg. The Society.
Rio de Janeiro. Museo Nacional. Archivos, IV and V. The Director.
Observatorie Impériale. Bulletin astronomique et météorologique, 1882,
No. 10—1883, No. 7.
Annales, I. The Observatory.
Rochester. Ward’s Natural Science Bulletin, II, 1. The Publisher.
Rome. R. Accademia dei Lincei. Atti, VII 1-14. The Society.
Societd degli Spettroscopisti Italiani. Memorie XII, 8-11. The Society.
Saint John. Natural History Society of New Brunswick. Bulletin, No. 2.
The Society.
St. Louis. Missouri Historical Society, No. 7. The Society.
St. Petersburg. K. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Mémoires XXX, 2-11;
XXXI, 1 and 2.
Bulletin, XXVIII, 1, 3. The Society.
Horti Petropolitani. Acta VIII, 1. The Society.
Physikalische Central Observatorium. Annalen, 1881, No: 2. The Director.
Societas Entomologica. Horz XV, XVI. The Society.
Springfield. Illinois Industrial University, 11th report, 1882. The Trustees.
Staunton. The Virginias, III, 11—1V, 11. The Editor.
Stockholm, Acta Mathematica, I, 1 The Editor.
Entomologisk Tidskrift, III, 4. The Editor.
K. Vetenskaps Akademiens. Bihang VII, 1, 2. The Society.
Stuttgart. Humboldt, I, 1—II, 12. I. V. Williamson Fund,
Kosmos, VI, 8—VII, 6. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Neues Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie, Geologie und Palzontologie, 1882, II, 3,
Beilage Bd. 2; 1883, I, 1-3, Beilage Bd. 3; II, 1, 2. The Editor.
1883. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 367
Switzerland, Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen, 1881-82.
The Society.
Sydney. Linnean Society of New South Wales. Proceedings, VII, 2—VIII, 2.
The Society.
Royal Society of New South Wales. Journal and Proceedings, XV.
The Society.
Tasmania. Royal Society. Papers, Proceedings and Reports, 1881.
The Society.
Torino. Accademia Reale delle Scienze. Atti, XVIII, 1-3. The Society.
Toronto. Entomological Society. Annual Reports, 1878, 1882.
General Index, 1870-1882. The Society.
Toulouse. Académie des Sciences, Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres. Mémoires
EWS -1{2.
Annuaire 1882-83. The Society.
Sociécé d’ Histoire Naturelle. Bulletin, 15me and 16me Année. The Society.
United States. American Association fur the Advancement of Science. Pro-
ceedings, XXXI, 1, 2. The Society.
Society of Naturalists of the Eastern United States. Constitution and By-
Laws, 1883 The Society.
Upsal. Observatoire de l’Université. Bulletin Meteorologique, XIV.
The Director.
Urbana. Illinois Industrial University. Catalogue and Circular. The Trustees.
Utrecht. K. Nederlandsch Meteorologisch Instituut. Jaarboek, 1882.
The Institute.
Venice. L’Ateneo Veneto. Ser. VII, Vol. I, 6; 11,1, 2. The Society,
R. Istituto Veneto di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti. Atti, Ser. VI, T. 1-10,
Append. VIII, 1-10. The Society.
Vienna. Anthropologischen Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen XII, 3—XIII, 1.
The Society.
K. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Sitzungsberichte, 85 Bd., ler Abth,
I-V; 2e Abth., III-V; 3e Abth., I-V; 86 Bd., 2e Abth., I; 3e Abth.,
I, II. Register 81 bis 85 Bd.
Centralblatt fiir die gesammte Therapie, I, 11. The Editor.
K. K. geologische Reichsanstalt. Jahrbuch 1882, No. 4—1883, No. 3.
Verhandlungen, 1882, No. 1Z2—1883, No. 12. The Bureau.
Mineralogische und Petrographische Mittheilungen, Tschermak. n. f., I-
IV, V, 1-4. Jos. Jeanes.
Wiener Illustrirte Garten-Zeitung, 1882, No. 10—1883, No. 7. The Editor.
K. K. zoologisch-botanische Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen, XXXII.
The Society.
Zoologische Institut. Arbeiten, IV, 3; V, 1. The Director.
Washington. Philosophical Society. Bulletin, Vols. 4 and 5 The Society.
United States Fish Commission. Bulletin, Vol. I, and 1882, p. 33—III,
p17. The Commission.
United States National Museum. Proceedings, 1881, p. 449—VI, p. 14.
Bulletin, Nos. 16 and 24, The Director.
Wellington. New Zealand Institute. Transactions, XV. The Institute.
Westeras. Redogorelse for Hogre Allmanna Liroverket, 1882-83.
The Gymnasium.
Wiesbaden. Nassauische Verein fiir Naturkunde. Jahrbucher, Jahrg. 35.
The Society.
Winnepeg. Manitoba Historical and Scientific Society. Annual report,
1882-83.
Publications, Nos. 1-4. The Society.
Worcester. American Antiquarian Society. Proceedings, II, 2, 3. Pa:tial
Index to Proceedings. List of Publications, 1883. The Society.
Wiirzburg. Physikalisch-medicinische Gesellschaft. Sitzungsberichte, 1882.
The Society.
ie"
et,
uni aoe neh
ae
t
{3}
Ai
4
Oe
phe
R = Pea
oan vohig a? PSIQOIDS Gr5 ew its Shae cite bes veawegtee
ota ea,
eet Sorte teaser er
. Ae ex sees : + 5 : ives? 8eeees apes r here
fers oo tresatae » Pes reoea
4
,
h
¢
f
a
a
+
‘
as TOME seme Ame
we iy Aetten 4 ett hgd reamed
+e tobe O48 be nena « a> pete
a Ls 1A A Aad bee roakause Mae ba
- +0 —"em ss : i OTP E> le able pie 940 Ale
Aides Toew ewe b toda pees
ey
ener oc mh gel
(v4 OM Rehoe § | Sits Op RARE
LYE ’ [i o rapped
mi
PEL tila weights tive
ay Pour eRe Hens cup ops
af
: i
wehdceinscotevs taxsalieseetlbeQel
lyst cq ed lenges peer wen cern eegage fad [8
hv) beep sc eselEbandess es pananneeons f:
. . ;
ne dase hn he
abe testlepes deen danryaee te
bow s WE ae OF wD Hee E Se Gey rE ae Ook Pest es siste A b ddgs nist Taababe
Bal Stl. ih
cs oo Fa ESR te thE fet Od
Pre bre
SY Rey me
sev hbeisbacy thateas One psy ett oa
enn
INDEX TO GENERA.
1883.
ADICS.cccccecesserceeces 187, 191, 201, 256
CHT UScecerciissnaccaesnsescrescosiecacssces 45
ACCENEOL......000ceccecsccsccccccvccccres 266
Accipiter.........0 Goascasossen Sthssqocc 66
PAG Obesasecsseces COOODOSOCCCOOECICONOSHIGOS 74
ACH PNOD ON sete cs ceseocseesecescseseess 77
Aerocephalus........cecse-ees sesmossaces 266
Acroloxus........06 Redescessncscecsacarse 216
Actinosphxrium ...... ...sceccccoseess 125
NAAOX. cocccconccceess dosnnconcocconesoeso 269
ING GIBIILCH: o.coc-cscsassnccacecnccscoasese 67
Agathaumas...sccccccccccssccccssesceoes 99
Agelaus......scccccees eseaeccees sco gato 63
AZONUS..ccccccscccccsccscceccsrsscosccecs 2¢3
AZOSIA....20cceee Soccoconasscanos9076 141, 153
NGXeesescass peaaneae dats Aoaaseco (ate)
PANG Dldimense sesacisessoscaasaiacasaaqscacese 190
Alburnops.........sc0ee peeecsasicenessaer 143
PANTER aetanaececacocsasacesccasencseccsse. 190
Amblystoma......... 14, 16, 23, 24,. 33
Amphiuma.......... Sencognocnescis 177, 178
PAMNATITUS crsccecssacescnsssase 132, 1383, 161
FATINING Ol Bi weaescacscesceessiearcecesscsas cee 171
PATAPC IS wasecsssecccossnsassertecccsscssen 62
Am pPhile pty sca... ccnencccasscccesensss 318
PANIC CHAT Sp aeacacancasarecsionecseceserssce 107
ADAS.......2000 mocaacee onocnD conse eaeseuce 67
ANCDYDOPSIS.......cccceccecrsccrercsecs 144
Ancylodon.........00. Sabeseasesccesscas 289
AN CVlMSsasecesessercrcaies
Melanerpes
Melania
Sette meee eee e ee eseseeeeas ss
SOEs eee sew e sees sense ees seseesese
NCR oo cms eninnawacsceneses Pees 266,
Melospiza............ mornoacecteeeerotos:
Menopoma........ atin een «tease es
MR on ite ens :.-5 + 21 he
i
ee
Rw OVS ee ee
QH Academy of natural sciences
1 of Philadelphia
A2 Proceedings
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
es
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
STORAGE
ey
eae
al %
13
fee ts
by ck
ioe
ot
unt
meen
its
phe
Le
te
or
ee Schon
roan
a
Seer
~
Pit
He aan
seapueee
Uh sae gat
Ri ity
Pe fe: